JP6880738B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. It is known that these gaming machines perform a lottery using numerical information when a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and give a privilege to the player according to the result of the lottery.

For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in a game area, numerical information is acquired from an update means for updating numerical information for lottery, and the acquired numerical information is used. It is determined whether or not the winning information is supported (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Further, there is also known a configuration in which numerical information is acquired based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition, and a specific effect or notification is performed based on the result of a lottery performed using the numerical information.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-261415

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to play a game preferably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preferably performing a game.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above problems includes a game machine front body that can be opened and closed, and a gaming machine front body.
Launch operation means operated to launch the game ball,
A predetermined detection means for detecting a game ball and
A game value-adding means that is electrically connected to the predetermined detection means and executes a process for adding a game value to the game.
A processing execution means that is electrically connected to the game value-adding means and executes a predetermined process,
A payout control means that is electrically connected to the game value-adding means and drives and controls the payout means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game value-adding means is
A first reference information storage means that stores reference information that is information used in the process for imparting the game value and is information that is referred to for the detection of the predetermined detection means.
The reference stored in the first reference information storage means after the predetermined supply of power to the gaming machine is started and before the execution of the predetermined processing for advancing the game is started. A first transmission means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to the information to the processing execution means, and
A second transmission means that transmits a predetermined information signal based on the ball entry information, which is information acquired based on the detection by the predetermined detection means, to the processing execution means.
A third transmission means that transmits a predetermined state signal to the processing execution means when the front body of the gaming machine is opened and a predetermined state occurs.
Equipped with a,
The processing execution means is
A second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the game value-adding means, and a second reference information storage means.
An execution means that executes the predetermined process based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means.
A processing result information storage means for storing processing result information which is information on the processing result of the predetermined processing by the execution means, and a processing result information storage means.
A means for storing information corresponding to the predetermined state signal transmitted from the third transmission means when the predetermined state signal is received, and
With
The payout control means is configured so that the reference information signal corresponding to the reference information stored in the first reference information storage means is not transmitted, and the game value adding means is based on the result of the game. The payout control means executes drive control of the payout means based on the transmitted payout instruction signal.
The payout control means includes means for executing a process for externally outputting a specific signal to the outside of the gaming machine based on the execution of the drive control of the payout means.
The game value-adding means is a main control means for controlling the progress of the game.
The processing execution means is an effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect.
The predetermined process is a process corresponding to the state of the game machine and is different from the process of paying out the game ball .

According to the present invention, it is possible to make the game suitable.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine by disassembling. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board. It is a front view of the game board which shows the periphery of the adjustment mechanism in an enlarged manner. (A) is a front view and a right side view of a rotating body separated from the adjusting mechanism, and (b) is a front view and a plan view of the rotating body. It is a cross-sectional view of the window panel and the game board in the case where the front surface of the game board is cut right above the intake port in a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board. (A), (b) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown for demonstrating the movement of the game ball incorporated in the adjustment mechanism. (A), (b) is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown for demonstrating the movement of the game ball discharged from the adjustment mechanism and winning a prize in the first through gate. It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism which shows the movement of the game ball discharged from the adjustment mechanism and deviates from the 1st through gate. It is a cross-sectional view of a window panel and a game board when (a) a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board is cut directly above the intake port, and (b) is a case where the window panel and the game board are cut in a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first blade part, (c) is a cross-sectional view of a window panel and a game board when the area directly above the intake port is cut in a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the composition concerning the discharge of the game ball which flowed down the game area. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. (A) It is a low frequency winning judgment value table showing the winning judgment value for the general electric opening lottery in the low frequency support mode, and (b) the high frequency showing the winning judgment value for the general electric opening lottery in the high frequency support mode. This is a winning judgment value table. (A)-(c) It is a time chart which shows the timing which the electric power opening winning may occur in the pachinko machine for comparison. (A) to (d) It is a time chart which shows the timing when the general electric opening winning may occur. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the open counter update process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary power control process which is executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information acquisition process of the normal drawing side executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure fluctuation start processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric opening lottery process which is executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during the determination of a general drawing executed by the main CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration in which the detection result of the ball entry detection sensor is input to the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric structure of the payout control device and various devices communicating with the payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the payout side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric structure of the management IC. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of the input port of management side I / F. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of the correspondence memory. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the recognition process which is executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process which is executed by the management side CPU. It is a time chart which shows how the information of the correspondence relation between the 1st to 15th buffers and a signal type is stored in the correspondence relation memory (a) to (d). It is a flowchart which shows the management output process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the history setting process executed by the management side CPU. (A) to (e) are time charts showing how history information is stored in the history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the data output processing executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output executed by the management side CPU. It is a front view of the game board which enlarges and shows the periphery of the adjustment mechanism in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a plan view of the housing shown by cutting directly above the adjusting mechanism, and (b) is a front view of the housing shown by enlarging the circumference of the rotation shaft. It is a front view of the rotating body separated from the adjustment mechanism. (A) It is a cross-sectional view of the window panel and the game board when the distribution nail is cut in a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board, and (b) is discharged from the adjustment mechanism and wins the first through gate. It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown to explain the movement of the game ball, and (c) the cross section of the window panel and the game board when the distribution nail is cut in a plane perpendicular to the surface of the game board. It is a front view of (d) the adjustment mechanism shown for demonstrating the movement of the game ball discharged from the adjustment mechanism and deviating from the first through gate. (A)-(d) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown for demonstrating the movement of the game ball which is taken in and carried by the adjustment mechanism. (A)-(c) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown for demonstrating the movement of the game ball near the intake port. It is a front view of the game board which enlarges and shows the periphery of the adjustment mechanism in 3rd Embodiment. (A) It is a front view of the game board which shows enlarged the periphery of the electric nail in a permitted position, and (b) is the front view of the game board which shows enlarged around the electric nail in a prohibited position. (A)-(c) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown for demonstrating the movement of the game ball around the adjustment mechanism. (A)-(c) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown for demonstrating how the pinching of a game ball is eliminated in the upper part of the adjustment mechanism. It is a front view of the game board which enlarges and shows the periphery of the adjustment mechanism in 4th Embodiment. It is a vertical cross-sectional view when a rotating body is cut in a plane perpendicular to the surface of a game board. (A)-(d) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown for demonstrating the movement of the game ball discharged from the adjustment mechanism and winning a prize in the 1st through gate. (A), (b) is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown for demonstrating the movement of the game ball discharged from the adjustment mechanism and deviating from the first through gate. It is a front view of the game board which enlarges and shows the periphery of the adjustment mechanism in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the adjusting device in the closed state, and (b) is a front view of the adjusting device in the open state. (A)-(d) It is a front view of the adjustment mechanism shown for demonstrating the movement of a game ball around the adjustment mechanism. It is a front view of the game board in 6th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the structure of (a), (b) the second actuating opening. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view of a state seen from the side of the distribution winning device, and (b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of a state seen from the back side of the sorting winning device. It is a front view of the game board which enlarges and shows the periphery of the adjustment mechanism in 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of the input port of the management side I / F in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the recognition process which is executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process which is executed by the management side CPU. It is a time chart which shows how the information of the correspondence relation between the 1st to 12th buffers and a signal type is stored in the correspondence relation memory (a) to (h). It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric structure of the management IC in 9th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of the input port of management side I / F. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process executed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure correspondence processing executed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output executed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure correspondence processing which is executed by the management side CPU in tenth embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing an opportunity specifying process executed by the main CPU in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process executed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the trigger identification process which is executed by the main CPU in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing executed by the management side CPU in 13th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the history setting process executed by the management side CPU in 14th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the history memory in 15th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the history setting process executed by the management side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of the MPU of the main control device in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process executed by the main CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of the main control device in 17th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the configuration of the input port of management side I / F. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the history setting process executed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output executed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the parameter management process executed by the main CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the signal path which transmits the detection result of each ball entry detection sensor in 18th Embodiment to a main CPU and a management IC.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area PA is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. Have. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration in the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 formed by attaching the game board 24 having the above configuration to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 so that almost the entire area of the game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the gaming area PA is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. It may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. In each opening, there are a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a first through gate 35, a second through gate 39, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, and a general. Figure Unit 38 and the like are provided respectively. A total of four general winning openings 31 are provided, and one each is provided for the others.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of the symbol. The symbol display device 41 includes a display surface 41a for displaying an effect, and is arranged in an opening 24c provided in the game board 24 so that the display surface 41a can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. There is. Further, in the variable display unit 36, a center frame 57 is arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The upper portion of the center frame 57 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is not deteriorated due to the fall of the game ball B1 does not occur. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the center frame 57 includes a roof unit 58 provided so as to define the upper edge and the left and right side edges of the opening 24c. The game board 24 is provided with game area PAs on both the left side and the right side of the center frame 57.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the game ball is formed by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. A guide rail for guiding B1 is configured. The game ball B1 launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launch mechanism 27 supplies a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail and a game ball B1 stored in the upper plate 55a, which will be described later, onto the launch rail 27a. It includes a feed device 27b and a solenoid 27c which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball B1 supplied on the launch rail 27a toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by rotating the firing operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game ball B1 is launched. By adjusting the amount of rotation in the rotation operation, the player can launch the game ball B1 aiming at the game area PA on the left side of the center frame 57 and aim at the game area PA on the right side of the center frame 57. The game ball B1 can be launched.

As shown in FIG. 3, even if a ball enters the first through gate 35 and the second through gate 39, the game ball B1 is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls B1 are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when one game ball B1 enters the first operating port 33 or one game ball B1 enters the second operating port 34. In that case, one prize ball is paid out, and when one game ball B1 is entered into the general winning opening 31, 10 prize balls are paid out and a special electric prize is awarded. When one game ball B1 enters the device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 may be smaller than that in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is the first operating port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and the game ball B1 that has not entered the various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball B1, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball B1 passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball B1 is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the game area PA after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the flow of the game area PA is continued without being discharged from the game area PA. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of the game ball B1 into the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the first The entry of the game ball B1 into the through gate 35 and the second through gate 39 is also referred to as a prize.

As shown in FIG. 3, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are opened upward. Further, both operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operating port 33 faces upward. The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the general electric accessory 34a, the game ball B1 cannot win a prize in the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, a prize can be won in the second operating port 34.

As shown in FIG. 3, in the game area PA on the left side of the center frame 57, the first through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the game ball B1 in the flow direction from the second operating port 34. The first through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball B1 that has won the first through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has won the first through gate 35 reaches the area where the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided, and the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 It is possible to win one of them.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the game area PA on the right side of the center frame 57, a second through gate 39 is provided on the upstream side of the game ball B1 in the flow direction from the second operating port 34. .. The second through gate 39 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball B1 that has won the second through gate 39 flows down the game area PA after winning. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has won the second through gate 39 reaches the area where the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided, and the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 It is possible to win one of them.

Based on the winning of the through gates 35 and 39, the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, a lottery for opening the Fuden, which is a lottery, is performed triggered by winning the through gates 35 and 39, and is provided in the lower left corner of the game area PA where the game ball B1 does not pass. A variable display of the pattern is performed on the normal drawing display unit 38a of the drawing unit 38. Then, when the result of the Fuden opening lottery is the Fuden opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the Fuzu display unit 38a is completed, the state shifts to the Fuden opening state. In the open state of the general electric power, the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the through gates 35 and 39 are won, the general electric accessory 34a is intermittently opened to support the winning of the second operating port 34 in the low frequency support mode. In addition to the low-frequency support mode, a high-frequency support mode is set in which the general electric accessory 34a is opened in a manner that makes it easier for the game ball B1 to win a prize in the second operating port 34.

In the pachinko machine 10, in the low-frequency support mode in which the transition to the high-frequency support mode has not been performed, the player is directed to aim at the game area PA on the left side where the first through gate 35 is provided. Will be done. Then, when the mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode, the player is directed to aim at the game area PA on the right side where the second through gate 39 is provided. Details of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode will be described later.

The cathode ray display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix display devices. In addition, as a pattern that is variablely displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal drawing unit 38, a normal drawing holding display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal drawing display unit 38a. The maximum number of game balls B1 that have won through gates 35 and 39 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the general drawing reservation display unit 38b.

A winning lottery is performed with a winning prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clarified through the display effect in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

More specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 37a. The display area of the special figure display unit 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display unit 37a, a winning lottery is performed triggered by a prize in the first operating port 33 or a winning in the second operating port 34, so that a variable display of the pattern or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The special figure display unit 37a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix display devices. The pattern displayed on the special figure display unit 37a includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed. Is displayed.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure holding display unit 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display unit 37a. The number of winning game balls B1 in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display unit 37b.

Regarding the symbol display device 41 In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. You may.

In the symbol display device 41, when the special symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, the symbol is displayed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows of upper, middle, and lower rows are set as a plurality of display areas, and the numbers "1" to "9" are added to each symbol row. The symbols are scrolled and displayed in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, the scroll display in all the symbol rows is started first, the scroll display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row → the lower symbol row → the middle symbol row, and finally a predetermined value is specified in each symbol row. It ends with the symbol still displayed. Then, for example, in a game round in which the game result is a big hit result, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset effective line on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41.

In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by winning a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also the display effect in the open / close execution mode that shifts after winning is performed. Will be. Further, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and the game times 1 until the predetermined result is displayed and ended. Corresponds to times. Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and for example, only numbers may be variablely displayed as the symbol.

If a big hit is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won. The special electric winning device 32 includes a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and also includes an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in either the closed state or the open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball B1 cannot win a prize, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball B1 can win a prize when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is won in the lottery. It has become like. By the way, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which the transition is made when a hit result is obtained. It should be noted that, although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which it is more difficult for the prize to occur than in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 3, an adjusting mechanism 180 for adjusting the timing at which the game ball B1 is supplied toward the first through gate 35 is provided above the first through gate 35. The adjusting mechanism 180 supplies the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 by discharging the game ball B1 toward the lower first through gate 35. The distance between the adjusting mechanism 180 and the first through gate 35 is such that the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 180 reaches the first through gate 35 after flowing down a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. .. The adjusting mechanism 180 will be described below.

FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24 in which the configurations above the first through gate 35 and the first through gate 35 are enlarged. As shown in FIG. 4, the adjusting mechanism 180 takes in the game ball B1 at the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 180 and conveys it to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180, and the adjusting drive for rotating the rotating body 183 clockwise. A unit 184 and an accommodating unit 181 that accommodates the rotating body 183 and prevents the game ball B1 that is taken into the rotating body 183 by the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation from being thrown out in front of the discharge position.

As shown in FIG. 4, the rotating body 183 is provided in the center of the adjusting mechanism 180. The rotating body 183 is formed by providing four recessed portions 183b to 183e capable of taking in the game ball B1 on a substantially disk-shaped transparent resin member whose diameter is reduced toward the rear. ing. FIG. 5A is a front view and a right side view of the rotating body 183, and FIG. 5B is a front view and a plan view of the rotating body 183. As shown in FIG. 5A, the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 are formed so as to be recessed from the outer edge portion of the rotating body 183 to the axial side. The recessed portions 183b to 183e are arranged in the order of the first recessed portion 183b → the second recessed portion 183c → the third recessed portion 183d → the fourth recessed portion 183e in the rotational direction so that the centers thereof exist at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. It is formed so as to be.

As shown in FIG. 5A, none of the recessed portions 183b to 183e have reached the position of the axis of the rotating body 183 and are discontinuous with each other. Each recessed portion 183b to 183e has a shape and a size in which the entire gaming ball B1 can be inserted. In each of the recessed portions 183b to 183e, the inner wall near the outer edge of the rotating body 183 has an inclination such that the recessed portions 183b to 183e become wider toward the outer edge, and the width of each recessed portion 183b to 183e near the outer edge is It is set wider than the diameter of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the rotating body 183 has a first blade portion 188 sandwiched between the fourth recessed portion 183e and the first recessed portion 183b, and the first recessed portion 183b and the second recessed portion 183c. It is sandwiched between the second blade portion 189 sandwiched between the blades, the third blade portion 190 sandwiched between the second recessed portion 183c and the third recessed portion 183d, and the third recessed portion 183d and the fourth recessed portion 183e. It includes a fourth blade portion 191 and.

As shown in FIG. 4, in the adjusting mechanism 180, in the accommodating portion 181 accommodating the rotating body 183, the game ball B1 taken into the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is transferred from the front surface of the game board 24 Also has a base body 181a that prevents it from moving backwards. The base body 181a includes a fixing flange 181b formed so as to project radially from the outer periphery of the base body 181a.

FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the window panel 52 and the game board 24 when the intake port 185 is cut in a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 24. In order to explain the configuration of the accommodating portion 181, FIG. 6 shows a state in which the rotating body 183 is removed. As shown in FIG. 6, a fixing recess 24d capable of accommodating the base body 181a and the fixing flange 181b is formed on the front surface of the game board 24. As shown in FIG. 4, the accommodating portion 181 is a game board 24 by screwing the fixing flange 181b in a state where the base body 181a and the fixing flange 181b are accommodated in the fixing recessed portion 24d (FIG. 6). It is fixed to. The base body 181a is located behind the rotating body 183, and the front surface of the base body 181a is coplanar with the front surface of the game board 24.

As shown in FIG. 4, a storage space for accommodating the rotating body 183 is formed in front of the base body 181a, and the rotating body 183 is housed in the accommodating space. An adjustment drive unit 184 is arranged behind the rotating body 183. The adjustment drive unit 184 includes an output shaft 184a extending from the front surface of the adjustment drive unit 184 toward the front in a manner orthogonal to the front surface of the game board 24. The rotating body 183 is connected to the output shaft 184a so that the axis of the rotating body 183 is located on the same straight line as the output shaft 184a of the adjusting drive unit 184.

The adjustment drive unit 184 is connected to the output port of the MPU 62 (see FIG. 12) described later. When the drive signal is supplied and the adjustment drive unit 184 is put into the drive state, the rotating body 183 rotates clockwise at an angular velocity of 90 ° in 1 sec. A stepping motor is used as the adjustment drive unit 184, and specifically, a 1-2 phase excitation drive that alternately performs 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation is adopted. The phase excitation method is not limited to this, and other phase excitation methods may be adopted. The adjustment drive unit 184 has a configuration in which the output shaft makes one revolution by transmitting an excitation signal for 500 pulses from the main control device 60, and the angle change based on the excitation signal of one pulse, that is, the angle change per step is It is 0.72 °.

As shown in FIG. 4, the accommodating portion 181 includes upright walls 181c and 181d for partitioning the accommodating space. The accommodation space is partitioned by the standing walls 181c and 181d to be one size larger than the rotating body 183. The distance from the center of the rotating body 183 to the upright walls 181c and 181d of the accommodating portion 181 is longer than the distance from the center of the rotating body 183 to the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191. The difference is shorter than the radius of the game ball B1. Therefore, the possibility that the game ball B1 enters between the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191 and the standing walls 181c and 181d is excluded.

A plurality of upright walls 181c and 181d are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction of the base body 181a so as to project forward from the front surface of the base body 181a. Of the plurality of standing walls 181c and 181d, the left standing wall 181c existing on the left side and the right standing wall 181d existing on the right side are laterally separated from each other, so that the upper part of the accommodating portion 181 is separated. There is an intake port 185.

As shown in FIG. 4, the shape and size of the intake port 185 allow one game ball B1 to pass through the intake port 185, and a plurality of game balls B1 simultaneously take in the game ball B1. It is set so that it is impossible to pass through the mouth 185. Therefore, the adjustment mechanism 180 can take in the game balls B1 one by one from the take-in port 185.

The left standing wall 181c prevents the game ball B1 flowing down from the upper left of the intake port 185 from entering the inside of the adjusting mechanism 180. Therefore, the game ball B1 is taken into the recessed portions 183b to 183e that open toward the left, and the game ball B1 is discharged after being conveyed for a long time in the order of the upper part → the right part → the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180. There is nothing. Further, the right standing wall 181d is outside the adjusting mechanism 180 by the centrifugal force of the rotating body 183 before the game ball B1 taken into the adjusting mechanism 180 is conveyed to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180 and reaches the discharge timing. Prevent being thrown into.

As shown in FIG. 4, the left standing wall 181c and the right standing wall 181d are separated from each other in the lateral direction, so that the accommodating portion 181 is opened downward. Therefore, the game ball B1 taken into any of the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 and conveyed to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180 is discharged toward the first through gate 35 located below.

As shown in FIG. 4, the accommodating portion 181 includes a discharge protruding portion 181e for discharging the game ball B1 incorporated in the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 at a predetermined discharge position. The discharge protrusion 181e is provided near the lower part of the center of the base body 181a. As shown in FIG. 6, the discharge protrusion 181e protrudes from the front surface of the base body 181a to the front so as to have a protrusion dimension of 9 mm to an intermediate position of the game area PA.

As described above, the length dimension of the game area PA (FIG. 3) sandwiched between the front surface of the game board 24 and the back surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1) is 18 mm in the front-rear direction, and the game ball B1. The diameter of is 11 mm. Therefore, the ejection protrusion 181e includes a game ball B1 located on the back side (game board 24 side) of the game area PA, and a game ball B1 located on the front side (window panel 52 side) of the game area PA. It has a length dimension in the front-rear direction that allows contact with both of them. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the discharge protrusion 181e is formed so as to extend downward from the lower vicinity of the center of the base body 181a.

As shown in FIG. 4, the distance from the center of the rotating body 183 to the lower end of the discharge protrusion 181e is from the center of the rotating body 183 to the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blades 188 to 191 (FIG. 5A). Is shorter than the distance of. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, the first blade portion 188 and the third blade portion 190 of the rotating body 183 are provided with a collision avoidance groove 192 for avoiding a collision with the discharge protrusion 181e. At the same time, as shown in FIG. 5B, the second blade portion 189 and the fourth blade portion 191 are also provided with a collision avoidance groove 192 for avoiding a collision with the discharge protrusion 181e.

The collision avoidance groove 192 is provided to be larger than the protrusion dimension of the discharge protrusion 181e, and does not come into contact with the rotating body 183 regardless of the rotation state of the discharge protrusion 181e. Therefore, the discharge protrusion 181e does not hinder the rotation of the rotating body 183.

As shown in FIG. 4, the discharge protrusion 181e includes a discharge right side surface 181 g that is inclined downward to the left as a right side surface. The discharge right side surface 181 g comes into contact with the game balls B1 existing in the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 at the discharge position of the game ball B1 incorporated in the adjusting mechanism 180. The game ball B1 is conveyed to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180 by the rotation of the rotating body 183, and then is discharged toward the lower first through gate 35 when it comes into contact with the discharge right side surface 181 g.

When the game ball B1 is ejected directly downward from the adjusting mechanism 180, the game ball B1 wins a prize in the first through gate 35 located below without colliding with an obstacle on the way. As described above, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 180 reaches the first through gate 35 after flowing down a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. Specifically, the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge position reaches the first through gate 35 after flowing down a distance of approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. Since the distance from the discharge position to the first through gate 35 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1, the discharged game ball B1 may be discharged from the first through gate 35 depending on the discharge direction and discharge speed of the game ball B1 at the discharge position. There is a possibility that it will come off. The discharge position of the game ball B1 in the adjusting mechanism 180 is fixed by the discharge protrusion 181e, and the distance from the discharge position to the first through gate 35 is short. Therefore, when the discharged game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35, the game ball B1 is discharged by the adjustment mechanism 180 until the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35. The time is within the specified range.

Since the discharge timing of the game ball B1 is generated in the adjustment mechanism 180 in a cycle of 1 sec, the winning of the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 is also generated in a cycle of approximately 1 sec. The details of the flow in which the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjusting mechanism 180 will be described later.

The rotating body 183 rotates clockwise with the game ball B1 taken in from the intake port 185 present in the recessed portions 183b to 183e, so that the game ball B1 is directed toward the lower portion of the adjusting mechanism 180. Transport.

The adjusting mechanism 180 can take in the game ball B1 flowing down from above when any of the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is open upward. By making the inner wall of the recessed portions 183b to 183e near the outer edge of the rotating body 183 wide toward the outer edge, the adjusting mechanism 180 can take in the game ball B1 at the intake port 185. Period can be extended. As a result, the number of game balls B1 taken into the adjusting mechanism 180 can be increased, and the number of game balls B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 180 can be increased.

Further, by providing the rotating body 183 with a plurality of recessed portions 183b to 183e, the rotation speed of the rotating body 183 required to discharge the game ball B1 from the adjusting mechanism 180 at a cycle of 1 sec is reduced. Can be done. By slowly rotating the rotating body 183 in this way, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball B1 that has flowed down to the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 180 is taken into the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183.

Here, the configuration around the adjustment mechanism 180 in the game board 24 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, above the intake port 185, a plurality of nails 24b are provided to collect the game ball B1 flowing down the game area PA upstream of the intake port 185 toward the intake port 185. It is arranged. In the upper left area of the intake port 185, a plurality of nails 24b for changing the course of the game ball B1 flowing down the area to the right and directing the game ball B1 toward the intake port 185 are arranged. In the upper right area of the intake port 185, a plurality of nails 24b for changing the course of the game ball B1 flowing down the area to the left and directing the game ball B1 toward the intake port 185 are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 4, the plurality of nails 24b arranged in the upper vicinity of the intake port 185 have a distance from the nail 24b to the left standing wall 181c and a distance from the nail 24b to the right standing wall 181d. It is provided so as to be one size longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. Further, on the left and right sides of the adjusting mechanism 180, a space is provided for allowing the game ball B1 that has flowed down toward the intake port 185 and not taken into the intake port 185 to escape downstream. No nail 24b is arranged in the space. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has flowed down near the intake port 185 and has not been taken into the adjusting mechanism 180 is adjusted from between the nail 24b and the left standing wall 181c, or between the nail 24b and the right standing wall 181d. It can be discharged to the left and right spaces of the mechanism 180. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 from staying around the intake port 185.

Next, the detailed configuration of the adjusting mechanism 180 will be described. First, a configuration for taking in the game ball B1 will be described.

As described above, the diameter of the game ball B1 is 11 mm, and the length dimension of the game area PA (FIG. 3) in the front-rear direction is 18 mm, which is larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. As described above, in the game area PA, there is a gap that enables the game ball B1 flowing down the game area PA to move in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 5, each recessed portion 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is inclined toward the front and toward the axial center. Therefore, each of the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is in a state of being inclined downward toward the front when the recessed portions 183b to 183e are in a rotating state in which the recessed portions 183b to 183e are opened upward. Become. For example, as shown in FIG. 4, when the first recessed portion 183b is open upward, the first recessed portion 183b is inclined downward toward the front.

The game ball B1 taken into the adjusting mechanism 180 from the intake port 185 fits into any of the recessed portions 183b to 183e that are open upward at the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 180. As described above, the recessed portions 183b to 183e that are open upward at the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 180 are in a state of being inclined downward toward the front. Therefore, while the game ball B1 is conveyed toward the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180 by the rotation of the rotating body 183, the game ball B1 is positioned on the front side (window panel 52 side) in the game area PA having a thickness in the front-rear direction. To do.

Next, the timing at which the adjusting mechanism 180 takes in the game ball B1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, the intake port 185 is opened upward. Assuming that the state in which any of the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is located below the intake port 185 is the import permission state, the inside of the adjustment mechanism 180 is from the intake port 185 in the import permission state. The game ball B1 that has entered the space can be accommodated in the recessed portions 183b to 183e.

On the other hand, assuming that the rotating body 183 rotates from the state of FIG. 4 and one of the blades 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 is located below the intake port 185, the capturing is prohibited. In the prohibited state, the game ball B1 trying to enter the inside of the adjusting mechanism 180 from the intake port 185 collides with the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191. In this case, the game ball B1 is not taken into the adjustment mechanism 180.

At the intake port 185 of the adjustment mechanism 180, both a capture permitted state in which the game ball B1 can be captured and a capture prohibited state in which the game ball B1 cannot be captured are obtained as the rotating body 183 rotates. It is repeated alternately.

First, a case where the import port 185 is in the import permission state will be described. 7 (a) and 7 (b) are front views of the game board 24 showing the vicinity of the adjusting mechanism 180 in an enlarged manner. The rotating body 183 of FIG. 7 (a) is in a rotating state in which the first recessed portion 183b is located above, and the rotating body 183 of FIG. 7 (b) is a rotating body 183 of FIG. 7 (a). It is in a state of rotation rotated 90 ° clockwise.

The game ball B1 that has entered the take-in port 185 in the take-in permission state is taken into the recessed portions 183b to 183e located above. For example, as shown in FIG. 7A, the game ball B1 that has entered the intake port 185 with the first recessed portion 183b positioned upward is taken into the first recessed portion 183b.

The game ball B1 taken into any of the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 at the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 180 is conveyed toward the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180 as the rotating body 183 rotates. At this time, the right standing wall 181d prevents the game ball B1 taken into the adjusting mechanism 180 from being released to the outside of the adjusting mechanism 180 before the discharge timing is reached.

For example, as shown in FIG. 7 (a), the game ball B1 taken into the first recessed portion 183b first has a force from the first blade portion 188 toward the front in the rotational direction (to the right in FIG. 7 (a)). Will be added. Next, the game ball B1 that is about to fall due to its own weight is supported by the second blade portion 189.

Then, as shown in FIG. 7B, drag is applied from the right standing wall 181d to the game ball B1 that is about to fall toward the lower right due to its own weight and the force applied from the second blade portion 189. , The game ball B1 is prevented from falling to the lower right. In this state, the rotating body 183 rotates, so that the game ball B1 taken in by the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 180 is conveyed toward the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180.

The game ball B1 taken into any of the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 and conveyed to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180 has a discharge right side surface 181 g (FIG. 4) of the discharge protrusion 181e (FIG. 4). When they come into contact with each other, they are discharged in a certain direction.

Here, as shown in FIG. 5B, the side surface of the first blade portion 188 located on the front side in the rotation direction is set as the first front surface 188b, and the second side is located on the front side in the rotation direction. The side surface of the blade portion 189 is referred to as a second front surface 189b. Further, the side surface of the third blade portion 190 located on the front side in the rotation direction is the third front surface 190b, and the side surface of the fourth blade portion 191 located on the front side in the rotation direction is the fourth front surface 191b. And. The front surfaces 188b to 191b of the blade portions 188 to 191 are surfaces extending in the radial direction of the rotating body 183.

When the game ball B1 incorporated in any of the recessed portions 183b to 183e (FIG. 5B) of the rotating body 183 comes into contact with the discharge right side surface 181 g and reaches the discharge timing, the game ball B1 is the game ball. In the recessed portions 183b to 183e where B1 exists, the front surfaces 188b to 191b on the rear side in the rotation direction and the right side surface for discharge 181g are in contact with each other.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the first recessed portion 183b, the second recessed portion 183c, and the third recessed portion 183d have the same shape and size as each other. Therefore, the discharge mode of the game ball B1 taken into the second recessed portion 183c and conveyed to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180, and the game ball B1 taken into the third recessed portion 183d and conveyed to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180. The discharge mode of is the same as the discharge mode of the game ball B1 which is taken in by the first recessed portion 183b and conveyed to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180.

On the other hand, the fourth recessed portion 183e has the same shape as the first recessed portion 183b, the second recessed portion 183c, and the third recessed portion 183d, and is slightly smaller than the three recessed portions 183b to 183d. Has a size. Therefore, the discharge mode of the game ball B1 taken into the fourth recessed portion 183e and conveyed to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180 is taken into the first recessed portion 183b to the third recessed portion 183d to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180. It may be different from the discharge mode of the conveyed game ball B1. When the discharge mode of the game ball B1 discharged from all the recessed portions 183b to 183e is the same, the movement of the game ball B1 after discharge becomes monotonous. On the other hand, by changing the discharge mode of the game ball B1 discharged from the fourth recessed portion 183e, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the player's interest in the movement of the game ball B1 after the discharge.

First, a discharge mode of the game ball B1 which is taken in by any one of the first recessed portion 183b to the third recessed portion 183d and conveyed to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180 will be described by exemplifying the case of the first recessed portion 183b.

8 (a) and 8 (b) are front views of the game board 24 showing the vicinity of the adjusting mechanism 180 in an enlarged manner. FIG. 8A illustrates a state immediately before the game ball B1 incorporated in the first recessed portion 183b reaches the discharge timing, and FIG. 8B shows the game ball B1 reaching the discharge timing. The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 8A, the contact state between the game ball B1 incorporated in the first recessed portion 183b and the right standing wall 181d is eliminated immediately before the discharge timing is reached. As a result, the game ball B1 that has lost its support can fall toward the lower right side. However, since the rotating body 183 rotates at an angular velocity of 90 ° in 1 second, the game ball B1 is pushed from the first blade portion 188 in the rotation direction (left direction in FIG. 8) and in the rotation direction (left direction in FIG. 8). Keep moving to.

As shown in FIG. 8B, the game ball B1 is in contact with the discharge right side surface 181 g and the first front surface 188b at the discharge timing. The distance between the two surfaces 181g and 188b sandwiching the game ball B1 gradually increases from the upper side to the lower side.

As the rotation of the rotating body 183 progresses, in the region sandwiched between the two surfaces 181g and 188b, the region having a width larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 gradually disappears from the upper side. At this time, the force applied to the game ball B1 from the right side surface for discharge 181 g and the force applied to the game ball B1 from the first front surface 188b both have a component that pushes the game ball B1 downward. .. Therefore, the game ball B1 incorporated in the first recessed portion 183b is pushed downward as the rotating body 183 rotates. Then, as shown in FIG. 8B, the game ball B1 is discharged downward from the first recessed portion 183b, and the first through gate 35 is won with a high probability.

At the discharge timing shown in FIG. 8B, the right side surface for discharge 181 g and the first front surface 188b are also directed downward with respect to the game ball B1 which is originally about to fall downward due to its own weight. Apply force to drop. At this time, the movement of the game ball B1 to the left is restricted by the discharge right side surface 181 g. Therefore, the discharge direction of the game ball B1 is limited to one direction, and the probability of winning the first through gate 35 is high.

As described above, in the outer edge portion of the rotating body 183, the width of the recessed portions 183b to 183e is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, the position of the game ball B1 in the recessed portions 183b to 183e is not the same every time immediately before the discharge timing. The discharge direction of the game ball B1 is different depending on the position immediately before the discharge timing of the game ball B1 in the recessed portions 183b to 183e.

At the design stage, most of the game ball B1 incorporated in the first recessed portion 183b, the game ball B1 incorporated in the second recessed portion 183c, and the game ball B1 incorporated in the third recessed portion 183d are first through. The position of the discharge protrusion 181e and the inclination of the discharge right side surface 181 g are adjusted so as to win the gate 35. However, as already described, the distance between the discharge position in the adjusting mechanism 180 and the first through gate 35 is set to be approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, when the game ball B1 discharged from the first recessed portion 183b is caught on the first front surface 188b and pushed to the left, the game ball B1 discharged from the second recessed portion 183c is placed on the second front surface 189b. When the game ball B1 is caught and pushed to the left, or when the game ball B1 discharged from the third recess 183d is caught by the third front surface 190b and pushed to the left, the game ball B1 after being discharged is the first through. It may come off to the left of the gate 35.

Here, a discharge mode of the game ball B1 taken into the fourth recessed portion 183e and conveyed to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180 will be described. FIG. 9 is a front view of the game board 24 showing an enlarged adjustment mechanism 180 for explaining the case where the game ball B1 discharged from the fourth recessed portion 183e is disengaged from the first through gate 35.

As described above, the fourth recessed portion 183e is formed to be slightly smaller than the first recessed portion 183b, the second recessed portion 183c, and the third recessed portion 183d. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9, the game ball B1 discharged from the fourth recessed portion 183e is easily caught by the fourth front surface 191b and pushed to the left, and is likely to come off to the left of the first through gate 35. ..

At the design stage, the winning probability of the game ball B1 discharged from the fourth recess 183e to the first through gate 35 is to the first through gate 35 of the game ball B1 discharged from the other three recesses 183b to 183d. The position of the discharge protrusion 181e and the inclination of the discharge right side surface 181 g are adjusted so as to be lower than the winning probability of.

By configuring a part of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 to be detached from the first through gate 35, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from concentrating only on the uptake of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 180, and to play the game. It is designed so that the person is also interested in the discharge of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 180.

As described above, the discharge protrusion 181e is located below the center of the rotating body 183. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8B, the center of the game ball B1 in contact with the discharge protrusion 181e at the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180 is to the right of the center of the rotating body 183. positioned. The game ball B1 taken into the rotating body 183 at the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 180 comes into contact with the discharging protrusion 181e and is discharged at a timing earlier than rotating 180 ° around the center of the rotating body 183.

The game ball B1 taken in at the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 180 is configured to be discharged before rotating around the center of the rotating body 183 by 180 ° or more and starting to rise, so that the game ball at the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180 is discharged. It is possible to prevent the rise of B1. Further, by setting a short time from the time when the game ball B1 is taken into the adjusting mechanism 180 to the time when the game ball B1 is taken out, the time required for a series of flow of taking in, carrying, and discharging the game ball B1 by the adjusting mechanism 180 is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the player's interest shifts to another in the middle of the series of flows.

As shown in FIG. 8B, when the game ball B1 is in contact with both the ejection protrusion 181e and the rotating body 183 at the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180, the left side of the game ball B1 is in contact. The region sandwiched between the discharge right side surface 181g and the front surfaces 188b to 191b in contact with the right side of the game ball B1 has a shape that gradually widens from the upper part to the lower part. Then, as the clockwise rotation of the rotating body 183 progresses, the width of the region sandwiched between the right side surface for discharge 181 g and the front surface 188b to 191b becomes narrower as a whole. Therefore, in the region sandwiched between the discharge right side surface 181 g and the front surface 188b to 191b, the portion having a width in which the game ball B1 can exist is limited to the lower portion.

As shown in FIG. 8B, the discharge right side surface 181 g is inclined downward to the left. Therefore, when a force in the left direction is applied from the rotating rotating body 183 to the game ball B1 in contact with the discharge right side surface 181 g, the game ball B1 is along the inclination of the discharge right side surface 181 g. Moves to the left and moves downward. At the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180, the game ball B1 in contact with both the ejection protrusion 181e and the rotating body 183 is pushed downward and ejected as the rotating body 183 rotates. Since the discharge right side surface 181 g is inclined downward to the left, it is prevented that the game ball B1 rises and stops without being discharged at the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180.

Next, a configuration will be described in which the game ball B1 that is not taken into the inside of the adjustment mechanism 180 is released to the rear of the game board 24 in an attempt to enter the intake port 185 of the adjustment mechanism 180. As shown in FIG. 4, an escape passage 172 is provided behind the game board 24 as a passage for escaping the game ball B1 that has not been taken in by the intake port 185. The passage entrance 171 which is the entrance of the escape passage 172 is provided on the front surface of the game board 24. The passage entrance 171 is located behind the intake port 185. By letting the game ball B1 that was not taken in at the take-in port 185 escape to the passage entrance 171, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 that was not taken in from staying in the vicinity of the take-in port 185.

First, the game ball B1 that has flowed down to the intake port 185 in the intake prohibited state and has not been taken into the intake port 185 will be described.

10 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the window panel 52 and the game board 24 when the intake port 185 is cut in a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 24, and FIG. 10 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 24. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the 1st blade part 188 when cut in the plane perpendicular to the front surface of 24. In FIGS. 10A and 10B, the rotating body 183 is in a rotating state in which the first blade portion 188 is located above.

As shown in FIG. 10A, when the game ball B1 flows down to the intake port 185 in the intake prohibited state, the game ball B1 is any one of the rotating bodies 183 located below the intake port 185. It comes into contact with the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a (FIG. 5B) of the blade portions 188 to 191.

As shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 have an inclination toward the rear toward the axis. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5A, in a state where the first blade portion 188 is facing upward, the peripheral surface 188a of the first blade portion 188 is inclined downward toward the rear. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10A, the game ball B1 in contact with the peripheral surface 188a of the first blade portion 188 is guided backward.

In the intake prohibited state in which the second blade portion 189 is facing upward, the peripheral surface 189a of the second blade portion 189 is in a state of being inclined downward toward the rear, and the third blade portion 190 is tilted upward. In the facing intake prohibited state, the peripheral surface 190a of the third blade portion 190 is in a state of being inclined downward toward the rear. Further, in the intake prohibited state in which the fourth blade portion 191 is facing upward, the peripheral surface 191a of the fourth blade portion 191 is in a state of being inclined downward toward the rear.

Although not shown, it came into contact with any of the peripheral surface 189a of the second blade portion 189, the peripheral surface 190a of the third blade portion 190, and the peripheral surface 191a of the fourth blade portion 191 facing upward in the intake prohibited state. The game ball B1 is guided backward in the same manner as the game ball B1 in contact with the peripheral surface 188a of the first blade portion 188 shown in FIG. 10A.

As shown in FIG. 4, the passage entrance 171 is an opening provided on the front surface of the game board 24, and is located behind the intake port 185. The passage entrance 171 is formed from the left end of the intake port 185 to the right end of the intake port 185 on the front surface of the game board 24.

The upper end of the passage entrance 171 is more than the upper end of the game ball B1 in contact with the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191 in a state where any of the blade portions 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 is facing upward. It is set higher by about half of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 that flows down from above the game area PA, collides with the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191 that are inclined downward toward the rear, and bounces diagonally backward is sent to the passage entrance 171. You can enter the ball.

On the other hand, the area above the passage entrance 171 is taken into the intake port 185 so that the game ball B1 flowing down the game area PA does not enter the passage entrance 171 before reaching the intake port 185. It is set to the minimum area that makes it possible to prevent the missing game ball B1 from staying and staying.

As shown in FIG. 4, the lower left end of the passage entrance 171 is below the upper end of the back surface of any of the blade portions 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 in a state where the blade portions 188 to 191 are facing upward. Is located in. Further, the lower right end of the passage entrance 171 is located below the lower end on the left side. The details of the lower right end of the passage entrance 171 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the upper portion of the base body 181a in the accommodating portion 181 is guided to the passage entrance 171 by the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a (FIG. 5A) of any of the blade portions 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183. A recessed portion 181f for a passage is formed so as not to interfere with the movement of the game ball B1.

The passage recessed portion 181f is formed from the left end to the right end of the passage entrance 171. On the left side of the recessed portion 181f for passage, the upper end of the base body 181a is below the upper end of the back surface of the blade portions 188 to 191 in a state where any of the blade portions 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 is facing upward. It is formed to be located.

On the left side of the passage recess 181f, the upper end of the base body 181a is located at the same position as the lower end of the passage entrance 171 or above the lower end of the passage entrance 171. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10B, the game ball B1 that has come into contact with the blades 188 to 191 in an attempt to enter the intake port 185 in the intake prohibited state has a peripheral surface 188a of the blades 188 to 191. Guided by ~ 191a, the ball enters the passage entrance 171 without being obstructed by the base body 181a of the accommodating portion 181.

As shown in FIG. 4, an escape passage 172 is formed on the front surface of the game board 24 as a recessed portion that is recessed toward the rear. The escape passage 172 is formed as a recess having a depth dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 in the front-rear direction and a width dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 in the lateral direction. There is. Therefore, the escape passage 172 has a passage cross section that allows the game balls B1 to pass through in a single row.

The upstream side of the escape passage 172 is formed from the passage entrance 171 toward the lower left, and the downstream side of the escape passage 172 is formed vertically downward. The escape passage 172 guides the game ball B1 entered from the passage entrance 171 to the lower left of the first through gate 35.

On the front surface of the game board 24, a step is provided on the edge of the recessed portion formed as the escape passage 172. The escape passage 172 is covered from the front by a transparent acrylic plate 172a formed in the same shape as a portion that does not overlap with the base body 181a of the accommodating portion 181 in the outer shape when the escape passage 172 is viewed from the front. The acrylic plate 172a is fixed to a step portion formed on the edge of the escape passage 172 by an adhesive.

The step formed on the edge of the escape passage 172 has the same depth as the thickness of the acrylic plate 172a in the front-rear direction, and the front surface of the acrylic plate 172a is located on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 24. ing. The escape passage 172 is closed by the acrylic plate 172a and the base body 181a of the accommodating portion 181, and the place where the game ball B1 can enter and exit is limited to the passage entrance 171 and the passage exit 173.

Since the acrylic plate 172a and the adjusting mechanism 180 fixed in front of the escape passage 172 are transparent, the movement of the game ball B1 passing through the escape passage 172 can be visually recognized from the outside. When the movement of the game ball B1 passing through the escape passage 172 cannot be grasped from the outside, the player cannot follow the movement process of the game ball B1 after the game ball B1 enters the passage entrance 171 and the game ball B1. The flow of B1 is interrupted in the middle. On the other hand, by making the game ball B1 passing through the escape passage 172 visible from the outside, the flow of the game ball B1 that can be grasped by the player can be kept continuous.

As shown in FIG. 4, in the game board 24, a passage exit 173, which is an exit of the escape passage 172, is provided at the lower left of the first through gate 35. The passage exit 173 is formed as an opening facing forward on the front surface of the game board 24. The passage exit 173 has a shape and a size capable of discharging the game balls B1 guided by the escape passage 172 one by one toward the front.

As shown in FIG. 4, in the vicinity above the passage exit 173, an outlet for preventing the game ball B1 discharged from the passage exit 173 from colliding with the game ball B1 flowing down in front of the front surface of the game board 24. A roof 174 is provided. The exit roof 174 is provided as a protruding portion protruding from the front surface of the game board 24 toward the window panel 52 (FIG. 1) side, and exists from the front surface of the game board 24 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52. ing. Since the upper surface of the exit roof 174 is inclined downward toward the right, the game ball B1 that flows down from above and comes into contact with the exit roof 174 does not collide with the game ball B1 discharged from the aisle exit 173. You will be guided to the right in the mode.

The game ball B1 that has passed through the escape passage 172 and is discharged from the passage exit 173 in front of the front surface of the game board 24 flows down the game area PA. As shown in FIG. 3, the passage outlet 173 is located upstream of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. Therefore, the game ball B1 discharged from the passage outlet 173 reaches the area where the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided, and is either the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. It is possible to win a prize.

As described above, the game ball B1 that has won the first through gate 35 can also flow down the game area PA and win a prize in either the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. The game ball B1 guided to the first through gate 35 by the adjusting mechanism 180 and the game ball B1 guided to the escape passage 172 by the adjusting mechanism 180 and discharged from the passage outlet 173 are both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port. It can flow down to the area where 34 is provided. Therefore, since the adjusting mechanism 180 is provided, the number of game balls B1 that reach the area where the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided does not decrease.

Returning to the explanation of capturing the game ball B1 at the capture port 185, as shown in FIG. 4, the distance between the blade portions 188 to 191 and the right standing wall 181d in the transition process from the capture permitted state to the capture prohibited state. When the game ball B1 flows down to the intake port 185 at the timing when the game ball B1 changes from a state wider than the diameter of the game ball B1 to a state narrower than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 becomes a blade portion 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 and a right standing wall 181d. It may be pinched. In the following, the state of transition from the import permitted state to the import prohibited state is defined as an intermediate state. Further, it is a surface that defines the right end of the intake port 185, and the end surface located above the right standing wall 181d that sandwiches the game ball B1 together with the blade portions 188 to 191 in the intermediate state is defined as the standing wall side end surface 182. ..

Here, a configuration for escaping the game ball B1 sandwiched between the blade portions 188 to 191 and the standing wall side end surface 182 in the intake port 185 in the intermediate state to the escape passage 172 will be described. First, the inclination of the front surfaces 188b to 191b, which are the side surfaces of the blade portions 188 to 191 and are located on the front side in the rotation direction of the rotating body 183, will be described with reference to FIG. 5 (b).

As shown in FIG. 5B, the front surfaces 188b to 191b of the blade portions 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 are inclined to the rear side in the rotation direction toward the rear. Therefore, in a state where the blade portions 188 to 191 are facing upward, the front surfaces 188b to 191b of the blade portions 188 to 191 are inclined to the left toward the rear.

Regardless of the state of rotation of the rotating body 183, the front surfaces 188b to 191b of the blade portions 188 to 191 located above are inclined to the left toward the rear. Therefore, at the intake port 185 in the intermediate state, the game ball B1 sandwiched between the second front surface 189b of the second blade portion 189 and the standing wall side end surface 182, and the third front surface 190b of the third blade portion 190 stand upright. The game ball B1 sandwiched between the wall-side end surfaces 182 and the game ball B1 sandwiched between the fourth front surface 191b of the fourth blade portion 191 and the standing wall-side end surface 182 are the first front surface 188b of the first blade portion 188. It moves in the same direction as the game ball B1 sandwiched between the standing wall side end surface 182. Hereinafter, the movement of the game ball B1 sandwiched between the first front surface 188b and the upright wall side end surface 182 will be described as an example of the game ball B1 sandwiched between the intake ports 185 in the intermediate state.

As shown in FIG. 5B, the first front surface 188b of the first blade portion 188 facing upward is inclined to the left toward the rear. FIG. 10C is a cross-sectional view of the window panel 52 and the game board 24 when the intake port 185 is cut in a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 24. As shown in FIG. 10 (c), the upright wall side end surface 182 is inclined to the right toward the rear. Therefore, when the game ball B1 flows down to the intake port 185 in the intermediate state and is sandwiched between the first front surface 188b and the standing wall side end surface 182, the two surfaces 182, 188b sandwiching the game ball B1. The rear side (game board 24 side) has a wider "H" shape than the front side (window panel 52 side).

When the rotating body 183 rotates clockwise in a state where the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the two surfaces 182 and 188b, the distance between the two surfaces 182 and 188b gradually decreases from the front side. At this time, the force applied to the game ball B1 from the first front surface 188b and the force applied to the game ball B1 from the standing wall side end surface 182 are both components that move the game ball B1 backward. have. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10 (c), the game ball B1 sandwiched between the two surfaces 182 and 188b is provided behind the intake port 185 due to the rotation of the rotating body 183. It is pushed out toward the entrance 171. Then, the extruded game ball B1 enters the escape passage 172 from the passage entrance 171 and is guided to the passage exit 173.

As already described with reference to FIG. 5B, the front surfaces 188b to 191b of the blade portions 188 to 191 are surfaces extending in the radial direction of the rotating body 183. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is in contact with both the front surfaces 188b to 191b and the right standing wall 181d (FIG. 10 (c)) at the intake port 185, the game ball The front surfaces 188b to 191b in contact with B1 are inclined downward to the left. Therefore, the force applied to the game ball B1 from the front surfaces 188b to 191b by rotating the rotating body 183 clockwise includes a downward component. As a result, when the game ball B1 is pushed out toward the passage entrance 171, the game ball B1 is suppressed from moving upward.

As shown in FIG. 10 (c), the game ball B1 sandwiched by the inclination of the front surfaces 188b to 191b and the end surface 182 on the standing wall side and the rotation of the rotating body 183 is pushed out to the passage entrance 171. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the state in which the game ball B1 is sandwiched while avoiding the game ball B1 from stopping or rising.

As shown in FIG. 4, the right side of the passage entrance 171 and the right side of the recessed portion 181f for the passage have a game ball B1 sandwiched between the blade portions 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 and the right standing wall 181d in the intermediate state. It is formed so that the ball can enter 171.

The game ball B1 sandwiched between the blade portions 188 to 191 and the right standing wall 181d is lower than the game ball B1 in contact with the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of any of the blade portions 188 to 191 in the intake prohibited state. Located in. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 4, the lower right end of the passage entrance 171 is located below the lower end on the left side of the passage entrance 171 and the upper end of the base body 181a on the right side of the recessed portion 181f for the passage is , It is located below the upper end of the base body 181a on the left side of the recessed portion 181f for the passage.

The upper end of the base body 181a on the right side of the recessed portion 181f for the passage is located below the lower end of the game ball B1 sandwiched between the blade portions 188 to 191 and the right standing wall 181d in the intermediate state. Further, the lower end on the right side of the passage entrance 171 is formed so as to be located at the same position as the upper end of the base body 181a on the right side of the recessed portion 181f for the passage or below the upper end of the base body 181a.

However, the game ball B1 taken into any of the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 in the capture permission state passes through the recessed portion 181f for the passage formed behind and enters the passage entrance 171. The upper end of the base body 181a on the right side of the recessed portion 181f for the passage is located slightly below the lower end of the game ball B1 sandwiched between the blade portions 188 to 191 and the right standing wall 181d in the intermediate state. It is set.

Further, as described above, since the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 are inclined toward the axial center side toward the front, the game ball B1 taken into the recessed portions 183b to 183e is the game area PA. It is held on the front side. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball B1 taken into each of the recessed portions 183b to 183e enters the passage entrance 171 through the passage recessed portion 181f located behind (particularly on the right side of the passage recessed portion 181f). It has been reduced.

In the state where one game ball B1 has already been taken into the recessed portions 183b to 183e located above at the take-in port 185 (FIG. 7A), another game ball B1 is taken in. It is conceivable that it will reach 185. In this case, the recessed portions 183b to 183e are already held on the window panel 52 side. Therefore, it is highly possible that the center of the game ball B1 that has reached the intake port 185 later is located behind the center of the game ball B1 that has already been taken into the recessed portions 183b to 183e. In this case, the game ball B1 that has reached the intake port 185 later comes into contact with the game ball B1 taken into the recessed portions 183b to 183e, bounces backward, and enters the passage entrance 171.

If the center of the game ball B1 that has reached the intake port 185 later is deviated to the left or right from the center of the game ball B1 that has been taken into the recessed portions 183b to 183e, the intake port 185 will be used later. The game ball B1 that has reached is in contact with the game balls B1 incorporated in the recessed portions 183b to 183e and bounces to the left or right, and the gaming area PA on the side of the adjustment mechanism 180 is moved without being incorporated into the adjustment mechanism 180. It will flow down to the downstream. In this way, when a plurality of game balls B1 reach the take-in port 185 in a single take-in permission state at the take-in port 185, one game ball B1 has one of the recessed portions 183b to 183e. The remaining game ball B1 can flow down the downstream of the game area PA without staying in the vicinity of the intake port 185.

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to discharge of the game ball B1 that has flowed down the game area PA.

As described above, the game ball B1 that has entered any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a is discharged from the game area PA. In other words, the game ball B1 launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. By entering the crab, it will be discharged from the game area PA. The game ball B1 that has entered any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed corresponding to each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. .. The game ball B1 that has flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 is guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the flowed discharge passages 42 to 48, and is not shown. Will be collected at. Then, the game ball B1 collected by the discharge ball collection unit is discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting the game ball B1 are provided in the discharge passage portions 42 to 48. The discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since four general winning openings 31 are provided as described above, discharge passage portions 42 to 44 exist corresponding to each of the four general winning openings 31. In this case, one detection sensor 42a, one for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the general winning opening 31 adjacent to the right. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the first discharge passage portion 42, and the detection range is provided in the middle position of the second discharge passage portion 43. The second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball B1 that entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 was detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a on the way through the first discharge passage portion 42, and entered the general winning opening 31 to the right of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. The game ball B1 is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a on the way through the second discharge passage portion 43. Further, a third discharge passage portion 44 formed so as to join the two general winning openings 31 on the right side at an intermediate position is provided. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an inlet side region corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and has one outlet side region when the inlet side regions merge in the middle. doing. The third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the outlet side region in the third discharge passage portion 44. The game ball B1 that has entered any of the two general winning openings 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a on the way through the third discharge passage portion 44.

The fourth discharge passage portion 45 exists corresponding to the special electric winning device 32. A special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and the game ball B1 that has entered the special electric winning device 32 is on the way through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. Is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage portion 46 exists corresponding to the first operating port 33. The first operating port detection sensor 46a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the fifth discharging passage portion 46, and the game ball B1 that has entered the first operating port 33 is the fifth discharging passage portion 46. Is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a on the way through. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 exists corresponding to the second operating port 34. The second operating port detection sensor 47a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the sixth discharging passage portion 47, and the game ball B1 that has entered the second operating port 34 is the sixth discharging passage portion 47. Is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a on the way through. The seventh discharge passage portion 48 exists corresponding to the out port 24a. The out port detection sensor 48a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle position of the seventh discharge passage portion 48, and the game ball B1 that has entered the out port 24a is on the way through the seventh discharge passage portion 48. Is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a.

The game ball B1 that is the detection target of any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a is not the detection target of the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. Further, a first gate detection sensor 49a is provided for the first through gate 35, and a second gate detection sensor 50a is provided for the second through gate 39. Therefore, the game ball B1 passing through the first through gate 35 while flowing down the game area PA is detected by the first gate detection sensor 49a, and the game ball B1 passing through the second through gate 39 is the second. It is detected by the gate detection sensor 50a.

As the various detection sensors 42a to 50a, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used, but any sensor is used as long as the game ball B1 can be detected individually. Further, the various detection sensors 42a to 50a are electrically connected to the main control device 60 described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a to 50a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 50a output a LOW level signal when the game ball B1 is not detected, and output a HI level signal when the game ball B1 is detected. The relationship is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 2, a display light emitting unit 53 is provided above the window unit 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 54 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 56 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls B1 paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 56a has a function of storing the excess game ball B1 in the upper plate 55a.

Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. The substrate box 60a may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 60a are inseparably bonded, and a bonding portion that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation is formed, or an adhesive layer remains on the bonding target at the time of peeling. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 60a can be considered.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism unit 73 and a control device collecting unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 to which the game ball B1 supplied from the island facility of the game hall is sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game ball B1 stored in the tank 75. There is. The game ball B1 paid out from the payout device 76 is discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with, for example, a back pack board having a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying a main power supply of 24 volts AC.

The control device collective unit 74 generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by the payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by the operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. It is provided with a power supply / launch control device 78 for controlling the launch of the game ball B1. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. In addition to the main CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit, the MPU 62 includes a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The main ROM 64 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as NOR type flash memory and NAND type flash memory, and is used as read-only. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main CPU 63. As shown in FIG. 12, the main ROM 64 has a low-frequency winning determination value table T1 and a high-frequency winning, which are used in the general electric opening lottery for determining whether or not to open / close the general electric accessory 34a. The determination value table T2 is stored. In the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 and the high-frequency winning determination value table T2, determination values to be won in the public electric open lottery are recorded. Details of the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 and the high-frequency winning determination value table T2 will be described later.

The main RAM 65 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 can be randomly accessed, and the time required for reading is faster than that of the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data and the like for the execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the entry mode of the game ball B1 in the game area PA based on the information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although the details will be described later, the management IC 66 grasps the entry history of the game ball B1 into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. , The frequency of entering balls into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 is grasped according to the grasped ball entering history.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 67 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. A power supply / emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 67, and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 67.

Various sensors such as various ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As described above, the various ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a include a first winning opening detection sensor 42a, a second winning opening detection sensor 43a, a third winning opening detection sensor 44a, a special electric detection sensor 45a, and a first operating port detection sensor. 46a, a second operating port detection sensor 47a, an out port detection sensor 48a, a first gate detection sensor 49a, and a second gate detection sensor 50a. Based on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a, the main CPU 63 makes a ball entry determination to each ball entry unit. Further, in the main CPU 63, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33, and various lottery is executed based on the winning of the second operating port 34.

A power failure monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a voice emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. In the payout control device 77, for example, a prize ball command is issued based on the fact that the game ball B1 has entered the prize ball corresponding entry portion corresponding to the payout of the game ball B1 in the above-mentioned entry portion. It is output. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the voice emission control device 81.

On the output side of the MPU 62, there is a drive unit 32b for special electric power that opens and closes the opening / closing door 32a of the special electric winning device 32, and a drive unit 34b for general electric power that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34. The figure unit 37, the normal figure unit 38, and the adjustment drive unit 184 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 37a and a special figure hold display unit 37b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the normal drawing unit 38 is provided with a normal drawing display unit 38a and a normal drawing holding display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b is executed by the main CPU 63 so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed. Further, when the open state of the utility accessory 34a is won, the drive control of the drive unit 34b for the utility is executed by the main CPU 63 so that the utility accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, at each game round, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a is executed by the main CPU 63. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a is clearly indicated, the display control of the general drawing display unit 38a is executed by the main CPU 63. Further, when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, or when the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 37a, the display control of the special figure holding display unit 37b is performed in the main CPU 63. Is executed, and when the through gates 35 and 39 are won, or when the variable display is started in the normal figure display unit 38a, the display control of the normal figure hold display unit 38b is executed in the main CPU 63. ..

The power failure monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply / emission control device 78, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The power supply / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, the adjustment drive unit 184, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is generated. Supply. By the way, the power supply / emission control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is mainly used. Power for storing and holding is supplied to the main RAM 65 of the control device 60 and the payout control device 77. Further, the power supply / launch control device 78 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

The voice emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 82. Is. The display control device 82 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the voice emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 63 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, a display setting of the special figure display unit 37a, a symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, a display setting of the normal figure display unit 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of hits, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are dislocated and fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the display duration in the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41 are determined. The variable type counter CS is used. Further, to set the initial value of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 used for lottery as to whether or not the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is set to the general electric accessory open state, and the general electric accessory opening counter C4. The opening initial value counter C5 to be used is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, C4, and C5 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, C4, and C5 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided in the main RAM 65 as an acquisition information storage means when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

The hold storage area 65a includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and is used in the winning history of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. At the same time, the combination of the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as the hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1 → the second Each numerical information is stored in the order of the holding area RE2 → the third holding area RE3 → the fourth holding area RE4 in chronological order. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game ball B1 in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 can be held and stored. There is.

The number that can be stored on hold is not limited to 4, and may be any other number such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 37a, and is the start of one game. At that time, a hit / fail judgment is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Further, the information corresponding to the general electric accessory opening counter C4 is stored in the general electric holding storage area 65c provided in the main RAM 65 when a prize is generated in the first through gate 35 or the second through gate 39. Will be done.

The general electric hold storage area 65c includes a general electric hold area HA and a general electric execution area HB. The normal power holding area HA includes a first public power holding area HA1, a second public electric power holding area HA2, a third public electric power holding area HA3, and a fourth public electric power holding area HA4, and includes a first through gate 35 or In accordance with the winning history of the second through gate 39, the numerical information of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 is stored in any of the general electric holding areas HA1 to HA4 as the general electric holding information.

In this case, in the first normal power holding area HA1 to the fourth normal power holding area HA4, when the first through gate 35 or the second through gate 39 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first normal power is received. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the holding area HA1 → the second normal power holding area HA2 → the third normal power holding area HA3 → the fourth normal power holding area HA4. By providing the four normal electric holding areas HA1 to HA4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 or the second through gate 39 can be held and stored. It has become.

The number that can be stored on hold is not limited to 4, and may be any other number such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, or may be a single number.

The Fuden execution area HB is an area in which the Fuden hold information for which the Fuden open lottery is to be performed is stored when the variable display is started on the Fuzu display unit 38a (FIG. 3). Specifically, when the variable display of the normal map display unit 38a is started, the normal power hold information stored in the first normal power hold area HA1 is shifted to the normal power execution area HB.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the general electric accessory opening counter C4 and the opening initial value counter C5 will be described. The general electric accessory opening counter C4 and the opening initial value counter C5 are loop counters that are incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 65535 and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. When the general electric accessory opening counter C4 makes one round, the value of the opening initial value counter C5 at that time is read as the initial value of the general electric accessory opening counter C4.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the public electric open lottery is executed with the winning of the through gates 35 and 39 of the game ball B1 as an opportunity. Numerical information updated by the Fuden accessory opening counter C4 is used for the Fuden opening lottery. Specifically, when the game ball B1 wins the through gates 35 and 39, the numerical information updated by the general electric accessory opening counter C4 is acquired as a random number for opening. In the following, the numerical information that is updated by the Fuden accessory opening counter C4, is acquired when the through gates 35 and 39 are won, and is used for the Fuden opening lottery is described as a random number for opening. In the Fuden opening lottery, it is determined whether or not the random number for opening the lottery target is the winning judgment value that is the target of the Fuden opening winning, and if an affirmative judgment is made, the Fuden opening winning is achieved. , If a negative judgment is made, the result will be off.

In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric accessory 34a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared in the situation where the game ball B1 is continuously launched in the game area PA in the same manner, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is per unit time. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of being in the open state is relatively high or low.

First, the public electric open lottery executed in the low frequency support mode will be described. The main ROM 64 (FIG. 12) stores a low-frequency winning judgment value table T1 in which the winning judgment values to be won in the general power opening lottery executed in the low-frequency support mode are recorded. ing. FIG. 14A is a low-frequency winning determination value table T1.

As shown in FIG. 14A, the winning determination value of the public electric open lottery executed in the low frequency support mode is set to (250 × n-5) to (250 × n). Here, the variable n is a natural number of 1 to 262. In the public power opening lottery executed in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the general power opening is approximately 1/42.

As shown in FIG. 14A, the winning determination values that are the targets of the public electric open winning are serial numbers in units of six. Further, the update cycle of the release random number in the general electric utility release counter C4 is 4 msec. Therefore, in the general electric accessory opening counter C4, the period in which the updated random number for opening becomes the winning determination value of the general electric opening winning target in the general electric opening lottery in the low frequency support mode continues for 24 msec.

Assuming that the period of 24 msec in which the winning determination value that is the target of the general electric open winning continues is the winning target period, as shown in FIG. 14 (a), the winning target period occurs in a 1 sec cycle in the low frequency support mode. Here, assuming that the timing at which the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 (FIG. 4) wins the first through gate 35 is the winning timing, as described above, the cycle in which the winning timing occurs is low. It is 1 sec, which is the same as the cycle in which the winning target period occurs in the frequency support mode.

Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the period in which the winning timing overlaps with the winning target period is the winning continuous period in which the Fuden open winning is continuously generated. The winning continuous period continues until the initial value of the general electric utility opening counter C4 is updated and the timing of occurrence of the winning target period shifts. If the timing of the winning period is different, the non-winning continuous period will continue until the winning period and the winning timing overlap again in the Fuden open lottery executed in the low frequency support mode.

As described above, the winning possible timing at which the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjusting mechanism 180 and the winning to the first through gate 35 is generated can occur in a cycle of 1 sec. Therefore, in the non-winning continuous period and the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode, the normal map fluctuation time in which the normal map display unit 38a (FIG. 3) fluctuates is set to 0.5 sec, which is shorter than 1 sec. Therefore, even if the game ball B1 is continuously discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 in a cycle of 1 sec, when a prize is generated, the fluctuation of the normal drawing display unit 38a corresponding to the previous prize is completed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the state in which the number of reserved information on the general map exceeds the upper limit (4) becomes normal.

Next, the public electric open lottery executed in the high frequency support mode will be described. The main ROM 64 (FIG. 12) stores a high-frequency winning judgment value table T2 in which the winning judgment values to be won in the high-frequency open lottery executed in the high-frequency support mode are recorded. ing. FIG. 14B is a high-frequency winning determination value table T2.

As shown in FIG. 14B, the winning determination value of the public electric open lottery executed in the high frequency support mode is set to (m to m + 2). Here, the variable m is a natural number of 1 to 65501. In the public power opening lottery executed in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the public power opening is approximately 3/5. In addition, the normal map fluctuation time in the high frequency support mode is set to 0.5 sec in order to accelerate the digestion of the normal map hold information.

The opening mode of the Fuden accessory 34a when the Fuden opening is won in the low frequency support mode is the same as the opening mode of the Fuden accessory 34a when the Fuden opening is won in the high frequency support mode. .. Specifically, a series of opening / closing operations in which the general electric accessory 34a is opened for 1 sec and closed for 1 second is repeated five times, triggered by one winning of the general electric opening. Further, in the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is secured for the next public power opening lottery to be performed after one public power opening lottery is performed (that is, once in the general drawing display unit 38a). The display duration) is set to the same length as the secured time in the high frequency support mode.

In the case of a non-winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode, the general electric opening winning is basically not generated in the general electric opening lottery held with the winning of the first through gate 35 as a trigger. On the other hand, even during the non-winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode, a prize may occur in the second through gate 39 without the adjustment mechanism 180 upward. In this case, in the public electric opening lottery held with the winning of the second through gate 39 as a trigger, the general electric opening lottery is won with a low probability (approximately 1/42). In the non-winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode, both the winning of the game ball B1 to the first operating port 33 and the winning of the second operating port 34 can occur. In the non-winning continuous period in the low-frequency support mode, it is unlikely that the general electric opening winning will occur and the opening / closing operation of the general electric accessory 34a will be executed. This is higher than the probability that a prize will be generated in the second operating port 34.

In the high-frequency support mode, there is a high probability (approximately 3/5) of winning the general public opening in the public power opening lottery that is held when the through gates 35 and 39 are won. Here, the interval at which the game ball B1 is fired from the game ball launch mechanism 27 (FIG. 2) is 0.6 sec at the shortest. On the other hand, the interval at which the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjusting mechanism 180 toward the first through gate 35 is 1 sec at the shortest. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, it is more advantageous for the player to aim at the second through gate 39 than to aim at the first through gate 35.

In the high frequency support mode, both the winning of the game ball B1 to the first operating port 33 and the winning of the second operating port 34 can occur. In the high-frequency support mode, since the opening and closing operation of the common electric accessory 34a is frequently executed when the general electric opening winning occurs, the second operating port is more likely than the possibility of winning the first operating port 33. It is more likely that a prize will be awarded to 34. Since a predetermined number of game balls B1 are paid out when the second operating port 34 is won, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of balls held in the high frequency support mode.

In the case of a continuous winning period in the low-frequency support mode, there is a high probability that the winning of the public power opening will occur continuously in the public power opening lottery that is held with the winning of the first through gate 35 as a trigger. For this reason, the opening / closing operation of the general electric accessory 34a is frequently executed, and during the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode, the game ball B1 is awarded to the first operating port 33 and to the second operating port 34. Both with winning can happen.

In the case of the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode, the interval at which the general electric opening winnings occur continuously is 1 sec at the shortest, and it is better to launch the game ball B1 aiming at the first through gate 35. There is a high possibility that the public electric train will be won rather than launching the game ball B1 aiming at the through gate 39. Therefore, in the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode, aiming at the first through gate 35 is more advantageous to the player than aiming at the second through gate 39.

The possibility that the game ball B1 will be launched aiming at the first through gate 35 during the continuous winning period of the low frequency support mode, and the public electric opening lottery will be held to win the general electric opening is the first in the high frequency support mode. 2 It is more likely that the game ball B1 will be launched aiming at the through gate 39, and the public electric opening lottery will be held to win the general electric opening. Further, as already explained, the opening mode of the general electric accessory 34a when the general electric opening is won in the low frequency support mode is the general electric accessory 34a when the general electric opening is won in the high frequency support mode. It is the same as the opening mode of. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, when the winning continuous period is reached, the second operating port 34 is temporarily more likely to win a prize than in the high-frequency support mode.

The winning continuous period is set in the low-frequency support mode in which the player's expectation for winning the second operating port 34 is low, and the timing of transition from the non-winning continuous period to the winning continuous period in the low-frequency support mode is the game. It is a configuration that is not notified to the person. Therefore, in the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, the player launches the game ball B1 aiming at the first through gate 35 while expecting to shift to the winning continuous period.

In the case of a pachinko machine that does not have a continuous winning period, the possibility of winning the open-air system in the low-frequency support mode is lower than the possibility of winning the open-air system in the high-frequency support mode. For this reason, the player's expectation for winning the general electric power opening is lower in the low-frequency support mode than in the high-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, like the pachinko machine 10, in the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, the initial value of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 is changed so that the winning continuous period can be entered. As a result, it is possible to give the player the expectation that the low-frequency support mode may shift to the winning continuous period in which the winning is more likely to be the open-air winning than the high-frequency support mode. Then, by not notifying the player of the transition timing from the non-winning continuous period to the winning continuous period, the player can always have a feeling of expectation that the transition to the winning continuous period may occur. it can.

For this reason, while maintaining a state in which the possibility of winning the general electricity opening in the low frequency support mode that combines the non-winning continuous period and the winning continuous period is lower than the possibility of winning the general electricity opening in the high frequency support mode. , It is possible to raise the expectation of the player to win the open-air system in the low-frequency support mode.

It should be noted that the configuration for increasing the frequency with which the high-frequency support mode is opened to the public power per unit time is higher than that of the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. Here, the low-frequency support mode is a low-frequency support mode in which the non-winning continuous period and the winning continuous period are combined. For example, the reserved time secured for the next public electric opening lottery after one public electric opening lottery is performed (for example, executed by the general drawing display unit 38a based on the winning of through gates 35 and 39). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display times are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reservation time is easier to select or the average reservation time is shorter than the low-frequency support mode. You may. In addition, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured for the next public power opening lottery after one public power opening lottery is held is shortened. By applying any one of the conditions of shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability, or any combination of conditions, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced.

Here, the winning continuous period and the non-winning continuous period that occur in the low frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 (a) to 15 (c) and FIGS. 16 (a) to 16 (d). First, in the comparison pachinko machine in which the winning continuous period and the non-winning continuous period do not occur, the timing of winning the general electric opening will be described based on the time charts of FIGS. 15A to 15C. FIG. 15A shows the timing at which the through gates 35 and 39 can be won in the comparison pachinko machine, and FIG. 15B shows the numerical value updated in the general electric accessory opening counter C4 of the comparison pachinko machine. The information (random number for opening) indicates the winning target period for which the winning determination value is the target of winning the general electric opening, and FIG. 15 (c) shows the timing at which the general electric opening winning can occur in the comparison pachinko machine.

Here, the comparison pachinko machine is the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in which the game board 24 is not provided with the adjustment mechanism 180 (FIG. 4), and the opening is updated by the general electric accessory opening counter C4. This is a pachinko machine with a configuration in which the initial value of the random number is not updated. Further, at the timings t1 to t6 shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C, the comparison pachinko machine is in the low frequency support mode. Since the timing at which the through gates 35 and 39 are won is random in the comparison pachinko machine, the timing shown in FIG. 15A is an example.

As shown in FIG. 15A, a prize is generated for the through gates 35 and 39 of the game ball B1 at the timing of t1. However, as shown in FIG. 15B, the timing of t1 is a timing outside the winning period. The winning period starts at the timing of t2 after the timing of t1. Therefore, a random number for opening is acquired with the winning prize generated at the timing of t1 as an opportunity, and even if the opening lottery is performed using the random number for opening, the result is a loss.

As shown in FIG. 15B, when the next winning target period is started at the timing of t3, which is after the timing of t2, the winning target period continues for 24 msec. As shown in FIG. 15A, when a prize is generated in the through gates 35 and 39 of the game ball B1 at the timing of t4 within the winning target period, the prize generated at the timing of t4 is used as an opportunity to open the game. A random number is obtained. Then, as shown in FIG. 15C, in the public electric opening lottery performed using the opening random number acquired at the timing of t4, the general electric opening is won.

As shown in FIG. 15B, at the timing of t5, which is 1 sec after the timing of t3, the next winning period that continues for 24 msec is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 15A, a prize is generated for the through gates 35 and 39 of the game ball B1 at the timing of t6 after the end of the winning target period, and a random number for opening is acquired. As shown in FIG. 15 (c), the public electric opening lottery performed using the opening random number acquired at the timing of t6 is a result of failure.

As described above, in the comparison pachinko machine having a configuration in which the adjustment mechanism 180 is not provided on the game board 24 and the initial value of the opening random number is not updated, the through gates 35 and 39 of the game ball B1 are won. Only when the timing of occurrence is random and the timing of the winning coincides with the winning period starting in the 1-sec cycle, the pachinko machine is open. Therefore, in the comparison pachinko machine, the winning continuous period and the non-winning continuous period do not occur.

Next, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the timing at which the public electric open winning is generated will be described based on the time charts of FIGS. 16A to 16D. FIG. 16A shows the timing at which the game ball B1 can win the first through gate 35, and FIG. 16B shows the numerical information (random number for opening) updated in the general electric accessory opening counter C4. Indicates the winning target period, which is the winning judgment value that is the target of the Fuden opening winning, and FIG. 16 (c) shows the initial value update timing of the numerical information (opening random number) updated by the Fuden opening counter C4. 16 (d) shows the timing at which a public electric open winning can occur. At the timings t1 to t12 shown in FIGS. 16A to 16D, the pachinko machine 10 is in the low frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 16B, the winning target period is started at the timing of t1, and the winning target period continues for 24 msec. As shown in FIG. 16A, the timing of t2 at which the winning of the first through gate 35 occurs is started at the timing of the winning target period starting at the timing of t1 and the timing of t3 1 sec after the timing of t1. It is located between the next winning period and the timing outside the winning period. Therefore, even if a prize is awarded to the first through gate 35 at the timing of t2, the public electric open winning is not won.

As described above, the interval at which the game ball B1 can be discharged from the adjusting mechanism 180 toward the first through gate 35 is 1 sec. As shown in FIG. 16A, the timing of t4 at which the winning of the first through gate 35 can occur after the timing of t2 is the timing 1 sec after the timing of t2. As shown in FIG. 16B, the timing of the t4 is a timing outside the winning period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16 (d), even if a prize is generated in the first through gate 35 at the timing of t4, the public electric open winning is not won.

The cycle in which the first through gate 35 can be won and the cycle in which the winning target period occurs are the same cycle. Therefore, if the timing at which the first through gate 35 can be won is deviated from the winning target period, the non-winning continuous period will be a continuous non-winning result in the public electric open lottery.

As shown in FIG. 16C, the initial value of the universal utility release counter C4 is updated at the timing of t5. When the initial value of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated, the timing at which the first through gate 35 can be won may be shifted and overlap with the winning period. In this case, as shown in FIG. 16B, the winning target period starts at the timing of t6, which is later than the timing of t5. Then, as shown in FIG. 16A, a prize is generated in the first through gate 35 at the timing of t7 within the winning target period, and a random number for opening is acquired. As shown in FIG. 16 (d), when the public electric opening lottery is executed using the opening random number acquired at the timing of t7, the general electric opening lottery is won.

As shown in FIG. 16B, the winning period is started again at the timing of t8, which is 1 sec after the timing of t6. Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, a prize is generated in the first through gate 35 at the timing of t9, which is 1 sec after the timing of t7, and a random number for opening is acquired. As shown in FIG. 16D, in the public electric opening lottery performed using the opening random number acquired at the timing of t9, the general electric opening winning occurs. In this way, once the winning timing to the first through gate 35 overlaps with the winning target period, it becomes the winning continuous period in which the general electric opening winning is continuously generated in the general electric opening lottery.

After that, as shown in FIG. 16C, the initial value of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated again at the timing of t10. As a result, the timing at which the first through gate 35 can be won is shifted from the winning period. As shown in FIG. 16A, a prize is generated in the first through gate 35 at the timing of t11, which is later than the timing of t10, and a random number for opening is acquired. As shown in FIG. 16B, the timing of the t11 is a timing outside the winning target period, and the next winning target period is started at the timing of t12, which is later than the timing of t11. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16D, if the open lottery is executed using the open random numbers acquired at the timing of t11, the result will be off. In this way, if the timing at which the first through gate 35 can be won is deviated from the winning period due to the update of the initial value of the Fuden accessory opening counter C4, the non-winning results will be continuous in the Fuden opening lottery. Return to continuous period.

As shown in FIG. 12, a send-off flag is set in the main RAM 65 at the start timing of the winning continuous period, so that the initial value update of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 can be postponed. 65d, a send-off completion flag 65e in which "1" is set when the winning continuous period is in progress and the initial value update of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 has already been postponed during the winning continuous period. And are provided.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the winning continuous period is reached, the initial value update of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 is postponed once at the initial value update timing of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 that is reached first. It is composed. By frequently updating the initial value of the general utility opening counter C4, the possibility of the winning continuous period in the non-winning continuous period is increased, and when the winning continuous period is reached, the general electric utility opening counter C4 By forgoing the update of the initial value, the winning continuous period is continued for a long time. As a result, the occurrence of consecutive winning periods can be made attractive to the player. By setting the occurrence of the winning continuous period as an event expected by the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the hit random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 65a of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball B1 wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the main ROM 64 as a winning / failing table. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29 and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball B1 wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plurality of jackpot results are (1) an mode of opening / closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) a third after the opening / closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing differences in the three conditions of the support mode in the general electric accessory 34a of the two operating ports 34.

The mode of opening / closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode is high so that the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high or low. Frequent winning mode and low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in either the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode, the game is executed up to a predetermined number of round games.

Here, the round game is until the condition of either that the predetermined upper limit duration elapses or that the predetermined upper limit number of game balls B1 win the special electric winning device 32 is satisfied. It is a game that continues. Further, the number of round games in the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same as the fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, the maximum number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of one-time opening mode of the special electric winning device 32 are set with different opening durations from the opening to the closing of the special electric winning device 32. Specifically, a long-time mode in which the opening duration is set to 29 sec, which is a long time, and a short-time mode in which the opening duration is set to 0.06 sec, which is shorter than the long time, are set. Has been done.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven so that one game ball B1 is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Be controlled. In addition, the maximum number of end conditions for round games is set to nine. Then, in the long-time mode of the above-mentioned opening modes, the opening duration is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball B1 and one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, the opening duration is set to be shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball B1 and one round game, and more specifically, the opening duration is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball B1. There is. Therefore, when the opening is performed once in the long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will be awarded the maximum number of prizes in one round game, and 1 in the short-time mode. When the number of times is opened, it is expected that no prize will be generated for the special electric winning device 32, or even if a prize is generated, the number will be about one.

In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game in a long-time mode. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game in a short-time mode.

The number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are those in the high-frequency winning mode. Is not limited to the above values and is arbitrary as long as the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is higher than that of the low frequency winning mode. Is.

The distribution destination of the game result with respect to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 64 as a distribution table. Then, as such distribution destinations, a low probability jackpot result, a low winning high probability jackpot result, and a most advantageous jackpot result are set.

The low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the winning / losing lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition.

The low-winning high-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. is there. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state.

The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the winning / losing lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state.

In relation to each of the above game states, the normal game state is not an open / close execution mode, but a state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode. Further, as a game result, a configuration in which a low winning high probability jackpot result is not set may be used. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode in the low winning high probability jackpot result, the number of round games may be smaller than that in the case of the low probability jackpot result and the most advantageous jackpot result.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the low accuracy jackpot result, and "10 to 14" corresponds to the low winning high accuracy jackpot result. "15-29" corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot result.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is a symbol display device 41 that includes a symbol display device 41 capable of displaying variable symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is given as a result of a game that results in a predetermined jackpot. This is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state in which the stop result is derived and displayed after the start of the variable display of the symbol in the above. Specifically, regarding the grant correspondence result, the combination of symbols with the same number on any of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

Two types of expected effects are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display and the occurrence of the grant response result in the stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying a part of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in that state. A display state in which a variable display of a symbol is performed in a symbol string is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a reach effect. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect.

In the notice display, after the variable display of the symbol is started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows, or a plurality of symbol rows. In the situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol row of, the mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row is included. In addition, the background screen has a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbol on the symbol string has a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display may occur in any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times when the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in which the combination of the same symbols is not stopped and displayed, the game is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game round corresponding to the deviation result, it is executed when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. ..

On the other hand, the determination of whether or not to display the notice is not performed by the main control device 60, but by the voice emission control device 81. In this case, in the voice emission control device 81, the notice display is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the missed result, and the notice display having a low appearance rate is displayed. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that are likely to occur. By the way, this lottery result is reflected when the effect for the game round is executed on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used in the main CPU 63 to determine the display duration on the special symbol display unit 37a and the symbol display duration on the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of starting the variation display on the special symbol display unit 37a and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41 when determining the variation pattern.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed to advance the game on the main CPU 63 will be described. The processing of the main CPU 63 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined time for waiting (specifically, 1 sec) elapses after the main process is started. During the execution period of the power-on wait process, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. After that, the access of the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main CPU 63 is set (step S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply / firing control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and further, whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 65. Determine (step S105). Further, the checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum is executed (step S106), and whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S106). Step S107).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality of the data stored and held by the checksum is confirmed, the process proceeds to step S108 in the same manner. In step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, step S109 is performed without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 such as initialization of the power failure flag is set as an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. Further, after executing the process of step S109, the recognition process for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information (step S110), and the data output for outputting various data to the reading device connected to the MPU 62. The process is executed (step S111). Details of these recognition processes and data output processes will be described later.

The main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited at the stage when the main process is started. The state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is released at the timing before the process of step S111 is completed and the process of step S112 is executed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output processing in step S111 is completed, and the timer interrupt processing is not executed until the stage before the processing in step S112 is started. Therefore, until the situation is reached, the main CPU 63 does not start the process for advancing the game.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S112 to S115. That is, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt processing, a residual time is generated between the timer interrupt processing of 1 and the next timer interrupt processing. This residual time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the residual process of steps S112 to S115 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S112 to S115 is an irregular process that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, in step S112, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S113, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the release initial value counter C5 is executed, and in step S114, the random number counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. To do. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 65, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S115, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S115, the process returns to step S112, and the processes of steps S112 to S115 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, in a 4 msec cycle).

First, the power failure information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 67, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, an infinite loop occurs after executing the power failure process. Become. In the power failure processing, "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 65, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

After that, the lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, and after executing the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, the read source counter is used. Execute the process of overwriting. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively.

After step S202, in step S203, the release counter update process is executed to update the general electric utility release counter C4 (FIG. 13). The details of the open counter update process will be described later. After that, in step S204, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the opening initial value counter C5 (FIG. 13) is executed in the same manner as in step S113, and in step S205, the same as in step S114. Executes the fluctuation counter update process.

The utility accessory release counter C4 is a loop counter, and the release counter update process for updating the utility accessory release counter C4 is periodically executed. Therefore, the initial value update timing of the general electric accessory opening counter C4, which is generated when the general electric accessory opening counter C4 makes one revolution, is periodically generated.

Here, when the opening initial value counter C5 for updating the initial value of the universal utility release counter C4 is a loop counter and the opening initial value counter C5 is periodically updated, it is usually used. The numerical information acquired as the initial value from the opening initial value counter C5 at the initial value update timing of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is limited to a part of the numerical information updated by the opening initial value counter C5. ..

In this case, the timing of occurrence of the winning continuous period in the low-frequency support mode already described does not become random. The winning period and the winning timing do not overlap, and the winning continuous period does not occur, the winning period and the winning timing frequently overlap, the winning continuous period occurs frequently, and the winning continuous period is regular. In this situation, the player can easily guess the timing of the winning continuous period.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 performs the random number initial value update process for updating the release initial value counter C5 both in the periodic timer interrupt process and in the non-periodic residual process of the main process. It is a configuration to be executed in. Therefore, the winning period and the winning timing overlap with each other at an appropriate frequency. As a result, in the low-frequency support mode that combines the non-winning continuous period and the winning continuous period, the possibility that the general-purpose open winning will occur is lower than the possibility that the general-purpose open winning will occur in the high-frequency support mode. It is possible to generate a winning consecutive period with.

Returning to the description of FIG. 18, after executing the fluctuation counter update process in step S205, in step S206, the rotation control process for rotating the rotating body 183 once in 4 seconds is executed. In the rotation control process, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to rotate the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184 communicated with the rotating body 183, and if it is the timing to rotate the output shaft 184a, the adjustment is made. A pulse signal is transmitted to the drive unit 184 to rotate the output shaft 184a. In this rotation control process, a pulse signal for rotating the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184 by 0.72 ° is transmitted once every 8 msec. That is, in the timer interrupt process executed in the cycle of 4 msec, the pulse signal is transmitted once every two times to drive the adjustment drive unit 184.

After that, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed (step S207). In the fraud detection process, "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65 by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred. In the following step S208, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S208, the processes after step S209 are executed.

In step S209, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 32b for the special electric is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the utility accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the utility should be started and the state should be switched to the closed state. If the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

After that, the reading process is executed (step S210). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

After that, the ball entry detection process is executed (step S211). In the ball entry detection process, the signals received from the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a are read, and based on the read result, the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operating port 33 are read. , The presence or absence of a ball entering the second operating port 34, the first through gate 35, and the second through gate 39 is specified. The details of the ball entry detection process will be described later.

After that, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S212). In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are aggregated and handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are aggregated. It may be configured.

After that, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball B1 is executed (step S213). In a situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, one game ball B1 is launched every 0.6 sec, which is a predetermined firing cycle. In the following step S214, as the input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process of step S210, the disconnection confirmation of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 50a and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are confirmed. I do.

After that, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed (step S215). In the special figure special electric control process, when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 in a situation where the number of reserved information stored in the holding storage area 65a is less than the upper limit number, the prize is generated. A process of sequentially storing each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the time point in the hold storage area 65a is executed as hold information.

Here, assuming that the period during which the opening / closing operation of the general electric accessory 34a is performed is the support execution period, if a prize is generated in the second operating port 34 during the support execution period, the support prize counter is displayed. The process of adding "1" is performed. Then, when the value of the winning prize counter during support reaches the upper limit number of winnings set in the support execution period, "1" is set in the support end flag. Here, the supporting winning counter is a counter that the main CPU 63 refers to in order to grasp the total number of winnings to the second operating port 34 that occurred during the support execution period, and is provided in the main RAM 65. There is. The winning counter during support is cleared to "0" at the start timing of the support execution period. Further, the support end flag is referred to by the main CPU 63 in order to grasp that the number of winnings to the second operating port 34 generated during the support execution period has reached the upper limit and the end timing of the support execution period has come. It is a flag and is provided in the main RAM 65.

In the special figure special electric control process, a hit / fail judgment process for determining whether or not the hold information corresponds to the jackpot winning is performed on the condition that the hold information is stored and not during the game rotation or the open / close execution mode. And, if it corresponds to the jackpot winning, the distribution determination process for determining which jackpot result the pending information corresponds to is executed.

Here, in the winning / failing determination process, if a big hit is won, "1" is set in the high frequency flag. The high-frequency flag is a flag in which "1" is set when the support mode for winning a prize in the second operating port 34 is the high-frequency support mode. By referring to the high-frequency flag, the main CPU 63 identifies whether the support mode for winning the second operating port 34 is the high-frequency support mode or the low-frequency support mode. As described above, when a big hit result is obtained, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the big hit.

In the special figure special electric control process, not only the hit / fail judgment process and the distribution judgment process, but also if the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot winning, it is judged whether or not the hold information corresponds to the reach occurrence. In addition to executing the reach determination process, the process of selecting the duration of the game round is executed by using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time. Then, a variable command including information on the duration according to the result of each of these processes and a type command including information on the game result are transmitted to the voice emission control device 81, and the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a is displayed. Start the variable display. By receiving the variation command and the type command, the voice emission control device 81 starts the effect for the game round corresponding to the contents of these commands on the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Further, the voice emission control device 81 transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the contents of the fluctuation command and the type command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the variation pattern command, the symbol display device 41 starts the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the content of the variation pattern command. As a result, one game round is started.

In the special figure special electric control process, whether or not it is the end timing of the game round is determined by determining whether or not the duration of the game round determined at the start of the game round has elapsed during the execution of one game round. To judge. If it is the end timing, the process of ending the game is executed with the display corresponding to the game result displayed. In this case, if the game times this time correspond to the occurrence of any of the jackpot results, the pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, and this time. When the game times correspond to the out-of-game result, the pattern corresponding to the out-of-game result is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a. In addition, a final stop command indicating that the game round should be ended is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. Upon receiving the final stop command, the voice emission control device 81 ends the production for the current game round in the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Further, the voice emission control device 81 transmits a final stop command to the display control device 82. By receiving the final stop command, the display control device 82 ends the effect of the current game round on the symbol display device 41.

In the special figure special electric control process, when the result of the game round is the result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the process for starting the open / close execution mode is executed. At the time of this start, an opening command indicating that the open / close execution mode is started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. When the round game is started, the special electric winning device 32 is opened, and when the round game is finished, the special electric winning device 32 is closed. At each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81, and a closing command indicating that the round game is completed is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the open / close execution mode is terminated, an ending command indicating that is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. The voice emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to execute the effect for the opening / closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the voice emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the command received during the open / close execution mode to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to execute the effect for the open / close execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the open / close execution mode. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the open / close execution mode is terminated, the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode correspond to the type of jackpot result that triggered the execution of the open / close execution mode. Execute the process to enter the mode.

Specifically, when the type of jackpot result is low probability jackpot, "100" is set as the end criterion of the high frequency support mode in the game count counter. The game number counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the end reference number of game times has been digested in the state of being set to the high frequency support mode. The numerical information set in the game count counter is updated so that "1" is subtracted based on the end of the game. In addition, when the type of jackpot result is a low winning high probability jackpot, or when it is the most advantageous jackpot result, "1" is set in the indefinite flag. The indefinite flag is a flag for continuing the high-frequency support mode until the lottery result in the winning / failing lottery becomes a big hit state after the opening / closing execution mode ends and the state shifts to the big hit state. In the high frequency support mode in which the indefinite flag is set to "1", if the jackpot result that occurs is a low probability jackpot, the indefinite flag is cleared to "0" and the game count counter is set to "100". Is set, and if the generated jackpot result is a low winning high probability jackpot, or if it is the most advantageous jackpot, the indefinite flag is set to "1" again.

After executing the special figure special electric control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process, the normal figure general electric control process is executed (step S216). In the Fuzu Fuden control process, when a prize has been awarded to the through gates 35 and 39, a Fuden opening lottery is executed to determine whether or not to open / close the Fuden accessory 34a. , And the process of displaying the general map display unit 38a and opening / closing the general public accessory 34a is performed in a manner corresponding to the result of the public electric opening lottery. The details of the Fuzu Fuden control process will be described later.

In the following step S217, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S215 and S216, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease in the number of reserved information related to the special figure display unit 37a on the special figure hold display unit 37b is set. , Set the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the normal figure display unit 38a on the normal figure hold display unit 38b. Further, in step S217, the output information for updating the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S215 and S216, and the display contents of the normal figure display unit 38a are set. Set the output information to be updated.

After that, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed (step S218). In addition, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S219). Further, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S220). After that, the management output process for outputting the information corresponding to the entry result of the game ball B1 in the game area PA to the management IC 66 is executed (step S221). The details of the management output processing will be described later.

Next, the open counter update process executed in step S203 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an open counter update process executed by the main CPU 63.

First, in step S301, the current numerical information in the universal utility release counter C4 is read, and in step S302, is the current numerical information read in step S301 a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current initial value? Judge whether or not. Here, the current initial value is numerical information newly stored every time the initial value of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated.

When the current numerical information is a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current initial value (step S302: YES), it means that this time is the initial value update timing of the universal utility release counter C4. In this case, it is determined in step S303 whether or not the high frequency flag is set to "1". When "1" is not set in the high frequency flag in step S303, it means that the low frequency support mode is set. In this case, it is determined in step S304 whether or not "1" is set in the send-off completion flag 65e (FIG. 12).

As described above, the main RAM 65 (FIG. 12) includes a send-off flag 65d (FIG. 12) and a send-off completion flag 65e (FIG. 12). The send-off flag 65d is a flag in which "1" is set when the general electric opening lottery performed in the low frequency support mode is in the winning continuous period and the general electric opening winning occurs three times in a row.

In the low-frequency support mode, when a prize is awarded to the second through gate 39 during the non-winning continuous period, a prize is generated to the first through gate 35 during the winning continuous period. In some cases, and in the winning consecutive period, a prize may have been awarded to the second through gate 39. Of these, the probability that a prize will be won at the second through gate 39 will be approximately 1/42 in both the non-winning continuous period and the winning continuous period.

For this reason, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the public power opening three times in a row is low (approximately 1/74000) in the public power opening lottery that is held when the second through gate 39 is won. There are almost no consecutive wins for opening the public train. In addition, even if it occurs by chance, the send-off flag 65d is cleared to "0" if the result is lost in the next public electric opening winning.

On the other hand, during the winning consecutive period, if a lottery for opening the public train is held triggered by winning a prize in the first through gate 35, the prize will be won. Therefore, if the winning continuous period is reached while the player is operating the game ball launching device aiming at the first through gate 35, the winning of the first through gate 35 is performed after the winning continuous period is reached. "1" is set in the send-off flag 65d when it occurs three times. In the winning continuous period, the initial value update of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 is postponed at the initial value update timing when the send-off flag 65d is set to "1".

Further, the send-off completion flag 65e reaches the initial value update timing when the send-off flag 65d is set to "1", and is set to "1" when the initial value update of the general electric accessory release counter C4 is postponed. It is a flag to be done. Here, the send-off flag 65d is a flag in which "1" is set on condition that the mode is in the low frequency support mode. Therefore, "1" is not set in the send-off flag 65d in the high-frequency support mode. Since the send-off flag 65d is not set to "1" in the high-frequency support mode, the send-off completion flag 65e is not set to "1". The process of setting the send-off flag 65d to "1" will be described later.

When the send-off completion flag 65e is set to "1" in step S304 of the release counter update process (FIG. 19), the initial value update of the general electric accessory release counter C4 has already been postponed during the current winning continuous period. It means that it was done.

If "1" is not set in the send-off completion flag 65e in step S304, it is determined in step S305 whether or not "1" is set in the send-off flag 65d. When "1" is set in the send-off flag 65d (step S305: YES), it means that the initial value update timing of this time is the initial value update timing of the send-off target. In this case, the send-off flag 65d is cleared to "0" in step S306, and the send-off completion flag 65e is set to "1" in step S307.

After determining in step S302 that it is not the initial value update timing, or after clearing the send-off completion flag 65e to "0" in step S307, in step S308, the current numerical information is the maximum value of the general electric utility opening counter C4. ("65505") is determined.

If the current numerical information is not the maximum value in step S308, "1" is added to the current numerical information in step S309 to update the numerical information. If the current numerical information is the maximum value in step S308, the numerical information is updated by clearing the current numerical information to "0" in step S310.

When the send-off completion flag 65e is set to "1" in step S304, after the initial value update is postponed, the general electric utility release counter C4 makes one round and the initial value update timing is reached again. Means that. In this case, the send-off completion flag 65e is cleared to "0" in step S311.

After determining that the high-frequency support mode is in step S303, after determining that "1" is not set in the send-off flag 65d in step S305, or after determining that the send-off completion flag 65e is "0" in step S311. After that, the initial value of the general electric accessory release counter C4 is updated. Specifically, in step S312, the current numerical information in the opening initial value counter C5 is acquired. Then, in step S313, the numerical information acquired in step S312 is overwritten with the current initial value as a new initial value to update the initial value. In this way, by changing the initial value of the general electric accessory opening counter C4, the winning target period shifts. As a result, it is possible to generate a transition from the non-winning continuous period to the winning continuous period at a timing when the player is not notified. The initial value updated in step S313 is used in step S302 to determine whether or not it is the initial value update timing.

In the following step S314, the numerical information of the general electric accessory release counter C4 is updated by overwriting the initial value updated in step S313 with the general electric accessory release counter C4, and the main release counter update process is completed. To do.

In this way, the duration of the winning continuous period can be extended by postponing the updating of the initial value at the initial value updating timing of the general electric utility opening counter C4, which is the first to be reached after the winning continuous period, and the winning is achieved. The continuous period can be made even more attractive to the player. On the other hand, when the initial value update timing is reached in the high frequency support mode (step S303: YES), the initial value update of the utility accessory release counter C4 is always executed.

Next, the general-purpose electric control processing executed in step S216 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a normal drawing control process executed by the main CPU 63.

In the Fuzu Fuden control process, when a prize has been awarded to the through gates 35 and 39, the process for acquiring the hold information on the Fuzu side is executed, and the hold information on the Fuzu side is stored. If there is, a lottery for opening the public train is performed using the hold information, and a process for producing an effect for the public map is executed with the lottery for opening the public train as an opportunity. Further, based on the result of the public electric opening lottery, a process of opening and closing the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed.

In the Fuzu Fuden control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, first, in step S401, the hold information acquisition process on the Fuzu side is executed, and the hold information corresponding to the winning of the through gates 35 and 39 is obtained. get. Here, the hold information acquisition process on the general drawing side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a hold information acquisition process on the normal drawing side executed by the main CPU 63.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the game ball B1 has won the first through gate 35 by determining whether or not the first gate winning flag is set to "1". Here, the first gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the first through gate 35. Then, when "1" is set for the first gate winning flag, the first gate winning flag is cleared to "0" in step S502.

If "1" is not set in the first gate winning flag in step S501, the process proceeds to step S503. In step S503, it is determined whether or not the game ball B1 has won the second through gate 39 by determining whether or not the second gate winning flag is set to "1". Here, the second gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the second through gate 39.

If "1" is not set in the second gate winning flag in step S503, the pending information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if "1" is set in the second gate winning flag, the process is terminated. In step S504, the second gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

After clearing the 1st gate winning flag "0" in step S502, or after clearing the 2nd gate winning flag "0" in step S504, in step S505, the current normal power in the normal power holding area HA It is determined whether or not the number of pending information is less than the upper limit (4). Then, when the number of Fukuden hold information is the upper limit (step S505: NO), the present hold information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and when the number of Fukuden hold information is less than the upper limit (step S505: YES), the step Move to S506. In step S506, the numerical information of the general electric accessory release counter C4 is stored in the empty general electric holding areas HA1 to HA4, which have the highest priority, and the holding information acquisition process is performed. To finish.

In one processing round, acquisition of the hold information corresponding to "1" set in the first gate winning flag and acquisition of the hold information corresponding to "1" set in the second gate winning flag. If both of the above are executed, the two hold information acquired in the processing time will be the same hold information.

On the other hand, in the hold information acquisition process on the general drawing side, if "1" is set for both the first gate winning flag and the second gate winning flag in this processing time, the first gate Only the acquisition of the hold information corresponding to the setting of "1" in the winning flag is executed. Then, the acquisition of the hold information corresponding to the setting of "1" in the second gate winning flag is executed in the next processing time.

Therefore, when the period in which the second gate winning flag is set to "1" overlaps with the period in which the first gate winning flag is set to "1", the second through gate 39 of the game ball B1 The opening random number acquired when the prize is won in the first through gate 35 can be different from the opening random number acquired when the first through gate 35 is won.

Returning to the explanation of the Fuzu Fuden control process (FIG. 20), after executing the hold information acquisition process on the Fuzu side in step S401, in step S402, the information of the Fuzu Fuden counter provided in the main RAM 65 Is executed, and in step S403, the process of reading the Fuzu-fuden address table from the main ROM 64 is executed. Then, in step S404, the process of acquiring the start address corresponding to the information of the Fuzu Fuden counter is executed from the Fuzu Fuden address table.

Here, the processing contents of steps S402 to S404 will be described. As already described, the Fuzu Fuden control process includes a process related to the production for the Fuzu and a process related to the opening and closing of the Fuden accessory 34a. In this case, as the processing related to the effect for the normal map, the normal map fluctuation start process, the normal map change process, and the normal map finalization process are set. Further, as the processing related to the opening and closing of the general electric accessory 34a, the processing during the opening of the general electric power and the processing during the closing of the general electric power are set.

In such a processing configuration, the Fuzu Fuden counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed, and is stored in the Fuzu Fuden address table. Is set to the start address in the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing in correspondence with the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter.

Numerical information from "0" to "4" can be set for the Fuzu Fuden counter, and the Fuzu Fuden address table starts with a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter. Address information (“NSA0” to “NSA4”) is set. In this case, the start address NSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the normal map variation start process, and the start address NSA1 is the start address of the program for executing the normal map variation start process, and the start address NSA2. Is the start address of the program for executing the process during confirmation of the normal figure, the start address NSA3 is the start address of the program for executing the process during the opening of the normal power, and the start address NSA4 is the closed state of the normal power. The start address of the program for executing processing.

The Fuzu Fuden counter will be used in the next processing round when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed. 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or "0" is cleared corresponding to the process executed in the electric control process. Therefore, in the Fuzu Fuden control process at each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the process according to the numerical information set in the Fuzu Fuden counter.

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the main CPU 63 to grasp which process should be executed as the normal power control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

Below, using the Fuzu Fuden counter and the Fuzu Fuden address table, the Fuzu fluctuation start processing, the Fuzu fluctuation processing, the Fuzu confirmation processing, the Fuden opening processing, and the Fuden closing processing are performed. The processing configuration for execution will be described.

Returning to the description of FIG. 20, after executing the process of step S404, in step S405, the zero flag setting process on the normal drawing side is executed. In the zero flag setting process on the Fuzu side, the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden timer counter is read, and when the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden timer counter is "0", the value provided in the register of the main CPU 63 is set. The process of setting "1" to the zero flag on the drawing side is executed. The Fuzu Fuden timer counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to specify the update timing of the Fuzu Fuden counter according to the passage of time, and the numerical information corresponding to the predetermined time is in step S407. ~ It is set in each process of step S411, and the update of the numerical information is executed in the timer update process of step S212 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

In the following step S406, a process of jumping (migrating) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S404 is executed. Specifically, when the acquired start address is NSA0, it jumps to the normal map fluctuation start process in step S407, and when the acquired start address is NSA1, it jumps to the normal map change process in step S408. If the acquired start address is NSA2, it jumps to the process during confirmation of the normal figure in step S409, and if the acquired start address is NSA3, it jumps to the process during opening of the normal power in step S410 and the acquired start. If the address is NSA4, the process jumps to the process of closing the normal electric power in step S411. Then, after executing any of the processes of steps S407 to S411, the present power control process is terminated. Hereinafter, the processes of steps S407 to S411 will be described individually.

First, the normal map fluctuation start process (step S407) in the normal map normal power control process (FIG. 20) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a normal figure fluctuation start process executed by the main CPU 63.

In the normal figure fluctuation start process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by referring to the high frequency flag provided in the main RAM 65. If the high frequency flag is set to "1" in step S601 and the high frequency support mode is set, it is determined in step S602 whether or not the indefinite flag is set to "1". As already explained, when "1" is set in the indefinite flag, it means that the player has won the low prize, high probability jackpot or the most advantageous jackpot, and has entered the high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. means.

If "1" is not set in the indefinite period flag in step S602, it is determined in step S603 whether or not the value of the game count counter is "0". When the value of the game count counter is "0" in step S603, it means that the end reference number of times of the high frequency support mode has been reached. In this case, in step S604, the high frequency flag is cleared to "0". As a result, the support mode of the Fuden accessory 34a shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

Here, the Fuzu fluctuation start processing is a situation in which the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter corresponds to the processing during the opening of the Fuden or the processing during the closing of the Fuden, that is, the Fuden role when the Fuden is elected. It is not executed during the opening / closing operation of the object 34a. Therefore, the support mode is maintained in the high-frequency support mode even if the game rounds of the end reference counts are completed during the opening / closing operation based on the fact that the public power open is won before the end of the game rounds of the end reference counts. After the opening / closing execution operation of the general electric accessory 34a is completed, the mode is switched to the low frequency support mode.

In the following step S605, the external output setting process for high frequency cancellation is executed. In the external output setting process, the data of the main RAM 65 is set so that the output of the high frequency signal from the external terminal plate 97 (FIG. 2) to the management computer of the game hall is stopped. The output of the high-frequency signal is started when the high-frequency support mode is entered. Incidentally, the output stop of the high frequency signal is executed in the external information setting process of step S220 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

After making a negative determination in step S601, making an affirmative determination in step S602, making a negative determination in step S603, or executing the process of step S605, in step S606, the normal drawing side. It is determined whether or not the total number NS of the pending information of is 1 or more. Then, when the total number NS of the reserved information on the normal map side is "0" (step S606: NO), the present normal map fluctuation start process is terminated as it is, and when it is 1 or more (step S606: YES). Proceeds to step S607.

In step S607, the general electric opening lottery process for determining whether or not the general electric opening winning is executed to execute the opening / closing operation of the general electric accessory 34a is executed, and the present normal figure fluctuation start processing is completed. Here, the Fuden opening lottery process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a general drawing open lottery process executed by the main CPU 63.

In the normal electric opening lottery process, first, in step S701, the shift process of the general electric holding area HA (FIG. 13) is executed. In the shift process, the open random number stored in the first normal power hold area HA1 (FIG. 13) of the normal power hold area HA is shifted to the normal power execution area HB (FIG. 13), and after the shift, the second is performed. 1 Clear the normal number holding area HA1. In addition, the 2nd normal power holding area HA2 (Fig. 13) → the 1st normal power holding area HA1, the 3rd normal power holding area HA3 (Fig. 13) → the 2nd normal power holding area HA2, the 4th normal power holding area HA4 ( FIG. 13) → The opening random number in each area is shifted, such as the third normal electric holding area HA3.

In the following step S702, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high frequency flag, and if "1" is set in the high frequency flag (step S702: YES), the opening / closing is performed in step S703. Determines whether or not the execution mode is in effect. If a negative determination is made in step S702 or an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S704.

In step S704, the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 (FIG. 14A) is read from the main ROM 64, and in step S705, a normal drawing winning / failing determination process (general electric open lottery) is performed. In the Fuden open lottery, if the open random number stored in the Fuden execution area HB matches any of the winning judgment values stored in the low frequency winning judgment value table T1, the Fuden open winning is won. In addition, if none of the winning judgment values match, the result will be a deviation.

In the following step S706, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure winning / failing determination process in step S705 is the winning of the normal electric opening. When the result of the normal figure hit / miss determination process is the normal electric open winning (step S706: YES), it is determined in step S707 whether or not "1" is set in the high frequency flag. When "1" is not set in the high frequency flag and the low frequency support mode is set (step S707: NO), it is determined in step S708 whether or not "1" is set in the winning continuous flag. To do. Here, the winning continuous flag is a flag for grasping that it is the winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode, and is provided in the main RAM 65 (FIG. 12).

The main RAM 65 is provided with a winning continuous counter for grasping the number of consecutive occurrences of the public electric open winning during the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode. The main CPU 63 (FIG. 12) grasps that the winning continuous period has been reached when the value of the winning continuous counter becomes "3", and sets the winning continuous flag to "1".

If "1" is not set in the winning continuous flag in step S708, "1" is added to the winning continuous counter in step S709, and the value of the winning continuous counter is "3" in step S710. Judge whether or not. Then, when the value of the winning continuous counter is "3" (step S710: YES), it is grasped that the winning continuous period has been reached.

In this case, the winning continuous counter is cleared to "0" in step S711, and the send-off flag 65d is set to "1" in step S712. As a result, the initial value update of the universal utility release counter C4 is postponed at the initial value update timing of the general utility release counter C4, which is first reached after the current winning continuous period occurs. Then, in step S713, "1" is set in the winning continuous flag to store the winning continuous period.

If the result is unsuccessful (step S706: NO) in the normal figure winning / failing determination process (normal electric open lottery) in step S705, the winning continuous counter is cleared to "0" in step S714, and the winning continuous is continued in step S715. Clear the flag "0". For this reason, in the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, when the game ball B1 wins the second through gate 39, the public electric open winning is generated only once or accidentally twice in a row. However, it is not determined that the winning consecutive period has started.

When a negative determination is made in step S703, the high-frequency support mode is in effect and the open / close execution mode is not in progress. Therefore, in step S716, the high-frequency winning determination value table T2 (FIG. 14B) is displayed from the main ROM 64. ) Is read out, and in step S717, the normal figure hit / miss determination process is performed in the same manner as in step S705. In the normal figure hit / fail judgment process, when the open random number stored in the normal power execution area HB matches any of the winning judgment values stored in the high frequency winning judgment value table T2, the normal power is released. If the winning is not matched with any of the winning judgment values, the result will be a loss.

After determining that the high frequency support mode is in step S707, determining that the winning continuous period is already in step S708, and then determining that the value of the winning continuous counter is "2" or less in step S710. , After setting the winning continuous flag to "1" in step S713, clearing the winning continuous flag to "0" in step S715, or executing the normal figure winning / failing determination process in step S717, in step S718. , Read out the normal map fluctuation time stored in the main ROM 64. The main ROM 64 stores in advance information that sets the fluctuation time of the normal map to 0.5 sec.

In the following step S719, the information of the normal figure fluctuation time read in step S718 is set in the normal figure normal electric timer counter, and the process for starting the fluctuation display of the normal figure display unit 38a (FIG. 3) in step S720 is performed. To execute. Then, in step S721, the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "0" to "1" by adding "1" to the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter, and this Fuzu fluctuation start processing is performed. To finish.

As already explained, even if the public power opening winning occurs three times in a row in the high frequency support mode, "1" may be set in the send-off flag 65d as a result of the three consecutive public power opening winnings. If it is determined in step S707 that the high-frequency support mode is set, the processes of steps S708 to S713 are not executed.

Next, the processing during fluctuation of the normal map (step S408) in the normal drawing control process (FIG. 20) will be described. In the normal map fluctuation processing, first, by referring to the zero flag, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the display on the normal map display unit 38a. Then, if it is not the end timing of the variable display, the patterns to be displayed on the normal map display unit 38a are updated to the next pattern on condition that the display contents of the normal map display unit 38a are updated. To do. On the other hand, when it is the end timing of the variable display on the normal map display unit 38a, the normal map display unit 38a executes the pattern stop process for displaying the final stop pattern of this time. In the pattern stop processing, the information of the final stop time is set in the Fuzu Fuden timer counter. After executing the pattern stop processing, the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "1" to "2".

Next, the process during determination of the normal map (step S409) in the normal drawing control process (FIG. 20) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the process of determining the normal figure, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the final stop time set in the normal figure normal timer counter has elapsed in the process of changing the normal figure. Specifically, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag for the determination process.

If the final stop time has not elapsed (step S801: NO), the process during determination of the main figure is terminated as it is, and if the final stop time has elapsed (step S801: YES), step S802 Therefore, it is determined whether or not the result of the public electric opening lottery that triggered the fluctuation display this time is the general electric opening winning. Then, in the case of winning the general electric open (step S802: YES), the process proceeds to step S803.

In step S803, "5" is set in the general electric opening counter provided in the main RAM 65, and in step S804, "10" is set in the general electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 65. The Fuden opening counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of times the Fuden accessory 34a is opened in the opening / closing operation of the Fuden accessory 34a by the main CPU 63, and the Fuden winning counter is the Fuden accessory this time. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the upper limit number of prizes have been generated in the second operating port 34 during the opening / closing operation of the 34a. After that, in step S805, the support winning prize counter is cleared to "0", and in step S806, the numerical information of the opening duration (specifically, 1 sec) is set in the Fuzu Fuden timer counter.

In the following step S807, by adding "1" to the Fuzu Fuden counter, the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "2" to "3", and the current Fuzu fluctuation start process is completed. ..

Further, in step S802, if the result of the Fuden opening lottery that triggered the fluctuation display this time is not the Fuden opening winning, in step S808, the numerical information of the Fuden opening counter is set to "0". After clearing, the process of confirming this map is terminated.

Next, the processing during the opening of the normal power (step S410) in the normal power control processing (FIG. 20) will be described. In the processing during the opening of the public electric power, it is first determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the public electric accessory 34a, and if it is not the closing timing, the open state of the public electric accessory 34a is maintained. On the other hand, when it is the closing timing of the utility accessory 34a, a process for closing the utility accessory 34a is executed. In this case, the value of the Fuden release counter is updated to be subtracted by "1", and if the value of the Fuden release counter is "0", the numerical information of the Fuden open counter is cleared to "0". Then, the opening / closing operation of the general electric accessory 34a is completed. Further, when "1" is set in the support end flag, it means that the number of winnings to the second operating port 34 has already reached the upper limit. In this case, the Fudoden release counter and the support end flag are cleared to "0", and the numerical information of the Fukuden Fudoden counter is cleared to "0" to end the opening / closing operation of the Fuden accessory 34a. In addition, when the numerical information of the general electric accessory opening counter is "1" or more and "1" is not set in the support end counter, the information on the closing time of the general electric accessory 34a is used. Set it in the electric timer counter and update the normal power counter from "3" to "4".

When the opening / closing operation of the general electric accessory 34a reaches the reference number of times, or when the number of winnings to the second operating port 34 generated during the current support execution period reaches the upper limit, the current support execution period is set. finish.

Next, the processing during closing of the normal power (step S411) in the normal power control processing (FIG. 20) will be described. In the processing during closing of the general electric power, the processing for maintaining the closed state of the general public power supply 34a and reopening the general public power supply 34a when the closing time elapses is executed. Specifically, the information on the open duration for high frequency is set in the Fuzu Fuden timer counter, and the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "4" to "3".

Next, the main CPU 63, based on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the second. A configuration for specifying whether or not the game ball B1 has entered the first through gate 35 and the second through gate 39 will be described. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a are input to the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as a 9-bit parallel interface so that nine types of signals can be handled at the same time. An area in which information of "0" or "1" is stored according to the voltage of each signal is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the 0th bit D0 to the 8th bit D8 are provided as the area. Further, more than 10 types of signals are input to the input port 63a, but in order to limit the targets to be input at the same time to 9 types, the signal group to be input to the input port 63a depends on the driver IC. It can be switched through switching control.

In the ball entry detection process (step S211) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to the signal group from the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a. In the situation where such a setting is made, the 0th bit D0 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the 1st winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the 1st bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the 2nd winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 45a. , The 4th bit D4 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the 1st actuating port detection sensor 46a, and the 5th bit D5 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the 2nd actuating port detection sensor 47a. The 6-bit D6 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the out-port detection sensor 48a, the 7th bit D7 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal from the 1st gate detection sensor 49a, and the 8th bit D8 stores the information corresponding to the detection signal. Information corresponding to the detection signal from the two-gate detection sensor 50a is stored.

When each of the above-mentioned ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a does not detect the passage of the game ball B1, it outputs a LOW level signal indicating that it is not being detected as a detection signal, and detects the passage of the game ball B1. If so, an HI level signal indicating that detection is being performed is output as a detection signal. Then, the input port 63a stores the information of "0" for the corresponding bit when the LOW level signal is received, and "1" for the corresponding bit when the HI level signal is received. Store information about. That is, in the situation where the passage of the game ball B1 is not detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a, the information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating that the corresponding bit is not detected is stored, and the game ball B1 is stored. In the situation where the passage is detected, the information of "1" corresponding to the information indicating that the bit is being detected is stored for the corresponding bit.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a ball entry detection process executed in step S211 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the 0th bit D0 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is displayed by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. It is determined that the game ball B1 has been detected (step S901: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S902), and the value of the 10 prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S903). .. The first output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a should be executed for the management IC 66. Flag of. The 10-prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times the 10 game balls B1 should be paid out. When the value of the counter for 10 prize balls is 1 or more, the 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), and the 10 prize balls are output to the payout control device 77. When the command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the 10 game balls B1 are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the first bit D1 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. It is determined that the game ball B1 has been detected (step S904: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S905), and the value of the 10 prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S906). .. The second output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a should be executed for the management IC 66. Flag of.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the second bit D2 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is displayed by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. It is determined that the game ball B1 has been detected (step S907: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S908), and the value of the 10 prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S909). .. The third output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a should be executed for the management IC 66. Flag of.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one game ball B1 is used by the special electric detection sensor 45a. Is detected (step S910: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the special electric winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S911), and "1" is set in the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S912). The value of the 15 prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S913). The special electric winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the special electric winning device 32 in the round game in the open / close execution mode. In the special figure special electric control process (step S215) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), by confirming that "1" is set in the special electric winning flag, one game ball B1 to the special electric winning device 32 It is specified that the ball has been entered, and the remaining number of balls that can be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in the round game is subtracted by 1. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of balls that can be entered is executed, the special electric winning flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be executed for the management IC 66. is there. The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times the 15 game balls B1 should be paid out. When the value of the counter for 15 prize balls is 1 or more, the 15 prize ball commands are output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), and the 15 prize balls are output to the payout control device 77. When the command is output once, the value of the 15 prize ball counters is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the 15 game balls B1 are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the 4th bit D4 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one operation port detection sensor 46a is used. It is determined that the game ball B1 has been detected (step S914: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S915), and "1" is set in the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S916). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S917). The first operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the first operation port 33. In the special figure special electric control process (step S215) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), it is stored in the hold area RE of the hold storage area 65a by confirming that "1" is set in the first operation winning flag. The process of newly storing the pending information is executed on condition that the number of pending information being held is less than the upper limit of four. Confirm that "1" is set in the first operation winning flag in the special electric control process (step S215), and clear the first operation winning flag "0" when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed. .. The fifth output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a should be executed for the management IC 66. Flag of. The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times one game ball B1 should be paid out. When the value of the counter for one prize ball is 1 or more, the one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), and one prize ball is output. When the command is output once, the value of one prize ball counter is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives one prize ball command, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball B1 is paid out.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the fifth bit D5 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one piece is used by the second operation port detection sensor 47a. It is determined that the game ball B1 has been detected (step S918: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S919), and "1" is set in the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S920). Further, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S921). The second operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the second operation port 34. In the special figure special electric control process (step S215) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), it is stored in the hold area RE of the hold storage area 65a by confirming that "1" is set in the second operation winning flag. The process of newly storing the pending information is executed on condition that the number of pending information being held is less than the upper limit of four. Confirm that "1" is set in the second operation winning flag in the special electric control process (step S215), and clear the second operation winning flag "0" when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed. .. The sixth output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a should be executed for the management IC 66. Flag of.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the 6th bit D6 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one game ball is used by the out-port detection sensor 48a. It is determined that B1 has been detected (step S922: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S923). The seventh output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball B1 has been detected by the out port detection sensor 48a should be executed for the management IC 66. Is.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the 7th bit D7 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one game is played by the first gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that the sphere B1 has been detected (step S924: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the first gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S925). The first gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the first through gate 35. In the general-purpose electric control processing (step S216) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18), it is confirmed that "1" is set in the first gate winning flag as described in FIG. 21. , On the condition that the number of hold information on the normal map side stored in the normal power hold storage area 65c is less than 4, which is the upper limit, the numerical information of the current normal power supply opening counter C4 is displayed on the normal map. The process of storing the timer in the timer storage area 65c is executed as the hold information on the side. When it is confirmed that "1" is set in the first gate winning flag in the Fuzu Fuden control process (step S216) and the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first gate winning flag is set to "0". "clear.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored in the 8th bit D8 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one game is played by the second gate detection sensor 50a. It is determined that the sphere B1 has been detected (step S926: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the second gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S927). The second gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball B1 has entered the second through gate 39. In the general-purpose electric control processing (step S216) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18), by confirming that "1" is set in the second gate winning flag as already described in FIG. 21. On the condition that the number of hold information on the normal map side stored in the normal power hold storage area 65c is less than 4, which is the upper limit, the numerical information of the current normal power supply opening counter C4 is displayed on the normal map. The process of storing in the general electric hold storage area 65c is executed as the hold information on the side. When it is confirmed that "1" is set in the second gate winning flag in the normal drawing control process (step S216) and the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second gate winning flag is set to "0". "clear.

Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is started at a cycle of 4 msec as described above, when the detection of one game ball B1 is started by one ball entry detection sensor 42a to 50a, the entry is concerned. The main side is to identify that one game ball B1 is detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a in a situation where the ball detection sensors 42a to 50a continue to detect the one game ball B1. This is done by the CPU 63. Therefore, it is sufficient that one of the first to seventh output flags is provided.

Next, the processing contents executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the payout control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 27.

The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 includes a payout side ROM 93, a payout side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like, in addition to the payout side CPU 92, which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit.

The payout side ROM 93 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as NOR type flash memory and NAND type flash memory, and is used as read-only. The payout side ROM 93 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side CPU 92.

The payout side RAM 94 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 can be randomly accessed, and the time required for reading is faster than that of the payout side ROM 93 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data and the like for the execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93.

The payout side CPU 92 can perform two-way communication with the main side CPU 63. When the payout side CPU 92 receives the prize ball command from the main side CPU 63, the payout side CPU 92 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls B1 corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. Further, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the game ball B1 can be paid out normally, and if it is determined that the game ball B1 cannot be paid out normally, the payout side RAM 94 The payout device 76 is stopped even in the situation where the information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored in the payout device 76. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a payout restriction command indicating that the payout cannot be normally performed in this way to the main side CPU 63. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 notify that the game ball B1 cannot be paid out normally. A notification command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 so as to be executed. As a state in which it is not possible to pay out the game ball B1 normally, there are a state in which the lower plate 56a is full with the game ball B1 and a state in which the tank 75 is not replenished with the game ball B1. There are a payout abnormal state in which the payout device 76 does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the game machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13. doing.

A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball B1 passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower plate 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies that the game ball B1 is in a full tank state when the game ball B1 is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and cancels the state in which the game ball B1 is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor. When it is done, it is specified that the full tank state is released.

A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball B1 passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies that the game ball B1 is in a ballless state when the ball non-detection sensor does not continuously detect the game ball B1, and the state in which the game ball B1 is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor is released. In the case, it is specified that the ballless state is released.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the game ball B1 paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies that one game ball B1 has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the game ball B1 is detected by the payout detection sensor. Further, when the payout side CPU 92 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the game ball B1 is paid out, but the game ball B1 is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor, it is said that the payout is in an abnormal state. It is specified, and when the state in which the game ball B1 is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is canceled, it is specified that the payout abnormal state is canceled.

A front door opening sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. When the payout side CPU 92 identifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95, and receives the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. It is specified that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 sends a front door opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when the front door frame 14 is specified to be in the open state from the closed state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is changed from the open state to the closed state. A front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the same timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when the front door opening command is received, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when the front door closing command is received.

A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and receives the opening detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96. It is specified that the main body 12 is in the open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a main body opening command to the main CPU 63 at the timing when it is specified that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and has specified that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state when the main body opening command is received, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when the main body closing command is received.

The timer interrupt process executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

First, the full tank process is executed (step S1001). In the full tank processing, as described above, it is specified whether or not the tank is full based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor, and if the tank is full, the payout of the game ball B1 is stopped. Along with executing the process, a command indicating that the tank is full is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the full tank state is released, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball B1 is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the ball useless process is executed (step S1002). In the ball-free process, as described above, it is specified whether or not the ball is in the ball-free state based on the detection result of the ball-free detection sensor, and if the ball is in the ball-free state, the process for stopping the payout of the game ball B1 Is executed, and a command indicating that the ball is in a state of no sphere is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the ballless state is released, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball B1 is executed, and a command indicating that the ballless state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S1003). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as described above, it is specified whether or not the payout abnormality state is present based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if the payout abnormality state is present, the process of stopping the payout of the game ball B1 is executed. At the same time, a command indicating that the payout is in an abnormal state is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the payout abnormal state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball B1 is executed, and a command indicating that the payout abnormal state is canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the front door opening monitoring process is executed (step S1004). In the front door opening monitoring process, as described above, whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state is specified based on the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95, and if the front door frame 14 is in the open state, A process of stopping the payout of the game ball B1 is executed, and a front door opening command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball B1 is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the main body opening monitoring process is executed (step S1005). In the main body open monitoring process, as described above, whether or not the game machine main body 12 is in the open state is specified based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, and if the game machine main body 12 is in the open state, the game ball. A process of stopping the payout of B1 is executed, and a main body release command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of the gaming ball B1 is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

After that, the command reading process is executed (step S1006). In the command reading process, a process of reading the prize ball command transmitted by the main CPU 63 is executed. Then, the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. Then, after executing the prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S1007), the game ball B1 by the payout device 76 The payout control process for controlling the payout execution is executed (step S1008). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled, and one game ball B1 is used by the payout detection sensor. When it is detected, the value of the prize ball number information is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes "0", the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. After that, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed (step S1009).

Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal plate 97. The external terminal plate 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, and is a part of the external terminals in which the plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and some of the external terminals. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. Since each of the main CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 97 in this way, as shown in FIG. 27, the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 externally send information to the hall computer HC. It is possible to output.

One external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the front door opening sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the main body opening sensor 96. In detail about the configuration of this electrical connection, a signal relay board 98 is provided at an intermediate position of the signal path from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branched from the signal path SL1 from the front door opening sensor 95 toward the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal for opening the front door of the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door of the external terminal plate 97. As a result, it is possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without the control of the payout side CPU 92.

Regarding the main body open sensor 96 in detail, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL4 branched from the signal path SL3 from the main body open sensor 96 toward the payout side CPU 92. Then, the branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, the electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input not only to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal plate 97. As a result, it is possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without the control of the payout side CPU 92.

Next, the contents of the information output externally from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the contents of the information output externally from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

The main CPU 63 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S220) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18). As the information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, the information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the information indicating that the support mode is in the high frequency support mode, and one game round are completed. Information indicating that, and a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls B1 pass through any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Information indicating that the game ball B1 has entered the first operating port 33, information indicating that the game ball B1 has entered the second operating port 34, and information indicating that the game ball B1 has entered the second operating port 34 are included. It has been.

The payout side CPU 92 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S1009) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 28). The information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that the ten game balls B1 have been paid out.

In the hall computer HC, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of paying out the game ball B1 in the pachinko machine 10 according to various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal plate 97. For example
-The payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of game balls B1 to be paid out until 100 game balls B1 are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10.-Normal game state that is not the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode. (Hereinafter, this ball ejection rate is referred to as "B")
-The ball ejection rate in the open / close execution mode-The ball ejection rate in the high-frequency support mode-The number of game times executed until 100 game balls B1 are ejected from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio) Is "S")
B-S x "Number of prize balls for winning prizes in the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34"
-The number of game balls B1 entering the first operating port 33 generated until 100 game balls B1 are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1").
-The number of game balls B1 entering the second operating port 34 generated before 100 game balls B1 are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S2").
B- (S1 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + S2 x "Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34")
Etc. are calculated. This makes it possible for the hall computer HC to manage the entry mode of the game ball B1 in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls B1 that are paid out when one game ball B1 enters the corresponding entry portion.

<Structure for managing the winning mode of the game ball B1>
Next, a configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball B1 by using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 29.

As described above, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to these, the MPU 62 also includes an I / F 101 and a reading terminal 102.

The I / F 101 is an interface for transmitting and receiving signals to and from an external device of the MPU 62. The I / F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. The detection results from the sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 50a and the commands from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I / F 101, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands. As described above, the main CPU 63 executes various processes. Further, when various processes are executed by the main CPU 63 and a signal is output to a device such as a drive unit 32b for special electric power, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101 and the main side. When a command is output to the payout side CPU 92 and the voice emission control device 81 as a result of executing various processes in the CPU 63, the command output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101.

The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting the reading device, which is an external device of the pachinko machine 10, to the MPU 62, and is provided so that the connection terminal portion is exposed on the surface of the MPU 62. .. However, as described above, the main control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is housed in the board box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall portion of the board box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main control device 60. ing. Therefore, in order to electrically connect the reading device to the reading terminal 102, it is necessary to open the board box 60a to expose the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent the reading device from being improperly electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. The substrate box 60a is not limited to this, and the substrate box 60a is formed with an opening for exposing the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main control device 60, so that the substrate box 60a can be read without being destroyed. The reader may be electrically connected to the terminal 102.

The management IC 66 includes a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence relationship memory 116, and a history memory 117. Each of these devices is connected so as to be able to communicate in both directions through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66.

The management side I / F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via the signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and also receives the signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. This is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 102 via the reading terminal 102. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I / F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from the output port of the management side I / F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via the signal path group 120 for bidirectional communication built in the MPU 62.

The management side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management side ROM 113 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as NOR type flash memory and NAND type flash memory, and is used as read-only. The management side ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the management side CPU 112. The management-side RAM 114 is a memory (that is, volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention of SRAM, DRAM, and the like, and is used for both reading and writing. The management side RAM 114 can be randomly accessed, and the time required for reading is faster than that of the management side ROM 113 when compared with the same data capacity. The management side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data and the like for the execution of the control program stored in the management side ROM 113.

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock, and has a configuration capable of constantly measuring date information and time information and outputting the measured date information and time information according to an instruction from the management side CPU 112. The RTC 115 is provided with a backup power supply, and it is possible to measure the date information and the time information even while the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The correspondence memory 116 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 stores information on the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p. Used for. The details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

The history memory 117 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as NOR type flash memory and NAND type flash memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding the entry of the game ball B1 received from the main CPU 63 through the management side I / F 111. The details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided on the management side I / F 111 will be described. FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111.

The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, the 1st to 16th buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to 16th buffers 122a to 122p through the signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to 16th buffers 122a to 122p is an input target signal. When is LOW level, the information of "0" is stored as the first data, and when the signal to be input is the HI level, the information of "1" is stored as the second data. The relationship between these LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level first signal when a new game ball B1 is not detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and one by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. When the game ball B1 is detected, the HI level first signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level first signal is input to the first buffer 122a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level second signal when the new game ball B1 is not detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and one by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. When the game ball B1 is detected, the second signal of the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level second signal is input to the second buffer 122b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level third signal when the new game ball B1 is not detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and one by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. When the game ball B1 is detected, the HI level third signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level third signal is input to the third buffer 122c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fourth signal when a new game ball B1 is not detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and one game ball B1 is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. In that case, the HI level fourth signal is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fourth signal is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal when a new game ball B1 is not detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a, and one by the first operating port detection sensor 46a. When the game ball B1 is detected, the HI level fifth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fifth signal is input to the fifth buffer 122e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level sixth signal when a new game ball B1 is not detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a, and one by the second operating port detection sensor 47a. When the game ball B1 is detected, the HI level sixth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level sixth signal is input to the sixth buffer 122f.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level 7th signal when a new game ball B1 is not detected by the out port detection sensor 48a, and one game ball B1 is output by the out port detection sensor 48a. When detected, the HI level 7th signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level 7th signal is input to the 7th buffer 122g.

An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level 8th signal when it is not in the open / close execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level 8th signal when it is in the open / close execution mode.

A ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level 9th signal when it is not in the high frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the HI level 9th signal when it is in the high frequency support mode.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continues the HI level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is open. And output.

An output instruction signal for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize an opportunity to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is input to the 16th buffer 122p. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal when it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs an HI level output instruction signal over a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. To do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p.

Although the 11th buffer 122k, the 12th buffer 122l, the 13th buffer 122m, the 14th buffer 122n, and the 15th buffer 122o can input signals from the main CPU 63, the pachinko machine 10 does not input normal signals. It is blank. As described above, as the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a larger number of buffers 122a to 122p than the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. The management IC 66 can be diverted to a model different from the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and each of the 1st to 16th buffers 122a to 122p so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the 1st to 16th buffers 122a to 122p. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the signal paths 118k to 118o may not be formed between the buffers 122k to 122o to be blanked.

It is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111, and the management side CPU 112 does not receive an instruction from the main side CPU 63. Can specify that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management side CPU 112. The specification of these signal types in the management side CPU 112 will be described in detail later, but when control is started in the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 with the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62, the main side CPU 63 shifts to the management side CPU 112. This is done by sending a type identification command. In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the corresponding memory 116, and when the management side CPU 112 specifies the types of various signals in a situation where the operating power is supplied. The information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referred to.

FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence-related memory 116 has the first to fifteenth correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o having a one-to-one correspondence with the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111. It is provided.

In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a. Further, in the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used and information on the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the general winning opening 31 (10 pieces). ) Is also stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the second buffer 122b. Further, in the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used and information on the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the general winning opening 31 (10 pieces). ) Is also stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the third buffer 122c. Further, in the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used and information on the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the general winning opening 31 (10 pieces). ) Is also stored.

In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the fourth buffer 122d. Further, in the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is used and information on the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the special electric winning device 32 (15 pieces). ) Is also stored. In the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating that the first operating port 33 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. In addition, information indicating that the first operating port 33 is in the fifth correspondence area 123e and information on the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the first operating port 33 ( 1) is also stored. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating that the second operating port 34 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the sixth buffer 122f. In addition, information indicating that the second operating port 34 is in the sixth correspondence area 123f and information on the number of game balls B1 to be paid out when one game ball B1 enters the second operating port 34 ( 1) is also stored. In the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating that the output port 24a is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

In the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. In the ninth correspondence area 123i, information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. In the tenth correspondence area 123j, information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored is stored as information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j.

In the eleventh correspondence area 123k, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k by the management side CPU 112, information indicating that the blank does not correspond to any of them is stored. In the twelfth correspondence area 123l, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l by the management side CPU 112, information indicating that the blank does not correspond to any of them is stored. In the thirteenth correspondence area 123m, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m by the management side CPU 112, information indicating that the blank does not correspond to any of them is stored. In the 14th correspondence area 123n, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the 14th buffer 122n by the management side CPU 112, information indicating that the blank does not correspond to any of them is stored. In the 15th correspondence area 123o, as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the 15th buffer 122o by the management side CPU 112, information indicating that the blank does not correspond to any of them is stored.

As described above, what kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o can be specified by the management side CPU 112 by receiving an instruction from the main side CPU 63. , The management IC 66 can be diverted to a model different from the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

Further, each time the signals corresponding to the storage of the history information are output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, the information for recognizing the signal type is not output, but the signal type is recognized in advance. Information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 116 by the management side CPU 112. It is a configuration. As a result, as compared with the configuration in which the information for recognizing the type of the signal is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o each time the signal corresponding to the storage of the history information is output, the signal is mainly output each time. It is possible to suppress the amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112.

Further, the management side CPU 112 outputs information for specifying the type of the signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o at the start of supplying the operating power. Thereby, in the situation where the game is started by the pachinko machine 10, the type of the signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o can be specified by the management side CPU 112.

Further, the information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p is performed at the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, the type of signal input to the 16th buffer 122p is specified for the output instruction signal that is surely used not only in the pachinko machine 10 but also in other models of pachinko machines that use the management IC 66. It is possible to omit the processing for this. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the processing load of the processing for specifying the type of such a signal.

Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be described. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pointer information is set in sequence, and a history information storage area 125 is set in which each pointer information has a one-to-one correspondence. The history information storage area 125 can store a combination of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, and a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and as an area for storing correspondence information. One byte of data capacity is allocated. When it becomes necessary to store the correspondence information according to the signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually, the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of the pachinko machine 10). First, the date information and the time information measured in the current RTC 115 are stored in the area for storing the RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the information storage this time is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is read. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently to be written.

Specifically, regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g as described above. Therefore, information corresponding to the types of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116. More specifically, the information corresponding to the type of the ball entry unit corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, since the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42a to 44a all detect the game ball B1 that has entered the general winning opening 31, these first to third winning openings Information indicating that each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the mouth detection sensors 42a to 44a is a general winning opening 31 is stored. Further, the fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is used, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that the first operating port 33 is provided. , The sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating that it is the second operating port 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating that it is the out port 24a. When the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the information storage this time are any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of the ball entry portion corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is the first to first. It is read from any of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the read information on the type of the ball entry portion is stored as it is in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

On the other hand, the eighth buffer 122h is input with a signal indicating whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode, the ninth buffer 122i is input with a signal indicating whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode, and the tenth buffer 122j is input with a signal indicating whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input. Therefore, the 8th correspondence area 123h stores information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in effect, the 9th correspondence area 123i stores information indicating that the high frequency support mode is in use, and the 10th correspondence area 123i stores information indicating that the mode is in the high frequency support mode. Information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j is stored.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level 8th signal in the open / close execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level 8th signal in the open / close execution mode. The side CPU 112 identifies that the open / close execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and identifies that the open / close execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It becomes possible. Then, both when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 generates an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify as done. That is, when the 8th signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information storage area 125 includes not only the information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is read from the 8th correspondence area 123h but also the start information. Store in the area for storing the correspondence information of. Further, when the 8th signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the history information storage area 125 includes not only the information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is read from the 8th correspondence area 123h but also the end information. Store in the area for storing the correspondence information of.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level 9th signal when it is not in the high frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the HI level 9th signal when it is in the high frequency support mode. , The management CPU 112 identifies that the high frequency support mode is started when the 9th signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and ends the high frequency support mode when the 9th signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It becomes possible to identify that it has been done. Then, both when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 generates an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify as done. That is, when the 9th signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information storage area includes not only the information indicating that the high frequency support mode is read from the 9th correspondence area 123i but also the start information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of 125. Further, when the 9th signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the history information storage area includes not only the information indicating that the high frequency support mode is read from the 9th correspondence area 123i but also the end information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of 125.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and outputs the HI level 10th signal when the front door frame 14 is open. In order to continuously output, the management side CPU 112 identifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the 10th signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and when the 10th signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It is possible to identify that the front door frame 14 has been closed. Then, regardless of whether the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level or from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 generates an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identify as done. That is, when the 10th signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the area 125. Further, when the 10th signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information. It is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the area 125.

The history information storage area 125 stores all the history information generated during the 10 consecutive business days in which the launch of the game ball B1 in the pachinko machine 10 is continued from the opening to the closing of the store. It is provided for a few minutes to allow it. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times a day, more than 600,000 history information storage areas 125 are provided. As a result, all the history information can be stored and retained in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. In the pointer area 126, information for specifying the pointer information currently to be written in the history memory 117 by the management CPU 112 is stored. Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, information for designating the pointer information of "0" as the writing target is set in the pointer area 126. Then, each time one history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. When the pointer information of the last order is the writing target and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information of the last order, the pointer information of "0" is the writing target. The information in the area 126 is updated. As a result, when the number of history information that can be stored is exceeded and an opportunity to store the history information occurs, the new history information is overwritten in order from the history information storage area 125 in which the old history information is stored. Become.

Further, when the history information is read from the history memory 117 by the reading device, all the history information storage areas 125 are cleared to "0", and the pointer information of "0" is to be written. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. This makes it possible to prevent the history information that was once read as the read target from being read again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball B1 by using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a recognition process executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 17).

First, "15" is set in the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1101). The recognition output counter determines the remaining required number of times of information output for the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal each buffer 122a to 122p of the input port 121 on the management side I / F 111 corresponds to. It is a counter for specifying by the main CPU 63. As described above, 15 of the 1st to 15th buffers 122a to 122o are the recognition targets of the signal type, so "15" is set in the recognition output counter.

After that, the output process of the identification start command is executed (step S1102). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. In this command output, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. That is, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a are used by using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management side CPU 112 to store the history information. A command output is performed to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the ~ 122o corresponds to. As a result, the number of signal paths can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the signal paths for outputting the command are provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to 16th buffers 122a to 122p. It becomes possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the 1st to 8th buffers 122a to 122h as the 1st to 8th signals, respectively. Further, in the output processing of the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification start command in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification start command and the period for maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. Has been done. Upon receiving the identification start command, the management CPU 112 should start the process for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

After that, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S1103). In this case, the first buffer 122a corresponds to the first buffer 122a to 122o so that the first buffer 122a is the signal type setting target first, and then the n + 1 buffer is the signal type setting target next to the nth buffer. The recognition setting of the signal type to be performed is performed. Therefore, if the recognition output counter is "15" to "13", the general winning opening 31 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls are read, and if the recognition output counter is "12", the special electric prize is won. Read the type identification command indicating that the device is 32 and the number of prize balls, and if the recognition output counter is "11", read the type identification command indicating that the device is the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls. If the recognition output counter is "10", it means that it is the second operating port 34, and if the recognition output counter is "9", it means that it is the out port 24a. Read the indicated type identification command, read the type identification command indicating that it is in open / close execution mode if the recognition output counter is "8", and read the high frequency support mode if the recognition output counter is "7" If the recognition output counter is "6", the type identification command indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is read, and if the recognition output counter is "5" to "1", it is blank. Read the type identification command indicating that.

After that, the output process of the read type identification command is executed (step S1104). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity like the identification start command, and the data of each bit is input to the 1st to 8th buffers 122a to 122h as the 1st to 8th signals, respectively. Further, in the output processing of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification type command and the period for maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the ninth signal. Has been done. By receiving the identification type command, the management CPU 112 corresponds to the identification type command in the corresponding related areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers to be set this time among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o. Store information to be used.

After that, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1105), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the subtraction is "0" (step S1106). When the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S1106: NO), the process for outputting the type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after 1 subtraction is executed (step S1103 and). Step S1104).

On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S1106: YES), the output process of the identification end command is executed (step S1107). The identification end command has an 8-bit data capacity, and the data of each bit is input to the 1st to 8th buffers 122a to 122h as the 1st to 8th signals, respectively. Further, in the output processing of the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification end command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. Further, the output period of the identification end command and the period for maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. Has been done. By receiving the identification end command, the management CPU 112 identifies that the process for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116 has been completed. To do.

Next, the management process executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started. The processing speed of the management side CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main side CPU 63, and the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) is performed after one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18) is started in the main side CPU 63. Is started, the combination of the processes after step S1206 in the management process is executed 16 times or more.

When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1201: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1202). The setting target counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the types of buffers 122a to 122o for which the signal type is set. The first buffer 122a is the signal type setting target first, and then the n + 1 buffer is the signal type setting target after the nth buffer.

After that, on condition that the type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S1204). In the correspondence setting process, the type identification received this time in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. Stores information on the signal type set in the command. After that, the value of the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 is added by 1 (step S1205).

When a negative determination is made in step S1203 or when the process of step S1205 is executed, it is determined whether or not an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1206). If the identification end command has not been received (step S1206: NO), the process returns to step S1203, and on condition that a new type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), the steps S1204 and S1205 Execute the process again.

When the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1206: YES), the processes of step S1207 and step S1208 are repeatedly executed. Although the details will be described later in step S1207, a history setting process for storing the history information corresponding to the type of the signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117 is executed. In step S1208, although details will be described later, an external output process for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is executed.

FIG. 35 is a time chart showing how the correspondence relationship information between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o is stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116. FIG. 35A shows a period in which a command is output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h), and FIG. b) shows the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is at the HI level, and FIG. 35 (c) shows the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and these buffers 122a to 122o. The execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence relationship is executed is shown, and FIG. 35 (d) shows the timing when the correspondence relationship setting process (step S1204) is executed by the management side CPU 112.

When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 35 (a). To. Further, at the timing of t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 35 (b). After that, at the timing of t2, which is the situation where the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 35 (b). The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h By confirming the information in, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management side CPU 112 enters the identification state by making an affirmative determination in step S1201 of the management process (FIG. 34). After that, at the timing of t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG. 35 (a).

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 35A, the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started. Further, at the timing of t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 35 (b). After that, at the timing of t5, which is the situation where the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 35 (b). The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command is received, the management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 35 (d) at the timing of t5. In the correspondence relationship setting process, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is used and information on the number of prize balls are stored in the first correspondence relationship area 123a of the correspondence relationship memory 116. After that, at the timing of t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG. 35 (a).

After that, in each of the timing of t7 to t9, the timing of t10 to the timing of t12, the timing of t13 to the timing of t15, and the timing of t16 to the timing of t18, the main timing is the same as the timing of t4 to t6. The management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the fifteenth type identification command is completed from the timing of t16 to the timing of t18.

After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 35A, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started. Further, at the timing of t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 35 (b). After that, at the timing of t20, which is the situation where the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 35 (b). The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the identification end command is received, the identification state of the management side CPU 112 ends at the timing of t20 as shown in FIG. 35 (c). After that, at the timing of t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG. 35 (a).

In order to instruct the management side CPU 112 to store the history information by making the management side CPU 112 recognize whether or not the command is being output using the ninth signal as described above. Clearly inform the management CPU 112 that the command is being output even if the command is output using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) to be used. It becomes possible to recognize.

Next, a processing configuration for storing the history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a management output process executed by the main CPU 63. The management output process is executed in step S221 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

First, "10" is set in the managed counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1301). The management target counter specifies whether or not there is a management target that is not a specific target of whether or not the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process by the main CPU 63. At the same time, it is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed for any management target. The management targets for which the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed in one management output process are the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. There are a total of 10 presence / absence of execution of the opening / closing execution mode, presence / absence of execution of the high frequency support mode, and presence / absence of opening / closing of the front door frame 14. Therefore, first, "10" is set in the managed counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the management side CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the value of the current management target counter is at the HI level (step S1302). When it is not the HI level (step S1302: NO), by determining whether or not the value of the managed target counter is 4 or more, the ball entry detection sensor 42a has seven managed targets corresponding to the value of the managed target counter. It is specified whether it is any of ~ 48a (step S1303).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter (step S1304). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "10" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the first output flag. When the value of the managed counter is "9" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second output flag, and the value of the managed counter is determined. Is "8" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the third output flag, and the value of the managed counter is "7". Yes When the special electric detection sensor 45a is supported, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the fourth output flag, the value of the managed counter is "6", and the first operating port detection sensor 46a If it corresponds to, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the fifth output flag, and the value of the management target counter is "5", which corresponds to the second operation port detection sensor 47a. In that case, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the 6th output flag, and if the value of the managed counter is "4" and corresponds to the out port 24a, the 7th output flag is set to "1". It is determined whether or not "1" is set. As described above, the first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 26).

When "1" is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter (step S1304: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals is set to the HI level. (Step S1305). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S1306).

When a negative determination is made in step S1303, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the HI level (step S1307). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "3", it is determined whether or not the transition to the open / close execution mode has occurred, and when the value of the managed counter is "2", it is high. It is determined whether or not the transition to the frequency support mode has occurred, and when the value of the management target counter is "1", it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1307, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the HI level (step S1308).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level (step S1309). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is 4 or more and the current management target is any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is used. It is determined whether or not the HI output duration (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the corresponding signal was switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI output continuation period is set in the management side CPU 112 to be longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S1007) of the management process (FIG. 34), and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level is set. It is a period during which the state can be reliably specified by the management side CPU 112. Further, when the value of the management target counter is "3" and the current management target is the open / close execution mode, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode has ended, and the value of the management target counter is "2". When the current management target is the high frequency support mode, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode has ended, the value of the management target counter is "1", and the current management target is the front door frame 14. In that case, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. When an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S1309: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the LOW level (step S1309: YES). Step S1310).

When a negative determination is made in step S1304, when the process of step S1306 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S1307, when the process of step S1308 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S1309, or in step When the process of S1310 is executed, the value of the managed counter of the main RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1311). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the managed target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1312). When the value of the management target counter is 1 or more (step S1312: NO), the processes after step S1302 are executed for the management target corresponding to the value of the new management target counter.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. The history setting process is executed in step S1207 of the management process (FIG. 34).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S1401). Specifically, the number of correspondence-related areas in the correspondence-relationship memory 116 in which information other than the information indicating that the correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o are blank is stored is specified, and the identification thereof is specified. Set the information of the specified number in the confirmation target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, information other than the information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j as described above. Therefore, in step S1401, "10" is set in the confirmation target counter. To do.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1402). When the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is the confirmation target of the numerical information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the confirmation target of the numerical information. ..

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S1403). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S1404). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current write target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information that is the write target is corresponded to. The RTC information read in step S1403 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence relation information is read from the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter, and the correspondence relation information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, when the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is set, the information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set, and the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is set, the above Not only the correspondence information but also the start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the nth correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o are the targets for reading the correspondence-related information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "10", the tenth correspondence area 123j is the target for reading the correspondence information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence. Information is to be read out.

When the writing process is executed as described above, the value of the counter to be confirmed is any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. In the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 The combination of the correspondence information indicating that the information is one of the above is stored as the history information. Further, when the value of the confirmation target counter is any of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. The combination of the correspondence information indicating that the mode is one of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14 and the start information is stored as history information.

After that, the target pointer update process is executed (step S1405). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the 1 addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after 1 addition is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as the pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

When a negative determination is made in step S1402 or when the process of step S1405 is executed, whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level is determined in the corresponding related areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the values of the current confirmation target counters. It is determined whether or not the correspondence information to be confirmed is stored (step S1406). Specifically, when the value of the current confirmation target counter is "8" to "10", the corresponding correspondence areas 123h to 123j are provided with information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is used, and the high frequency support mode is used. Since either the information indicating that the door frame is present or the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1406.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S1406, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "1" to "0". By confirming whether or not the buffer has been output, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S1407). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1407, the RTC information is read out (step S1408) in the same manner as in step S1403, and the writing process to the history memory 117 is further executed (step S1409). In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S1408 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, the correspondence relation information is read from the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter, and the correspondence relation information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, not only the correspondence information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, when the value of the confirmation target counter is any of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the pointer information to be written is supported. In the history information storage area 125 to be stored, a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating that the mode is one of the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and the end information is stored as history information. It will be in the state of being done. After that, the target pointer update process is executed in the same manner as in step S1405 (step S1410).

When a negative determination is made in step S1406, a negative determination is made in step S1407, or the process of step S1410 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S1411). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1412). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S1412: NO), the processing after step S1402 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the value of the new confirmation target counter.

Next, the state in which the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 38. FIG. 38 (a) shows the period during which the HI level signal is input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122 g, and FIG. 38 (b) shows the period during which the HI level signal is input to the eighth buffer 122h. 38 (c) shows the period during which the HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 38 (d) shows the period during which the HI level signal is input to the tenth buffer 122j. The period is shown, and FIG. 38 (e) shows the timing of writing the history information to the history memory 117.

At the timing of t1, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 38A. Therefore, the history information is written in the history memory 117 at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 38 (e). After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 38 (a), the signal switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 is switched to the LOW level. However, since the signal is a signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the switching of the LOW level is not the storage target of the history information, the timing of the t2 is shown in FIG. 38 ( As shown in e), the history information is not written.

After that, at the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t6, the timing of t9, the timing of t10, the timing of t13 and the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 38 (a), the first to seventh buffers 122a The output state of the signal input to any of ~ 122 g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, history information is written at each of these timings as shown in FIG. 38 (e).

As shown in FIG. 38 (b), the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h becomes the HI level from the timing of t4 to the timing of t7. The eighth buffer 122h corresponds to the presence / absence of the open / close execution mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38 (e), the timing of t4, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is switched to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal is switched to the LOW level. History information is written at each of the timings of t7. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t4 includes the start information, and the history information written at the timing of t7 includes the end information. As a result, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the open / close execution mode by checking the history information of the history memory 117.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, is the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 in the open / close execution mode? It is possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the slot is in the open / close execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 38 (c), the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i becomes the HI level from the timing of t8 to the timing of t11. The ninth buffer 122i corresponds to the presence or absence of the occurrence of the high frequency support mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38 (e), the timing of t8, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is switched to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal is switched to the LOW level. History information is written at each of the timings of t11. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t8 includes the start information, and the history information written at the timing of t11 includes the end information. As a result, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the high-frequency support mode by checking the history information of the history memory 117.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is in the high frequency support mode. It is possible to distinguish whether or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the ball is in the high frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 38 (d), the output state of the signal input to the 10th buffer 122j becomes the HI level from the timing of t12 to the timing of t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38 (e), the timing of t12, which is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the 10th buffer 122j is switched to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal is switched to the LOW level. History information is written at each of the timings of t15. In this case, the history information written at the timing of t12 includes the start information, and the history information written at the timing of t15 includes the end information. As a result, it is possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is in the open state by checking the history information of the history memory 117.

Further, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is being opened in the front door frame 14. It is possible to distinguish whether it is a thing or not. Further, since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the door is the one in which the front door frame 14 is open.

Next, a processing configuration for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a data output process executed by the main CPU 63. The data output process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 17).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is received from the reading terminal 102 (step S1501). The reading device is configured to output a connection signal when it is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when the connection signal is received through the reading terminal 102, an affirmative determination is made in step S1501. do.

If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the data output process is terminated as it is. In this case, in order for the data output process to be executed, it is necessary to restart the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62. As a result, in order to output the history information to the outside, it is necessary to start supplying the operating power to the MPU 62 with the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. .. Since the power supply operation unit for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is provided on the back surface of the back pack unit 15, the outer frame 11 is used to perform these stop and start operations. It is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 to expose the back surface of the back pack unit 15. Under such circumstances, in order to externally output the history information, it is necessary to start supplying the operating power to the MPU 62 with the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. With a certain configuration, even if a person other than the manager of the game hall tries to perform the operation of reading the history information, it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform the operation.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a control information confirmation signal has been received from the reading terminal 102, so that the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is the main ROM 64. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the confirmation of the control information (program and data) of (step S1502). The reading device has a configuration capable of both checking the control information and checking the history information, and when the checking of the control information is selected by the manual operation of the reading device, the reading device is used for checking the control information. When the signal is transmitted and the confirmation of the history information is selected by the manual operation of the reading device, the reading device transmits the signal for confirming the history. The present invention is not limited to this, and the reading device for checking the control information and the reading device for checking the history may be separate. In this case, if a reading device for checking control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for checking control information is transmitted from the reading device, and a reading for checking history is sent to the reading terminal 102. When the device is electrically connected, a history confirmation signal is transmitted from the reading device.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, output processing for confirming control information is executed (step S1503). In the output process, the program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 64, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the control information can be read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and it is confirmed whether or not the control information is legitimate or normal. Can be done.

If a negative determination is made in step S1502, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management side CPU 112 (step S1504). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI level output state is continued for a specific period of time. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. When the output state of the output instruction signal is switched to the HI level, the management side CPU 112 executes a process for outputting history information. The process will be described in detail later.

When the process of step S1503 is executed or the process of step S1504 is executed, it is determined whether or not the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is continued (step S1505). If it is continued (step S1505: YES), it waits in step S1505 as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is disconnected (step S1505: NO), the data output process ends.

Next, the external output process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The external output process is executed in step S1208 of the management process (FIG. 34).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1601: YES), the process for outputting the history information after step S1602 is executed. Specifically, first, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the number of the history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the out port 24a is stored is counted, so that the out port 24a can be reached. The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1602). Further, by counting the number of the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the ball is entered into the general winning opening 31. The number is calculated (step S1603). Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is stored is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the ball is entered into the special electric winning device 32. The number is calculated (step S1604). Further, by counting the number of the history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the operation port 33 is the first operation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the first operation port 33 can be reached. The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1605). Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the second operation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the second operation port 34 can be reached. The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1606).

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored and the correspondence relationship indicating that the front door frame 14 is present. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out port generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state. The number of balls entered into each of the 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1607). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored, the correspondence information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored, and the correspondence information indicating that the front door frame 14 is used. The period between the end information and the history information storage area 125 is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Further, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored and the correspondence relationship indicating that the front door frame 14 is used. If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored exists, the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is present. If the history information storage area 125 in which is stored does not store the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored, the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored are stored. All the history information of the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as if the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1602 to S1607 (step S1608). Specifically, first, the number of balls entered while the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1607 is open is subtracted from the number of balls entered in each of steps S1602 to S1606. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference in the number of balls entered at the out port 24a calculated in step S1607 with respect to the number of balls entered in step S1602 was defined as the number of balls entered K1, and was calculated in step S1607 with respect to the number of balls entered calculated in step S1603. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 is defined as the number of balls entered K2, and the difference in the number of balls entered in the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1607 with respect to the number of balls entered in step S1604 is defined as the number of balls K3. The difference in the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1607 with respect to the number of balls entered in step S1605 was defined as the number of balls entered K4, and was calculated in step S1607 with respect to the number of balls entered calculated in step S1606. The difference in the number of balls entered in the second operating port 34 is defined as the number of balls entered K5.
1st parameter: Total number of game balls B1 paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K3 x "number of winning balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "first operating port""Number of prize balls for winning 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning second operating port 34") / Ratio of the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio) Is "D1")
-Second parameter: Total number of game balls B1 entered into the general winning opening 31 K2 / Ratio of total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) -Third parameter: To the special electric winning device 32 Total number of game balls B1 K3 / Percentage of total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) ・ Fourth parameter: Total number of game balls B1 into the first operating port 33 K4 / Percentage of the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D2").
Fifth parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls B1 entering the second operating port 34 K5 / the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D3"). To do)
6th parameter: D1- (D2 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + D3 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34")
7th parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls B1 paid out (K2 x ""Number of prize balls for winning the general prize opening 31" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning 34") ・ Eighth parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls B1 paid out (K2 x "general winning opening 31""Number of prize balls for winning" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Prize for winning the second operating port 34" Ratio of "number of balls") After that, it is necessary to extract all the history information that is the target of this calculation by using the oldest RTC information and the newest RTC information in the history area 124 of the history memory 117. The total time is calculated (step S1609). Then, the first output process is executed (step S1610). In the first output process, all the history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. Further, the various parameters calculated in step S1608 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1609 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each information to be output in the first output process is read.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating the open / close execution mode are stored, the correspondence information indicating the open / close execution mode, and the correspondence information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set. By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the out opening 24a and the general winning opening 31 that occur in the open / close execution mode. , The number of balls entered into each of the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1611). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating the open / close execution mode are stored, and the correspondence information and the end information indicating the open / close execution mode are stored. The period between the history information storage area 125 and the history information storage area 125 is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. Further, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the open / close execution mode is stored, the correspondence information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set, and the correspondence information indicating that the open / close execution mode is set are stored. If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the total number of balls entered for the total number of sections is calculated. Further, although the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the open / close execution mode is stored exists, the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is available. When the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the open / close execution mode is not stored in the stored history information storage area 125, the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the open / close execution mode is stored are stored. All the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as in the open / close execution mode.

After that, during the period of the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1611, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the out port 24a, which occurred when the front door frame 14 was in the open state, The number of balls entering each of the second operating ports 34 is calculated (step S1612). The method of calculating the number of balls entered is the same as that of step S1607, except that the period of the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1611 is premised.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1611 and S1612 (step S1613). Specifically, first, from each number of balls entered in step S1611, the number of balls entered while the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1612 is open is subtracted. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entered in the out port 24a calculated in step S1611 and the number of balls entered in the out port 24a calculated in step S1612 is defined as the number of balls K11, and the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1611 is entered. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1612 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls entered K12, and the special electric winning device calculated in step S1612 with respect to the number of balls entered in the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1611. Let the difference in the number of balls entered in 32 be the number of balls K13, and the difference in the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1612 with respect to the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1611. The number of balls K14 is defined, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1611 and the number of balls entered in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1612 is defined as the number of balls K15.
11th parameter: Total number of game balls B1 paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K13 x "number of winning balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "first operating port""Number of prize balls for winning 33" + K15 x "Number of prize balls for winning second operating port 34") / Ratio of the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio) Is "D11")
12th parameter: Total number of game balls B1 entered into the general winning opening 31 K12 / Ratio of total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) 13th parameter: To the special electric winning device 32 Total number of game balls B1 K13 / Percentage of total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) ・ 14th parameter: Total number of game balls B1 into the first operating port 33 K14 / Percentage of the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D12").
Fifteenth parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls B1 entering the second operating port 34 K15 / the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D13”). To do)
16th parameter: D11- (D12 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + D13 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34")
17th parameter: (K13 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls B1 paid out (K12 x ""Number of prize balls for winning the general prize opening 31" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 x "Second operating port" Ratio of (number of prize balls for winning 34) 18th parameter: K13 x "number of prize balls for winning special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls B1 paid out (K12 x "general winning opening 31""Number of prize balls for winning" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K15 x "Prize for winning the second operating port 34" Ratio of "number of balls") Then, the second output process is executed (step S1614). In the second output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1613 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each information to be output in the second output process is read.

After that, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the correspondence relationship indicating that the high frequency support mode is set are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in the period between the history information storage area 125 and the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out port 24a that occurs in the situation of the high frequency support mode, general The number of balls entered into each of the winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1615). The history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the correspondence information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set, and the correspondence information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set are stored. The period between the end information and the history information storage area 125 is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is stored and the correspondence relationship indicating that the high-frequency support mode is used. If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is stored exists, the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is present. If the history information storage area 125 in which is stored does not store the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is set, the correspondence information and the start information indicating that the high frequency support mode is stored are stored. All the history information of the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as in the high frequency support mode.

After that, during the period of the high frequency support mode specified in step S1615, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operating port 33 that occurred when the front door frame 14 was in the open state. And the number of balls entering each of the second operating ports 34 is calculated (step S1616). The method of calculating the number of balls entered is the same as that of step S1607, except that the period of the high frequency support mode specified in step S1615 is premised.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1615 and S1616 (step S1617). Specifically, first, from each number of balls entered in step S1615, the number of balls entered while the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1616 is open is subtracted. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of balls entered after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entered in the out port 24a calculated in step S1615 and the number of balls entered in the out port 24a calculated in step S1616 is defined as the number of balls K21, and the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1615 is entered. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1616 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of balls K22, and the special electric winning device calculated in step S1616 with respect to the number of balls entered in the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1615. Let the difference in the number of balls entered in 32 be the number of balls entered K23, and the difference in the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1616 with respect to the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1615. The number of balls K24 is defined, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1615 and the number of balls entered in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1616 is defined as the number of balls K25.
21st parameter: Total number of game balls B1 paid out (K22 x "number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 31" + K23 x "number of winning balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K24 x "first operating port""Number of prize balls for winning 33" + K25 x "Number of prize balls for winning second operating port 34") / Ratio of the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio) Is "D11")
22nd parameter: Total number of game balls B1 entered into the general winning opening 31 K22 / Ratio of total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) ・ 23rd parameter: To the special electric winning device 32 Total number of game balls B1 K23 / Percentage of total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) ・ 24th parameter: Total number of game balls B1 into the first operating port 33 K24 / Percentage of the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D22").
25th parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls B1 entering the second operating port 34 K25 / the total number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D23”). To do)
26th parameter: D21- (D22 x "number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + D23 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34")
After that, the third output process is executed (step S1618). In the third output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1617 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each information to be output in the third output process is read. After that, the clearing process is executed (step S1619). In the clearing process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is in the initialized state.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the public electric opening lottery, the winning period for winning the general electric opening is set to occur at 1 sec intervals. In addition, the opening random number used in the Fuden opening lottery is numerical information that is cleared by "0" when "1" is added each time the update timing is reached and reaches the maximum value, and the initial value is obtained every time one lap Is the numerical information to be updated. Further, the game board 24 is provided with an adjusting mechanism 180 for discharging the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35 at 1 sec intervals. Therefore, if the winning timing to the first through gate 35 deviates from the winning target period, the non-winning continuous period will be a continuous non-winning result in the public electric open lottery. In addition, when the timing at which the first through gate 35 can be won and the winning period overlap with each other, the winning continuous period will be a continuous winning period in which the public opening lottery is continued. The transition from the non-winning continuous period to the winning continuous period is performed without notifying the player in advance. In this way, by always expecting the player to have a winning continuous period in which the player does not know when it will occur, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and perform a novel production.

In the opening initial value counter C5 for updating the initial value of the general electric accessory opening counter C4, the numerical information is updated by adding "1" each time the update timing is reached, and the numerical information is the maximum value. It is a loop counter that is cleared to "0" when becomes. The random number initial value update process for updating the numerical information in the release initial value counter C5 is executed in the residual process of the main process which is executed irregularly, and also in the timer interrupt process which is executed periodically. It is a configuration to be done. Therefore, it is possible to avoid biasing the numerical information acquired from the opening initial value counter C5 in the periodical updating of the initial value of the general electric accessory opening counter C4. As a result, in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to generate a transition from the non-winning continuous period to the winning continuous period at an appropriate frequency at a timing that is difficult for the player to guess.

When the transition from the non-winning continuous period to the winning continuous period is performed, the initial value update of the general electric utility opening counter C4 is postponed once during the winning continuous period. Therefore, the initial value update interval in the winning continuous period is longer than the initial value updating interval in the non-winning continuous period. By lengthening the duration of the winning consecutive period without reducing the frequency of occurrence of the winning continuous period, the winning continuous period can be made a period that is advantageous and attractive to the player. As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the winning continuous period and improve the interest of the game.

The possibility that a general electric open winning will occur in the low frequency support mode that combines the non-winning continuous period and the winning continuous period is lower than the possibility that the general electric opening winning will occur in the high frequency support mode. However, if there is a transition from a non-winning continuous period to a winning continuous period in the low-frequency support mode, the possibility of winning the general public opening will be greater than the possibility of winning the general public opening in the high-frequency support mode. It gets higher. In the low-frequency support mode, the player is not notified of the timing of transition from the non-winning continuous period to the winning continuous period, so that the public power is released in the low-frequency support mode that combines the non-winning continuous period and the winning continuous period. While the possibility of winning is lower than the possibility of winning the Hochi opening in the high frequency support mode, the player's expectation for the Hochi opening winning in the low frequency support mode is raised, and the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of.

The rotating body 183 of the adjusting mechanism 180 has a configuration in which, while the rotating body 183 makes one rotation, the timing at which the captured game ball B1 can be discharged toward the first through gate 35 is generated a plurality of times. By reducing the angle at which the rotating body 183 must rotate before discharging the game ball B1, the state in which the rotating body 183 can take in the game ball B1 can be continued for a long time. As a result, it is possible to increase the probability that the game ball B1 flowing down in the vicinity of the upstream of the intake port 185 of the adjusting mechanism 180 is taken into the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183. It is possible to prevent the game ball B1 periodically supplied to the first through gate 35 from being chipped, and to avoid a situation in which the timing of winning the general electric power opening is missed during the continuous winning period.

The recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 have a shape that widens toward the outer edge. Further, only the fourth recessed portion 183e has a size slightly smaller than the sizes of the other recessed portions 183b to 183d. The distance from the discharge position of the adjusting mechanism 180 to the first through gate 35 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, the discharge start position and the discharge direction of the game ball B1 discharged from the recessed portions 183b to 183e may shift to the left and deviate from the first through gate 35. When all of the game balls B1 incorporated in the adjustment mechanism 180 win the first through gate 35, there is a possibility that the player pays attention only to the intake of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 180 and does not pay attention to the discharge. On the other hand, by configuring a part of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 180 to be detached from the first through gate 35, the player's attention is attracted until the first through gate 35 is won, and the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of.

By setting the discharge start position of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 to a position shifted to the right from directly below the center of the adjustment mechanism 180, the game ball B1 is taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 and then discharged. It is a configuration that shortens the time required for the operation. By shortening the time required for a series of flows of taking in, transporting, and discharging the game ball B1 by the adjusting mechanism 180, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the player's interest shifts to another in the middle of the series of flows. ..

The game ball B1 taken into any of the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 and conveyed from the upper part to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180 comes into contact with the discharge right side surface 181 g of the discharge protrusion 181e. Since the discharge protruding portion 181e is fixed to the accommodating portion 181, the game ball B1 taken in and conveyed by any of the recessed portions 183b to 183e at the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180 is on the left side of the discharge right side surface 181 g. Cannot move to. The game ball B1 is discharged downward from a fixed discharge position. As described above, the game ball B1 is not discharged to the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 180 again due to the failure of the game ball B1 to be discharged in the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180. Therefore, the ejection failure of the game ball B1 continues in the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180, the same game ball B1 continues to rotate in the adjusting mechanism 180, and the uptake and ejection of the game ball B1 in the adjusting mechanism 180 are not delayed.

The game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 and won the first through gate 35, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 and removed from the first through gate 35, and not taken into the adjustment mechanism 180 from the intake port 185. The game ball B1 that has entered the escape passage 172 is configured to be able to win a prize in either the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 thereafter. Therefore, even if the adjusting mechanism 180 is provided above the first through gate 35, the number of game balls B1 heading toward the second operating port 34 is insufficient when the winning continuous period is reached in the low frequency support mode. There is no such thing.

The peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191 located above the rotating body 183 are configured to be inclined downward toward the rear. Therefore, the game ball B1 taken in around the intake port 185 of the adjusting mechanism 180 is guided by the inclination of the peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191 and is provided behind the intake port 185. Move to the passage entrance 171 of the escape passage 172. As a result, the number of game balls B1 that are not taken in is stopped near the intake port 185, or the flow of the game balls B1 upstream of the take-in port 185 is disturbed, so that the number of game balls B1 that are taken into the adjusting mechanism 180 is increased. It can be prevented from decreasing. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the adjusting mechanism 180 due to a decrease in the frequency with which the game ball B1 is taken into the adjusting mechanism 180.

The acrylic plate 172a fixed in front of the escape passage 172 and the adjusting mechanism 180 existing in front of the escape passage 172 are transparent. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the whereabouts of the game ball B1 after entering the passage entrance 171. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball B1 that can be grasped by the player from being interrupted in the middle.

At the passage exit 173 of the escape passage 172, a game ball B1 discharged from the passage outlet 173 toward the front of the surface of the game board 24 and a game ball B1 flowing down the front of the surface of the game board 24 An exit roof 174 is provided to prevent and from colliding with each other at the exit of the escape passage 172. As a result, at the passage exit 173, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball B1 that has been discharged forward from the escape passage 172 returns to the inside of the escape passage 172 due to a collision.

When the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the front surfaces 188b to 191b of the blade portions 188 to 191 of the rotating body 183 and the standing wall side end surface 182 of the intake port 185 in the intermediate state, the rotating body 183. The structure is such that an inclination is provided for allowing the game ball B1 to enter the rear passage entrance 171 by utilizing the force of rotation of the ball B1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 183 from being unable to rotate when the game ball B1 is sandwiched. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a problem occurs during the game and it is necessary to take measures to interrupt the game and solve the problem.

Further, at the intake port 185, the force applied from the front surfaces 188b to 191b to the game ball B1 in contact with both the front surfaces 188b to 191b and the standing wall side end surface 182 is downward. Has ingredients. Therefore, the game ball B1 in a state of being in contact with both the front surfaces 188b to 191b and the standing wall side end surface 182 is prevented from being ejected upward, and the game ball B1 at the intake port 185 of the adjusting mechanism 180 is prevented. It is possible to prevent the flow from being disturbed. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball B1 cannot be taken in and the periodic supply of the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 is hindered.

The accommodating portion 181 of the adjusting mechanism 180 is formed with a discharge protruding portion 181e for discharging the game ball B1 incorporated in the recessed portions 183b to 183e. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball B1 conveyed downward due to the rotation of the rotating body 183 is not discharged well and the same game ball B1 continues to rotate. By preventing the frequency at which the game ball B1 is taken into the adjusting mechanism 180 and the frequency at which the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjusting mechanism 180 decrease, the player's interest in the adjusting mechanism 180 can be maintained.

Further, by reliably discharging the game ball B1 taken into the adjusting mechanism 180 within a certain period of time, it is possible to prevent the pace at which the new game ball B1 is taken into the adjusting mechanism 180 from slowing down. By preventing the frequency at which the game ball B1 is taken into the adjusting mechanism 180 from decreasing, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player's interest in the adjusting mechanism 180 diminishes.

When the game ball B1 enters any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, the game ball B1 is paid out. The game is played while expecting that the game ball B1 enters one of them. In this configuration, the game ball B1 is inserted into any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter, also referred to as the history target ball entry section). When a sphere is generated, the corresponding history information is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can store and retain information for managing the number of balls B1 entered into each history target entry section or the frequency of entry, and the managed information is used. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the entry mode of the game ball B1 into each history target entry section. Further, since the history information is stored and retained by the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the history information.

All the ball entry portions that discharge the game ball B1 from the game area PA are subject to execution of the memory processing of the history information and are subject to management using the history information. As a result, it becomes possible to manage the ball entry frequency for any history target ball entry unit by using the history information. Further, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls B1 to each history target ball entry unit to the number of game balls B1 discharged from the game area PA by using the history information.

The history information includes RTC information which is information corresponding to the timing when the game ball B1 enters the history target ball entry portion which triggered the storage of the history information. As a result, by using the history information, it is possible to grasp in detail the ball entry history of the game ball B1 into the history target ball entry section.

In the history memory 117, not only the history information corresponding to the game ball B1 entering the history target entry portion, but also the history information indicating whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in the open / closed execution mode, and in the high frequency support mode. History information indicating whether or not there is, and history information indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open are stored. As a result, it is possible to distinguish whether or not each of these situations occurs and manage the mode of entry of the game ball B1 into the history target entry section.

It is possible to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device which is a device external to the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to read the history information with the reading device and analyze the ball entry mode of the game ball B1 into the history target ball entry section using the read history information.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 102, and a program can be read from the main ROM 64 by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is externally output by using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program. This makes it possible to output the history information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

It is specified which of the program and the history information is the information to be output from the reading terminal 102, and the information on the side corresponding to the specific result is output externally through the reading terminal 102. As a result, in a configuration in which history information is output externally using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether the information to be output externally is the program or the history information. It is specified on the side, and the specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, even if the reading terminal 102 is also used, it is possible to read only the necessary information.

Based on the information received from the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is specified which of the program and history information is the information to be output from the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration regarding the selection of information to be output externally from becoming complicated.

The MPU 62 having the main ROM 64 for storing the program in advance has the management IC 66 and the reading terminal 102. As a result, the signal path for the reading terminal 102 can be integrated in the MPU 62. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described above while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the reading terminal 102.

A main player who executes a process for paying out the game ball B1 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into any of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. A management side CPU 112 is provided separately from the side CPU 63, and the management side CPU 112 executes a process for storing the history information in the history memory 117. As a result, it is possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball B1 into each history target entry section while preventing the processing load of the main CPU 63 from being extremely increased.

The main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 inputs information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a to each buffer of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 by using the signal path corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. It is transmitted to 122a to 122g. As a result, the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 correspond to the buffers 122a to 122g (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information on the management CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

The main CPU 63 has information corresponding to whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode, information corresponding to whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode, and information corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open. Is transmitted to the buffers 122h to 122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 by using the signal path corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the types of information corresponding to each of these situations correspond to the buffers 122h to 122j (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing each type of information on the management side CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible.

The main CPU 63 transmits correspondence information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122j (that is, each signal path 118a to 118j) corresponds to, to the management side CPU 112. As a result, it is not necessary to store the correspondence information in the management IC 66 in advance. Therefore, it is possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, in a situation where the game ball B1 may enter the history target entry section, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history target entry section can be specified by the management IC 66. It is possible to make it.

Correspondence-related information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 by using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not the game ball B1 has entered the history target ball entry unit. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with the configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting correspondence information is provided.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. As a result, every time the main CPU 63 transmits the information of the detection result of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the information that enables the history target ball entry unit corresponding to the transmission target information to be specified by the management IC 66 is transmitted. No need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the detection result of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

By switching the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 from the LOW level to the HI level, information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102. In this case, the fact that the signal path corresponding to the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal can be specified by the management side CPU 112 without receiving the correspondence information from the main side CPU 63. .. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with a number of buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, which is larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Has been done. As a result, even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to deal with it without changing the configuration of the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, it is possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When the history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102, each history information includes correspondence information indicating the type of the history target ball entry unit corresponding to the history information. As a result, it is possible to specify the entry mode of the game ball B1 into each history target entry section by using the read history information.

By using the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the management IC 66, various parameters (1st to 8th, 11th to 18th) corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball B1 in the game area PA in a predetermined period are used. , 21-26 parameters) are calculated. This makes it possible to externally output various parameters that are the results of calculations using the history information.

Various parameters are calculated in a state where the history information corresponding to the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is excluded. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. In addition, various parameters corresponding to the situation of the open / close execution mode and the situation of the high frequency support mode are calculated. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the entry mode of the game ball B1 according to each situation.

When various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clearing process of the history memory 117. As a result, history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 becomes a storage target in the history memory 117, and the history information that should be stored and retained is erased by overwriting. Can be made less likely to occur.

When various parameters are output to the reading terminal 102, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, when reading out various parameters and analyzing the entry mode of the game ball B1 in the game area PA, it is possible to refer not only to the various parameters but also to the history information on which the calculation of the various parameters is based. ..

The management side CPU 112 calculates various parameters when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of calculating various parameters.

When the main CPU 63 specifies that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and the output instruction information is transmitted from the main CPU 63, various parameters are calculated by the management IC 66. , Various parameters of the calculation result are output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, it is possible to output various parameters to the reading device outside the pachinko machine 10 based on the instruction from the main CPU 63.

Whether or not the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is specified by the process at the start of supplying the operating power executed by the main CPU 63, and the reading device is electrically connected. Is specified, the output instruction information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, in a situation where the processing at the start of supplying operating power is being executed by the main CPU 63 or the like, that is, in a situation before the normal processing for advancing the game is started in the main CPU 63, various types are used. The calculation of the parameters and the external output of various parameters of the calculation results are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the calculation result in the situation where the game ball B1 may enter the history target ball entry section, and the processing load of the management IC 66 Can be reduced.

In a configuration in which when the game ball B1 enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 and the corresponding external output is performed through the external terminal plate 97, the history information is stored in the history memory 117. To. As a result, by using the information output externally through the external terminal plate 97, the number and frequency of the game balls B1 entering the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 can be easily grasped. By using the history information stored in the history memory 117, it is possible to accurately grasp the number and frequency of the game balls B1 entering the history target entry portion.

<Another form in the first embodiment>
-In the first embodiment described above, the drive mode of the adjustment drive unit 184 may be changed at a predetermined timing instead of the configuration in which the initial value of the utility accessory release counter C4 is updated. If the initial value of the general electric accessory release counter C4 is not updated, the winning target period always occurs in a 1 sec cycle. On the other hand, for example, the first rotation mode in which the adjustment drive unit 184 rotates the rotating body 183 at the first rotation speed, the second rotation mode in which the rotating body 183 is rotated at the second rotation speed, and the rotating body 183. May be configured to include a third rotation mode in which the is rotated at a third rotation speed. Here, the first rotation speed is the rotation speed at which the game ball B1 is supplied to the first through gate 35 in a cycle of 0.8 sec, and the second rotation speed is the rotation speed at which the game ball B1 is supplied to the first through gate 35. It is a rotation speed supplied in a cycle of 1 sec. The third rotation speed is the rotation speed at which the game ball B1 is supplied to the first through gate 35 in a cycle of 1.2 sec.

In this case, the main CPU 63 is provided with a switching random number counter having the same configuration as the opening initial value counter C5, instead of the opening initial value counter C5 (FIG. 13). When a prize is won in the first through gate 35 in the low frequency support mode, the main CPU 63 uses the numerical information updated by the switching random number counter as the normal power hold information in any of the normal power hold areas HA1 to HA1. Store in HA4. The main CPU 63 executes a switching determination process for determining whether or not the numerical information acquired from the switching random number counter is the numerical information of the switching target stored in the main ROM 64, whereby the adjustment drive unit 184 Determines the rotation mode switching timing of.

The switching determination process is executed when a prize is won in the first through gate 35 in the low frequency support mode. By using the switching determination process, the timing at which the rotation mode of the adjustment drive unit 184 is switched can be set to a random timing. In the switching determination process, the main CPU 63 sequentially switches the rotation mode of the adjustment drive unit 184 in the order of first rotation mode → second rotation mode → third rotation mode → first rotation mode each time the switching timing is reached. ..

Every time the rotation mode of the adjustment drive unit 184 is switched, the relationship between the winning timing of the first through gate 35 and the winning target period changes. For example, in the first rotation mode in which the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 in a 0.8 sec cycle, if the winning possible timing in the 0.8 sec cycle does not overlap with the winning target period in the 1 sec cycle, the public power is released. In the lottery, the result of losing is continuous. Further, in the first rotation mode, when the winning timing of the 0.8 sec cycle overlaps with the winning target period of the 1 sec cycle, the general electric open winning is won once every five times. Since the length of the winning timing cycle is different from the length of the winning target period, the general electric open winning occurs in the 4 sec cycle, which is the least common multiple of the two cycles.

In the second rotation mode in which the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 in a 1-sec cycle, when the winning timing of the 1-sec cycle does not overlap with the winning target period of the 1-sec cycle, it has already been described in the first embodiment. When the non-winning continuous period is set and the winning timing of the 1-sec cycle overlaps with the winning target period of the 1-sec cycle, the winning continuous period already described in the first embodiment is used.

In the third rotation mode in which the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 in a 1.2 sec cycle, if the winning timing of the 1.2 sec cycle does not overlap with the winning target period of the 1 sec cycle, in the public electric open lottery. The off result is continuous. Further, in the third rotation mode, when the winning timing of the 1.2 sec cycle overlaps with the winning target period of the 1 sec cycle, the general electric open winning is won once every five times. Since the length of the winning timing cycle is different from the length of the winning target period, the general electric open winning is generated in the 6 sec cycle, which is the least common multiple of the two cycles.

Since the rotation speed of the rotating body 183 is visible from the outside, the player can check the rotation speed of the rotating body 183 during the game and know the timing at which the rotation mode is switched. In a configuration that does not notify the player of the timing at which the winning continuous period occurs, by making it possible to grasp the switching timing of the rotation mode, the player's expectation for the winning continuous period is raised every time the rotation mode is switched, and the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of.

In addition to the continuous winning period in which the public electricity open winning is generated in 1 sec cycle in each public electric opening lottery, the period in which the public electric opening winning is generated in 4 sec intervals and the interval of 5 times. At the same time, it is possible to generate a period in which the public electric open winning is generated in a cycle of 6 seconds. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the variation of the mode in which the public electric open winning is generated.

-In the first embodiment described above, instead of the configuration in which the initial value of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated, a plurality of types of winning determination value tables in the general electric opening lottery may be prepared. For example, in the main ROM 64, in addition to the low-frequency winning judgment value table T1 in which the winning target period of 24 msec is started in the 1 sec cycle, the first winning judgment in which the winning target period of 24 msec is started in the 0.8 sec cycle. The value table and the second winning determination value table in which the winning target period of 24 msec is started in a 1.2 sec cycle may be stored in advance. In the first exchange table, the winning judgment values are set to (200 × n-5) to (200 × n), and in the second exchange table, the winning judgment values are (300 × n-5) to (300 × n-5) to (300). It is set to × n). Here, the variable n in the first exchange table is a natural number from 1 to 327, and the variable n in the second exchange table is a natural number from 1 to 218.

In this case, the main CPU 63 is provided with a switching random number counter having the same configuration as the opening initial value counter C5, instead of the opening initial value counter C5 (FIG. 13). When a prize is won in the first through gate 35 in the low frequency support mode, the main CPU 63 acquires the numerical information updated by the switching random number counter, and uses the numerical information to perform the above-mentioned switching determination process. To execute. By the switching determination process, the switching timing of the winning determination value table used for the general electric open lottery is determined.

By using the switching determination process, the switching timing of the winning determination value table used in the public electric open lottery can be set to a random timing. In the switching determination process, the main CPU 63 performs the low frequency winning determination value table T1 → the first winning determination value table → the second winning determination value table → the low frequency winning determination value table T1 each time the switching timing is reached. , Switch the winning judgment value table used for the open lottery.

Every time the winning judgment value table used for the public electric open lottery is switched, the relationship between the winning timing to the first through gate 35 and the winning target period changes. For example, when the first winning judgment value table is used for the public electric open lottery and the winning target period occurs in a 0.8 sec cycle, the winning timing of the 1 sec cycle does not overlap with the winning target period of the 0.8 sec cycle. In the open lottery for the public train, the results of the loss are continuous. Further, in the case where the first winning judgment value table is used, if the winning timing of the 1-sec cycle overlaps with the winning target period of the 0.8 sec cycle, the general electric open winning is performed once every five times. Since the length of the winning timing cycle is different from the length of the winning target period, the general electric open winning occurs in the 4 sec cycle, which is the least common multiple of the two cycles.

If the low-frequency winning judgment value table T1 is used for the open lottery, and the winning period occurs in a 1-sec cycle, and the winning timing of the 1-sec cycle does not overlap with the winning period of the 1-sec cycle, the above If the non-winning continuous period already described in the first embodiment and the winning timing of the 1-sec cycle overlaps with the winning target period of the 1-sec cycle, the winning continuous period already described in the first embodiment is used. Become.

When the second winning judgment value table is used for the general open lottery and the winning period occurs in a 1.2 sec cycle, and the winning timing of the 1 sec cycle does not overlap with the winning period of the 1.2 sec cycle , In the Fuden open lottery, the results are continuous. Further, in the case where the second winning determination value table is used, if the winning timing of the 1-sec cycle overlaps with the winning target period of the 1.2-sec cycle, the winning is won once every five times. Since the length of the winning timing cycle is different from the length of the winning target period, the general electric open winning is generated in the 6 sec cycle, which is the least common multiple of the two cycles.

In addition to the continuous winning period in which the public electricity open winning occurs in 1 sec cycle in each public electric opening lottery, the period in which the public electric opening winning occurs at 5 times intervals and 4 seconds intervals, and at 5 times intervals and 6 seconds. It is possible to generate a period in which the general public winning is generated in a cycle. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the variation of the mode in which the public electric open winning is generated.

Further, for example, the main ROM 64 has a third replacement table in which the winning determination value is set to (250 × n-105) to (250 × n-100), and the winning determination value is (250 × n−”. The fourth replacement table set in 205) to (250 × n-200) may be stored in advance. Every time the numerical information in the general electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated once, it is used for the general electric opening lottery in the order of low frequency winning judgment value table T1 → 3rd exchange table → 4th exchange table. The table of winning judgment values is switched. As a result, the winning continuous period and the non-winning continuous period can be created by shifting the winning target period without changing the initial value of the general electric utility opening counter C4.

-In the first embodiment described above, the frequency with which the normal power is open per unit time during the winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode is higher than the frequency with which the normal power is open per unit time in the high frequency support mode. It may have a low configuration. Then, the frequency of occurrence of the winning continuous period may be increased in the low frequency support mode. For example, in a series of opening / closing operations of the general electric accessory 34a executed by the general electric opening winning in the winning continuous period, the total time in the open state may be reduced. Specifically, in a series of opening / closing operations, a method of reducing the number of times of opening, a method of shortening one opening time, and a method of lengthening the closed state during a series of opening / closing operations are used alone or in combination. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the public power is open per unit time during the continuous winning period of the low frequency support mode.

In addition, when a series of open / close wins occur consecutively during the winning consecutive period, a series of opening / closing operations based on one open / close winning operation is performed, and then a series of opening / closing operations based on the next open / closing operation are performed. By using a method of lengthening the time until the event is performed, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the public power is open per unit time during the continuous winning period of the low frequency support mode.

Further, for example, by increasing the frequency with which the initial value of the universal utility release counter C4 is updated, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the winning continuous period occurs in the low frequency support mode. Specifically, the frequency with which the winning target period occurs can be increased by configuring the initial value update at the timing when the general electric accessory opening counter C4 makes a half turn. When the winning period is reached, the initial value update of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 is postponed three times, so that only the frequency of the winning period without changing the length of the winning period can be determined. Can be increased.

It is possible to reduce the frequency with which the public power is open per unit time in one continuous winning period, and increase the frequency with which the continuous winning period occurs in the low frequency support mode. For this reason, in the low-frequency support mode in which the non-winning continuous period and the winning continuous period are combined, the winning continuous period can easily occur without changing the frequency of opening the public power per unit time. Can give the player the impression. As a result, in the low frequency support mode, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player for the winning continuous period that the winning continuous period may occur.

-In the first embodiment described above, the relationship between the winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode is that the winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode is the second operating port 34 than the high frequency support mode. It is not limited to the relationship that winning a prize is likely to occur. In the low frequency support mode winning consecutive period, the public power opening lottery will occur consecutively, whereas in the high frequency support mode, the public power opening lottery will have a probability of approximately 3/5. Occurs. In the high-frequency support mode, a series of opening / closing operations in which the general electric accessory 34a is opened for 1 second and closed for 1 second is repeated five times, triggered by one winning of the general electric opening. On the other hand, for example, in the continuous winning period of the low-frequency support mode, a series of opening / closing operations in which the universal utility 34a is open for 0.8 sec and closed for 1 sec are repeated three times. , The possibility that the second operating port 34 will be won in the high frequency support mode can be made higher than the possibility that the second operating port 34 will be won in the continuous winning period of the low frequency support mode. it can. As a result, while maintaining the superiority of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode, the expectation that a prize will be generated in the second operating port 34 in the low-frequency support mode will be extremely low. It can be avoided.

Further, for example, in the winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is set by repeating a series of opening / closing operations in which the general electric accessory 34a is opened for 1 second and closed for 1 second three times. Therefore, the possibility of winning a prize in the second operating port 34 can be made the same as the possibility of winning a prize in the second operating port 34 in the low frequency support mode. As a result, even during the non-winning continuous period of the low-frequency support mode, the player launches the game ball B1 with the expectation that the second operating port 34 will be awarded to the same extent as in the high-frequency support mode. You can perform operations.

It should be noted that the relationship between the possibility of winning a prize in the second operating port 34 during the continuous winning period of the low frequency support mode and the possibility of winning a prize in the second operating port 34 in the high frequency support mode The parameters for adjustment are not limited to the opening time and the number of times the universal electric accessory 34a is opened. For example, as the parameter, the probability of winning the general electricity opening in the low frequency support mode and the probability of winning the general electricity opening in the high frequency support mode may be adjusted.

-In the first embodiment described above, there may be a configuration in which the general electric accessory 34a has only one type of support mode for supporting the winning of the game ball B1 into the second operating port 34. Specifically, the main ROM 64 stores only one winning determination value table in which the winning determination value to be the target of the ordinary electric opening winning is set in the ordinary electric opening lottery. In the winning judgment value table, (250 × n-9) to (250 × n) are set as the winning judgment values to be the target of the public electric open winning. Here, the variable n is a natural number of 1 to 262. In this configuration, the probability of winning the Fuden Opening in the Fuden Opening Lottery is approximately 1/25. The winning target period in which the winning determination value, which is the target of the general electric open winning, continues, occurs in a cycle of 1 sec and continues for 40 msec. In this configuration, there are two situations: one is a non-winning consecutive period and the public electric opening lottery does not win the general electric opening, and the other is a continuous winning period in which the general electric opening lottery occurs consecutively. There are two possible states. Regarding the support provided by the Fuden accessory 34a, by limiting the period that is advantageous to the player to only the winning continuous period that occurs without warning, the player's expectation for the winning continuous period is raised, and the winning continuous period is always the player. Can be conscious of. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

-In the first embodiment described above, a discharge guard portion that surrounds the outer edge of the rotating body 183 may also be formed in the lower portion of the adjusting mechanism 180. Further, the adjustment mechanism 180 may be provided with a discharge escape passage for releasing the game ball B1 sandwiched when the adjustment mechanism 180 is discharged to the rear of the game board 24. Specifically, a discharge port through which the game ball B1 can pass is formed in the discharge guard portion formed along the outer edge of the rotating body 183 in the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180. The game ball B1 taken into the recessed portions 183b to 183e at the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 180 is discharged from the discharge port of the discharge guard portion at the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 180.

The game board 24 has a game ball B1 sandwiched between the side surface of the discharge port and the blade portions 188 to 191 of any of the rotating bodies 183 when the game board 24 is discharged from the adjustment mechanism 180 behind the front surface of the game board 24. It is equipped with a discharge passage for escape. Further, on the surface of the game board 24 around the discharge port, a discharge passage entrance is formed as an opening that allows the game ball B1 sandwiched at the time of discharge to enter the discharge escape passage.

The discharge escape passage connects to the escape passage 172. The left end face of the discharge port in the discharge guard portion is inclined to the left toward the rear. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is discharged from the discharge port and is sandwiched between the rotating body 183 and the discharge guard portion, the rotating body 183 rotates, so that the sandwiched game ball B1 is sandwiched. Pushed backwards. The extruded game ball B1 passes through the discharge passage entrance and enters the discharge escape passage. The game ball B1 passes through the escape passage 172 and is discharged from the passage exit 173.

By using the discharge escape passage, even if the discharge guard portion is provided at the lower part of the adjustment mechanism 180, the game ball B1 is prevented from being caught between the rotating body 183 and the discharge guard portion and becoming stuck. can do. By configuring the game ball B1 to be discharged from the discharge port of the discharge guard portion, the game ball B1 can be directed toward the first through gate 35 and discharged.

-In the first embodiment described above, a gap is provided between the rotating body 183 and the standing walls 181c and 181d so that the game ball B1 cannot enter, and the movement of the game ball B1 passing through the escape passage 172 is visually recognized from the gap. It may be possible. In this case, an opaque material can be used for the rotating body 183 and the upright walls 181c and 181d. By increasing the degree of freedom in material selection, it becomes possible to select a material that suits the cost and design.

-In the first embodiment described above, the initial value of the general electric utility opening counter C4 may be updated in the same manner as in the non-winning continuous period even if the winning continuous period is reached. Specifically, in the non-winning continuous period of the low-frequency support mode, "1" is not set in the send-off flag 65d even if the public electric open winning is generated three times in a row. Therefore, at the initial value update timing that is first reached after the winning continuous period is reached, the initial value update of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 is executed, and the winning continuous period ends. By setting the winning continuous period shorter than the configuration in which the initial value update of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 is postponed during the winning continuous period, the expectation for winning the second operating port 34 in the low frequency support mode is expected. It is possible to maintain the superiority of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode while increasing the value.

-In the first embodiment described above, the initial value update of the general electric accessory release counter C4 that is sent off when the send-off flag 65d is set to "1" is not limited to once. When the send-off flag 65d is set to "1", the initial value update of the general electric accessory release counter C4 may be postponed a plurality of times. When the winning consecutive period is reached, the winning or losing lottery will result in a big hit, and by increasing the possibility of shifting to the big hit state, the player's interest in the winning continuous period can be increased.

When the send-off flag 65d is set to "1", a big hit result may be obtained in the winning / losing lottery, and the initial value update of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 may be postponed until the state shifts to the big hit state. In the low-frequency support mode, the send-off flag 65d is set to "1" when the public power open winning occurs three times in a row, and the send-off flag 65d is cleared to "0" when the jackpot state is entered. .. As a result, the player can be confident of the transition to the jackpot state when the winning consecutive period is reached. By making the winning continuous period attractive to the player, it is possible to expect a transition to a jackpot state even in the low frequency support mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the total number of winnings to the first operating port 33 and the number of winnings to the second operating port 34 during the period when the send-off flag 65d is set to "1" is counted, and the total number of times exceeds the reference value. The send-off flag 65d may be cleared to "0". As a result, when the winning consecutive period is reached, the winnings of the operating ports 33 and 34 or more are secured more than the reference number of times. To avoid ending the winning consecutive period with a small number of winnings to the operating ports 33 and 34 despite the winning continuous period, and make the winning continuous period attractive to the player. Can be done.

Based on the fact that "1" is set in the send-off flag 65d, the number of times that the initial value update of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 is postponed may be random. For example, when the initial value update timing is reached with the send-off flag 65d set to "1", a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to continue the winning continuous period. By making people aware of the possibility that the winning consecutive period will continue for a long time, it is possible to raise the player's interest in the winning continuous period.

-In the first embodiment described above, the main CPU 63 has entered the winning continuous period when the winning of the first through gate 35 occurs once in the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode. It may be a configuration to grasp. As already described in the first embodiment, in the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, the general electric open winning is not generated based on the winning of the first through gate 35. On the other hand, in the public electric opening lottery based on the winning of the second through gate 39, the probability of winning the general electric opening is approximately 1/42. When the main CPU 63 detects the winning of the first through gate 35 by the first gate detection sensor 49a during the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, the send-off flag 65d is based on the one winning. Is set to "1", and when the second gate detection sensor 50a detects that the second through gate 39 has won a prize, the send-off flag 65d is not set to "1". Therefore, even if the winning of the second through gate 39 is accidentally continuous, it is possible to avoid setting the send-off flag 65d to "1" based on the winning.

-In the first embodiment described above, there is a case where it is instructed to operate the game ball launching device aiming at the first through gate 35, and the game ball launching device is operated aiming at the second through gate 39. May be configured to instruct. For example, in the low frequency support mode, when the second gate detection sensor 50a detects that the second through gate 39 has won a prize, a left-handed instruction command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. The voice emission control device 81 that has received the left-handed support command sends a command to the display control device 82 to urge the player to operate the game ball launcher aiming at the first through gate 35. It is displayed on the display surface 41a of the display device 41. Further, the voice emission control device 81 controls the speaker unit 54 to output a sound content that urges the player to operate the game ball launching device aiming at the first through gate 35.

When the first gate detection sensor 49a detects that the first through gate 35 has won a prize in the high frequency support mode, a right-handed instruction command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81. The voice emission control device 81 that has received the right-handed support command sends a command to the display control device 82 to urge the player to operate the game ball launching device aiming at the second through gate 39. It is displayed on the display surface 41a of the display device 41. Further, the voice emission control device 81 controls the speaker unit 54 to output a sound content that urges the player to operate the game ball launching device aiming at the second through gate 39.

When the main CPU 63 shifts from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, the main CPU 63 fires a game ball aiming at the second through gate 39 by transmitting the above-mentioned right-handed instruction command to the voice emission control device 81. When the player is urged to operate the device and the mode is changed from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, the first through gate is transmitted to the voice emission control device 81 by transmitting the above-mentioned left-handed support command. Encourage the player to operate the game ball launcher aiming at 35. In this way, by notifying the operation mode of the game ball launching device that is advantageous to the player, even when an inexperienced player operates the game ball launching device, the winning continuous period, the high frequency support mode, and the like can be achieved. It can be configured so that the game content can be enjoyed.

-In the first embodiment described above, when the main CPU 63 grasps the winning continuous period, the player may be notified that the winning continuous period is reached. As already described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 63 has entered the winning continuous period when the public electric open winnings occur three times in a row in the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode. Grasp. In this case, the main CPU 63 transmits a continuous notification command to the voice emission control device 81. The voice light emission control device 81 that received the continuous notification command controls the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, and also transmits the command to the display control device 82, so that the player has a continuous winning period. Notify that. For example, it may be configured to directly notify by clearly indicating that the winning continuous period has been reached and prompting the player to operate the game ball launching device aiming at the first through gate 35. Further, the indirect notification may be performed by changing the background on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41.

Further, when the winning continuous period is reached, the main CPU 63 transmits a continuous effect command to the voice emitting control device 81 to grasp that the voice emitting control device 81 is in the winning continuous period. May be. The main CPU 63 transmits a continuous end command to the voice emission control device 81 when the winning continuous period ends. When the voice emission control device 81 receives the continuous end command, it grasps that the winning continuous period has ended. When the voice emission control device 81 receives the variation command and the type command from the main CPU 63 between the time when the continuous effect command is received and the time when the continuous end command is received, the sound emission control device 81 wins the effect for the game round. Change to the one for continuous period.

In this way, not only the movement of the general electric accessory 34a, but also the notification or effect using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 is used to appeal the winning continuous period and play the winning continuous period. Can impress people. By making the winning continuous period aware in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored in the low-frequency support mode and improve the interest of the game.

-In the first embodiment described above, the winning lottery triggered by winning the second operating port 34 is more advantageous to the player than the winning lottery triggered by winning the first operating port 33. May be. Then, the hold information acquired by winning the second operating port 34 may be preferentially digested over the holding information acquired by winning the first operating port 33. The configuration will be specifically described below.

When a prize is won in the first operating port 33, a combination of numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is used as the holding information for the first lottery in order to be used for the first winning lottery. To be acquired. Further, when a prize is won in the second operating port 34, the combination of the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is reserved for the second lottery in order to be used for the second winning lottery. Obtained as information. In the hold storage area 65a, the second lottery hold information is stored in an area different from the first lottery hold information. Then, when one or more of the first lottery hold information and the second lottery hold information are stored at the execution timing of the winning lottery, the second winning lottery based on the second lottery hold information is the first. It is executed with priority over the lottery per one. If a winning lottery is won based on the winning of the first operating port 33, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won. Similarly, even if a winning lottery is won based on the winning of the second operating port 34, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won. The type of jackpot result set in the sorting table used for the second winning lottery is more advantageous to the player than the type of jackpot result set in the sorting table used for the first winning lottery. It has become.

In this configuration, as already described in the first embodiment, the adjustment mechanism 180 is provided above the first through gate 35, and in the low frequency support mode, the non-winning continuous period or the winning continuous period Become. The possibility that the operating ports 33 and 34 will be won in the low frequency support mode that combines the non-winning continuous period and the winning continuous period is the possibility that the operating ports 33 and 34 will be won in the high frequency support mode. Therefore, the player's expectation that the operating ports 33 and 34 will be won is also low. However, during the winning continuous period, the support provided by the general electric accessory 34a is likely to be executed, so that there is a high possibility that a prize will be generated in the second operating port 34. The configuration is such that the player is more likely to get a favorable result when the second operating port 34 is won than when the first operating port 33 is won. Therefore, even in the low frequency support mode, there is a possibility that the player can enjoy a great profit due to the occurrence of the winning continuous period. By raising the player's expectation for the winning consecutive period, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that a prize will be generated in the second operating port 34 in the low frequency support mode, and to improve the interest of the game. it can.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for periodically supplying the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 210 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a front view of the first through gate 35 and the game board 210 in which the upper configuration of the first through gate 35 is enlarged and shown. As shown in FIG. 41, in the game board 210 of the present embodiment, an adjusting mechanism 220 is provided above the first through gate 35 in place of the adjusting mechanism 180 of the first embodiment. The adjusting mechanism 220 adjusts the timing at which the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35.

As shown in FIG. 41, the adjusting mechanism 220 has a rotating body 230 that conveys the game ball B1 (FIG. 3) incorporated in the adjusting mechanism 220 from the upper part to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 220, and the rotating body 230 rotates. The adjusting drive unit 184 already described in the first embodiment and the game ball B1 that accommodates the rotating body 230 and is conveyed to the discharge position by the rotating body 230 rotates. It is provided with a housing 250 for preventing it from being discharged to the outside before reaching the discharge position by the centrifugal force of the.

The adjusting mechanism 220 discharges the game ball B1 taken in at the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 220 toward the first through gate 35 located below the adjusting mechanism 220. As shown in FIG. 41, the distance from the lower end of the adjusting mechanism 220 to the first through gate 35 is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. Specifically, the adjusting mechanism 220 is provided at a distance of approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the first through gate 35 and the game ball B1. Then, in the path of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 220 toward the first through gate 35, a part of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 220 is prevented from winning the first through gate 35. A distribution nail 271 is provided for this purpose.

The distribution nail 271 is provided so as to project 6 mm forward from the front surface of the game board 210. Therefore, of the game balls B1 having a diameter of 11 mm flowing down the game area PA (FIG. 3) having a length dimension of 18 mm in the front-rear direction, the game balls B1 flowing down near the game board 24 collide with the distribution nail 271. As a result, the game ball B1 flowing down the window panel 52 will be removed from the first through gate 35, and will win the first through gate 35 without colliding with the distribution nail 271.

The configuration of the adjusting mechanism 220 will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, the housing 250 includes a plate-shaped base body 251 used for fixing the housing 250 to the game board 210. FIG. 42A is a plan view of the housing 250 shown by cutting directly above the adjusting mechanism 220. As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the game board 210 includes a fixing recessed portion 211 capable of accommodating the base body 251 without a gap. The adjusting mechanism 220 is fixed to the game board 210 by nailing the four corners of the base body 251 while the base body 251 is housed in the fixing recess 211, as shown in FIG. 41. In a state where the adjusting mechanism 220 is fixed to the game board 210, the front surface of the base body 251 exists on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 210.

As shown in FIG. 41, the housing 250 is formed with a storage space for accommodating the rotating body 230, and the rotating body 230 is arranged in the center of the accommodating space. Behind the base body 251 is an adjustment drive unit 184 already described in the first embodiment. The output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184 extends from the front surface of the adjustment drive unit 184 to the front in a direction orthogonal to the front surface of the game board 210.

The base body 251 is formed with a through hole (not shown) for inserting the output shaft 184a. The rotating body 230 is connected to the output shaft 184a so that the axis of the rotating body 230 is located on the same straight line as the output shaft 184a of the adjusting drive unit 184. When the adjustment drive unit 184 is put into the drive state, the rotating body 230 rotates clockwise at an angular velocity of 90 ° in 1 second.

In the adjusting mechanism 220, as the rotating body 230 rotates, the game ball B1 taken into the adjusting mechanism 220 is conveyed to the lower part of the accommodating space at the upper part of the accommodating space. The adjusting mechanism 220 is in a state where one game ball B1 can be ejected each time the rotating body 230 rotates 1/4. That is, the adjusting mechanism 220 can supply the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 at a cycle of 1 sec, similarly to the adjusting mechanism 180 in the first embodiment.

By generating the winning possible timing already described in the first embodiment in a 1-sec cycle, it is possible to generate a non-winning continuous period when the winning possible timing does not overlap with the winning target period of the public electric open lottery. , When the winning timing overlaps with the winning period, the winning continuous period can be generated.

As shown in FIG. 41, the housing 250 includes upright walls 252, 253, 261 for partitioning a storage space in which the rotating body 230 is housed. A plurality of upright walls 252, 253, 261 are formed on the base body 251 so as to project forward from the front surface of the base body 251. As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the upright walls 252, 253, 261 exist from the front surface of the base body 251 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52. The upright walls 252, 253, 261 are formed so as to surround the rotating body 230 at intervals from the outside of the peripheral surface of the rotating body 230. The distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to each of the upright walls 252,253,261 is constant, and the accommodation space is circularly divided by the upright walls 252,253,261.

FIG. 43 is a front view of a single rotating body 230 separated from the adjusting mechanism 220. As shown in FIG. 43, the rotating body 230 is a substantially disk-shaped resin member, and four stepped portions at equal intervals in the circumferential direction are present on the peripheral surface of the rotating body 230. Here, the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a of the four stepped portions are in the order of the first stepped surface 241a → the second stepped surface 242a → the third stepped surface 243a → the fourth stepped surface 244a in the rotation direction of the rotating body 230. They are lined up like this. The four stepped surfaces 241a to 244a project in the radial direction of the rotating body 230, and the protruding dimensions of the four stepped surfaces 241a to 244a are substantially the same as the radius of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 43, the rotating body 230 has an inner side of the first stepped surface 241a (the side closer to the center of the rotating body 230) and an outer side of the second stepped surface 242a (the side far from the center of the rotating body 230). A second support surface 242 that is provided with a first support surface 241 that connects the sides of the second step surface and connects the inner side of the second step surface 242a and the outer side of the third step surface 243a. It has. Further, the rotating body 230 includes a third support surface 243 that connects the inner side of the third step surface 243a and the outer side of the fourth step surface 244a, and is inside the fourth step surface 244a. A fourth support surface 244 connecting a side and an outer side of the first support surface 241 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 43, each of the support surfaces 241 to 244 is a curved surface formed by bulging outward. In each of the support surfaces 241 to 244, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the support surfaces 241 to 244 gradually becomes shorter as the rotation direction (clockwise) progresses from the front side to the rear side. For example, when the first support surface 241 is specifically described as an example, as shown in FIG. 43, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the first support surface 241 is the second step surface 242a which is the front side in the rotation direction. It is long on the side and gradually shortens toward the first stepped surface 241a side, which is the rear side in the rotation direction.

As shown in FIG. 41, any of the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230, the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a located at the rear end in the rotation direction on the support surfaces 241 to 244, and the rotating body 230 are accommodated. The space partitioned by the upright walls 252, 253, 261 that partition the accommodation space has a shape and size that can accommodate the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 41, the left side of the circular accommodation space is partitioned by the left standing wall 261 and the lower right side of the accommodation space is partitioned by the lower right standing wall 253. The left standing wall 261 and the lower right standing wall 253 are integrally formed with the base body 251. The lower right upright wall 253 is provided with a rotation shaft 254 at the upper end of the lower right upright wall. The rotation shaft 254 extends forward in a manner orthogonal to the front surface of the base body 251. The upper right side of the accommodation space is partitioned by an upper right upright wall 252, which is an independent member that is not fixed to the base body 251. The upper right upright wall 252 is connected to the lower right upright wall 253 in such a manner that it can rotate around the rotation shaft 254 to a certain angle.

FIG. 42B is a front view of the housing 250 which is enlarged around the rotation shaft 254. As shown in FIG. 42B, in the portion where the lower right standing wall 253 and the upper right standing wall 252 are connected, the upper right standing wall 252 is centered on the rotating shaft 254 on the right side of the rotating shaft 254. There is a gap that allows it to rotate clockwise. Therefore, when a force in the right direction is applied to the upper right upright wall 252 from the outside, the upper right upright wall 252 can rotate clockwise around the rotation shaft 254. On the other hand, on the left side of the rotation shaft 254, there is no gap that allows the upper right standing wall 252 to rotate counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 254.

As shown in FIG. 42 (b), the initial state is a state in which the upper right upright wall 252 cannot rotate counterclockwise (leftward in FIG. 42 (b)). The upper right upright wall 252 rotates clockwise with an upper limit of approximately 15 ° to the displacement position indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 41. By rotating the upper right upright wall 252 from the initial position to the displacement position, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper right upright wall 252 is extended.

The upper right upright wall 252 is located at the initial position when no external force is applied, and when a force is applied from the outside to the right, the upper right standing wall 252 rotates around the rotation shaft 254 to the displacement position. When the external force is removed, the upper right upright wall 252, which has been rotated to the deformed position by an external force, rotates counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 254 due to its own weight and returns to the initial position.

As shown in FIG. 41, the upper side of the accommodation space is partitioned by a left standing wall 261 and an upper right standing wall 252. Immediately above the rotating body 230, the left standing wall 261 and the upper right standing wall 252 are separated from each other, and the space between the two standing walls 252 and 261 is an intake port 262 for taking the game ball B1 into the accommodation space. It has become. The width of the intake port 262 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 so that the game balls B1 flowing down from above can be taken in one by one.

Since the upper right upright wall 252 defining the right end of the intake port 262 can rotate around the rotation shaft 254 from the initial position to the displacement position, the intake port 262 is deformed as necessary. The adjustment mechanism 220 can easily take in the game ball B1. The mode in which the adjusting mechanism 220 takes in the game ball B1 from the taking-in port 262 will be described later.

The game ball B1 incorporated in the adjusting mechanism 220 is conveyed from the upper part to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 220 while contacting any of the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230. The support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230 will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 43, the first support surface 241 and the second support surface 242, and the third support surface 243 are inclined toward the front and toward the axis. Therefore, the game ball B1 conveyed while contacting any of these three support surfaces 241 to 243 is located on the front side (window panel 52 side) of the game area PA (FIG. 3). On the other hand, the fourth support surface 244 is inclined toward the rear toward the axis. Therefore, the game ball B1 conveyed while contacting the fourth support surface 244 is located on the rear side (base body 251 side) of the game area PA.

In this way, the game balls discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 are discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 by differentiating the positions of the conveyed game balls B1 in the front-rear direction according to the support surfaces 241 to 244 in contact with the adjustment mechanism 220. The positions of B1 in the front-rear direction can be different. As described above, the distance from the lower end of the adjusting mechanism 220 to the first through gate 35 is approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1 and is discharged from the adjusting mechanism 220 toward the first through gate 35. On the way, a distribution nail 271 projecting to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the game area PA is provided.

A game ball B1 that is taken into the adjusting mechanism 220 from the intake port 262, moves in the rotational direction while contacting the first support surface 241 and the second support surface 242, or the third support surface 243 (FIG. 41) and is discharged. Flows down the front side of the game area PA toward the first through gate 35.

44 (a) and 44 (c) are cross-sectional views of the window panel 52 and the game board 210 when the distribution nail 271 is cut in a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 210, and FIGS. 44 (b) ) And (d) are front views of the game board 210 in which the periphery of the adjusting mechanism 220 is enlarged. As shown in FIG. 44A, the game ball B1 flowing down the front side of the game area PA flows down in front of the distribution nail 271 without colliding with the distribution nail 271. Then, the game ball B1 wins a prize in the first through gate 35 as shown in FIG. 44 (b).

On the other hand, as already described with reference to FIG. 41, the fourth support surface 244 is inclined downward toward the rear when the fourth support surface 244 is located upward. It has an inclination to be the surface. Therefore, the game ball B1 which is taken into the adjusting mechanism 220 from the intake port 262, moves in the rotational direction while contacting the fourth support surface 244, and is discharged, has the back side of the game area PA on the first through gate 35. Flow down toward. As shown in FIG. 44 (c), the game ball B1 flowing down the back side of the game area PA collides with the right side of the distribution nail 271. As shown in FIG. 44 (d), the game ball B1 is bounced to the right by the distribution nail 271 and therefore does not win the first through gate 35.

The probability that the game ball B1 taken in from the intake port 262 is conveyed to the discharge passage 264 while being in contact with the first support surface 241 or the second support surface 242 or the third support surface 243 is 3/4. The probability that the captured game ball B1 is conveyed to the discharge passage 264 while in contact with the fourth support surface 244 is 1/4. Therefore, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 wins the first through gate 35 with a probability of about 3/4, and collides with the distribution nail 271 with a probability of about 1/4 to make the first through. It comes off the gate 35.

Next, the configuration around the intake port 262 in the adjusting mechanism 220 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (d). 45 (a) to 45 (d) are front views of the game board 210 in which the periphery of the adjusting mechanism 220 is enlarged. As shown in FIG. 45A, the left standing wall 261 extends to the upper left of the rotating body 230 and has an end face 261a at the upper end. The end surface 261a has a gentle downward inclination toward the left, and the right end of the end surface 261a enters the intake port 262 and comes into contact with any of the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230. It is located below the upper end of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 45A, in the game board 210, a plurality of left guide nails 291 and right side guide nails 292 are provided above the adjustment mechanism 220 in order to guide the game ball B1 to the intake port 262. There is. Here, the left side guide nail 291 and the right side guide nail 292 are the same members as the nails 24b (FIG. 3) provided on the game board 210 in large numbers.

As shown in FIG. 45 (a), in the game board 210, the left guide nails 291 are arranged in a row above the left standing wall 261, and the arrangement direction of the rows is downward toward the right. It is tilted. The row of the left guide nails 291 guides the game ball B1 flowing down from above the left standing wall 261 toward the intake port 262. Further, right side guide nails 292 are lined up in a row above the upper right standing wall 252, and the line-up direction is inclined downward toward the left. The row of the right side guide nails 292 guides the game ball B1 flowing down from above the upper right standing wall 252 toward the intake port 262.

As described above, the upper right upright wall 252 is configured to rotate to the right from the initial position to the displacement position when a force in the right direction is applied from the outside. In this configuration, the row of right guide nails 292 lined up above the upper right standing wall 252 prevents the game ball B1 flowing down from above from colliding with the upper right standing wall 252. Therefore, the rotational state of the upper right standing wall 252 does not change due to the collision of the game ball B1 flowing down from above with the upper right standing wall 252 at the displacement position.

As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the distance from the right guide nail 292 located at the lower end of the row of the right guide nail 292 to the upper right standing wall 252 is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 does not enter the gap between the row of the right guide nail 292 and the upper right standing wall 252. On the other hand, the distance from the left guide nail 291 located at the lower end of the row of the left guide nail 291 to the left standing wall 261 is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 that is guided to the left by the row of the right guide nails 292 and is not taken into the intake port 262 is a space existing between the row of the left guide nails 291 and the left standing wall 261. Will escape to the left of the adjusting mechanism 220.

Further, the game ball B1 which was guided to the right by the row of the left guide nail 291 and was not taken into the intake port 262 collided with the right guide nail 292 and the upper right standing wall 252 and was bounced to the left. After that, it passes through the space existing between the row of the left guide nail 291 and the left standing wall 261 and escapes to the left side of the adjusting mechanism 220. In this way, the game ball B1 that was guided to the vicinity of the intake port 262 but was not taken into the inside of the adjustment mechanism 220 from the intake port 262 is released to the left side of the adjustment mechanism 220. It is possible to prevent the game ball B1 from staying in the vicinity of the intake port 262.

The game ball B1 flows down to the intake port 262 of the adjusting mechanism 220 regardless of the rotational state of the rotating body 230. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has flowed down to the intake port 262 may come into contact with the front position of the support surfaces 241 to 244 located above, and may come into contact with the rear position of the support surfaces 241 to 244. There are both. Here, the front position of the support surfaces 241 to 244 is the front side portion of the support surfaces 241 to 244 in the rotation direction, and the rear position of the support surfaces 241 to 244 is the rotation on the support surfaces 241 to 244. The posterior part of the direction.

The behavior of the game ball B1 at the intake port 262 is common regardless of the support surfaces 241 to 244 with which the game ball B1 contacts. Therefore, in the following, the behavior of the game ball B1 that flows down to the intake port 262 and comes into contact with the first support surface 241 will be described as an example.

First, a case where the game ball B1 flowing down to the intake port 262 comes into contact with the rear position of the first support surface 241 located above will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (b). As shown in FIG. 45 (b), when the game ball B1 is in contact with the rear position of the first support surface 241, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper end of the game ball B1 is the rotating body 230. It is shorter than the distance from the center of the wall to the upright walls 252, 253, 261. Therefore, the game ball B1 is conveyed toward the lower part of the accommodation space while being pushed by the first stepped surface 241a existing at the rear end of the first supporting surface 241 in contact with the game ball B1.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 45 (b) and 45 (c), the case where the game ball B1 flowing down to the intake port 262 comes into contact with the front position of the first support surface 241 located above. explain. As shown in FIG. 45 (c), when the game ball B1 is in contact with the front position of the first support surface 241, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper end of the game ball B1 is the distance of the rotating body 230. It is longer than the distance from the center to the upright walls 252, 253, 261. Therefore, at the intake port 262, the game ball B1 that tries to move to the right in accordance with the rotation of the rotating body 230 comes into contact with the upper right standing wall 252.

If the rotating body 230 rotates while the upper right standing wall 252 prevents the game ball B1 from moving to the right, the game ball B1 cannot move to the right from the intake port 262, so that the game ball B1 and the first The contact point with the support surface 241 moves from the front side to the rear side of the first support surface 241.

As described above, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the first support surface 241 gradually decreases from the front position to the rear position of the first support surface 241. Therefore, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper end of the game ball B1 is gradually shortened. In this case, the game ball B1 that continues to be in contact with the first support surface 241 gradually sinks downward as the rotating body 230 rotates.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the game ball B1 is in a state of being present at the rear position of the first support surface 241. As described above, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upper end of the game ball B1 is the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upright wall 252,253 in the state of being present at the rear position of the first support surface 241. It is shorter than the distance to 261. Therefore, the game ball B1 is pushed by the first stepped surface 241a existing at the rear end of the first support surface 241 and is conveyed toward the lower part of the accommodation space.

Here, when the rotating body 230 rotates from the state where the game ball B1 exists at the front side position of the first support surface 241 to the state where the game ball B1 exists at the rear side position, the game ball B1 and the first game ball B1 and the first from the center of the rotating body 230. The distance to the contact point with the support surface 241 is continuously reduced. Therefore, even if the game ball B1 is in a state of waiting at the intake port 262, it is not in a state of being stopped at one place but in a state of being constantly moving downward.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the game area PA (FIG. 3), a space is provided on the left side of the left standing wall 261 so that the game ball B1 can flow downward. No nail 24b is arranged in the space. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has not been taken into the adjusting mechanism 220 at the intake port 262 can pass through the space and proceed downstream of the game area PA.

The game ball B1 that has flowed down to a position shifted to the left side of the intake port 262 comes into contact with the end surface 261a of the left standing wall 261. As described above, the end face 261a is inclined downward toward the left. Therefore, the game ball B1 is guided by the end surface 261a of the left standing wall 261 and flows down the space provided on the left side of the left standing wall 261.

The game ball B1 that has flowed down to a position shifted to the right side of the intake port 262 is guided by the right guide nail 292 and moves toward the intake port 262. Since the game ball B1 does not collide with the upper right standing wall 252 from above, the upper right standing wall 252 is rotated from the initial position to the displacement position by the game ball B1 flowing down from above, or is rotated from the displacement position to the initial position. It doesn't move.

As shown in FIG. 45 (c), when the first game ball B1 enters the intake port 262 and is in contact with any of the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230, the second game ball B1 When the game ball B1 tries to enter the intake port 262, the game ball B1 comes into contact with the first game ball B1. Since the right guide nail 292 and the upper right standing wall 252 exist on the right side of the second game ball B1, the game ball B1 does not advance to the right but advances to the left.

As described above, the right end of the end surface 261a of the left standing wall 261 exists below the second game ball B1, and the end surface 261a is inclined downward toward the left. Then, on the left side of the left standing wall 261, there is a space through which the game ball B1 can pass. Therefore, the second game ball B1 that has not been taken into the intake port 262 flows down the left side of the adjusting mechanism 220.

Since the game ball B1 that has not been taken into the take-in port 262 does not stay and stay in the vicinity of the take-in port 262, it is possible to maintain a state in which the game ball B1 is taken in smoothly at the take-in port 262.

Next, a mode in which the game ball B1 taken in from the intake port 262 is conveyed to the lower part of the accommodation space as the rotating body 230 rotates will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (d). As described above, the game ball B1 transported while in contact with any one of the first support surface 241 and the second support surface 242 and the third support surface 243 exists on the front side (window panel 52 side) in the front-rear direction. The game ball B1 conveyed while in contact with the fourth support surface 244 exists on the rear side (base body 251 side) in the front-rear direction.

Except for the existing position in the front-rear direction, the movement of the game ball B1 during transportation is common regardless of the support surfaces 241 to 244 with which the game ball B1 is in contact during transportation. Therefore, in the following, a case where the game ball B1 is conveyed while being in contact with the first support surface 241 will be described as an example.

As shown in FIG. 45 (d), the game ball B1 is conveyed while being in contact with the first support surface 241 and the first step surface 241a. The game ball B1 being conveyed is in a state in which a force is applied in the rotational direction from the first stepped surface 241a protruding in the radial direction of the rotating body 230.

As described above, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to each of the support surfaces 241 to 244 is long on the front side in the rotation direction (clockwise) on each support surface 241 to 244, and gradually increases toward the rear side in the rotation direction. It gets shorter. Further, as already described, the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the upright walls 252, 253, 261 that partition the accommodating space of the rotating body 230 is constant.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45 (d), the distance from any of the support surfaces 241 to 244 to the upright walls 252, 253, 261 is short on the front side in the rotation direction on the support surfaces 241 to 244, and is in the rotation direction. It gradually becomes longer as it goes to the rear side. Specifically, the width of the space sandwiched between any of the support surfaces 241 to 244 and the upright walls 252, 253, 261 is greater than the diameter of the game ball B1 on the front side of the support surfaces 241 to 244 in the rotational direction. Is also narrow, and gradually widens toward the rear side in the direction of rotation. The width of the space located approximately half of the rear side in the space is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Further, the distance from the front surface of the base body 251 to the window panel 52 (FIG. 1) is wider than the diameter of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 45 (d), in the space sandwiched between the first support surface 241 and the upper right standing wall 252, the space on the rear side in the rotation direction has a shape and size capable of accommodating the game ball B1. The space on the front side in the direction of rotation is a space of a size that cannot accommodate the game ball B1. In the state of being conveyed while being in contact with the first support surface 241 the space having a space in which the game ball B1 can exist is limited to the rear position of the first support surface 241.

When there is a wide space in which the game ball B1 can exist during transportation, the game ball B1 can exist at different positions even if the rotating state of the rotating body 230 is the same. In this case, even if the rotation speed of the rotating body 230 is constant and one of the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a exists at the discharge position each time the discharge timing is reached, the position of the game ball B1 at the discharge timing is each time. It will be different, and the timing at which the first through gate 35 can be won will be different.

On the other hand, the space having an area where the game ball B1 can exist during transportation is limited, and the game is played at the discharge timing when the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a carrying the game ball B1 reach the discharge position. By configuring the ball B1 to be conveyed to a predetermined position each time, the timing at which the first through gate 35 can be won is not deviated.

In a state where the game ball B1 is located at the rear side of any of the support surfaces 241 to 244, a space larger than the size of the game ball B1 exists around the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 is brought into contact with the first step surface 241a, the first support surface 241 and any of the upright walls 252, 253 located on the right side during transportation. It is not transported while being forcibly pushed and dragged.

Next, a configuration for the adjustment mechanism 220 to discharge the game ball B1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, the housing 250 is continuous with the accommodation space in which the rotating body 230 is accommodated, and the game ball B1 conveyed to the lower part of the accommodation space is located below the adjusting mechanism 220. A discharge passage 264 for discharging toward the 1 through gate 35 is formed. The discharge passage 264 has a passage cross section through which the game balls B1 can pass one by one, and is provided with a discharge port 256 at the lower end of the discharge passage 264. The discharge passage 264 guides the game ball B1 passing through the discharge passage 264 so that the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 256 flows down toward the first through gate 35. As shown in FIG. 44 (b), the discharge passage 264 shifts the position of the game ball B1 to the left in the upstream direction, and directs the discharge direction of the game ball B1 to the lower first through gate 35 in the downstream direction.

The discharge passage 264 is connected to the right side of the center of the accommodation space. Therefore, the game ball B1 conveyed clockwise from the upper part of the accommodation space advances to the discharge passage 264 before the game ball B1 makes a half turn around the rotating body 230.

The game ball B1 conveyed by the rotating body 230 has a downward velocity component from being taken in at the upper part of the accommodation space until it makes a half turn, and has an upward velocity component after making a half turn. It will be. The game ball B1 is advanced to the discharge passage 264 at a timing before the state in which the conveyed game ball B1 has a downward velocity component changes to a state in which the conveyed game ball B1 has an upward velocity component. By making the structure so that the game ball B1 can be smoothly moved from the accommodation space to the discharge passage 264.

As shown in FIG. 41, the housing 250 includes discharge standing walls 263 and 266 that partition the discharge passage 264. The discharge standing walls 263 and 266 are formed on the left and right sides of the discharge passage 264 so as to project forward from the front surface of the base body 251 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1). Of these, the right side discharge standing wall 266, which defines the shape of the right side passage of the discharge passage 264, is continuous with the lower right standing wall 253 and extends in a direction diagonally downward to the left. As shown in FIG. 41, the passage wall surface of the discharge passage 264 defined by the right side discharge standing wall 266 is a curve bulging diagonally upward to the left.

As shown in FIG. 41, the left-side discharge standing wall 263, which defines the shape of the left passage of the discharge passage 264, is for right-side discharge so that the passage width of the discharge passage 264 is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. It is formed so as to be separated from the upright wall 266. The passage width of the discharge passage 264 is set to be slightly narrower from the upstream to the downstream, and is approximately 1.1 times the diameter of the game ball B1 in the downstream.

As shown in FIG. 44 (b), the game ball B1 passing through the discharge passage 264 moves downward while moving to the left by being guided by the right side discharge standing wall 266. Specifically, the game ball B1 is guided mainly to the left upstream of the discharge passage 264 and downward mainly toward the first through gate 35 downstream of the discharge passage 264. As a result, it is suppressed that the discharge direction of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge passage 264 deviates from the first through gate 35.

As shown in FIG. 41, the left side discharge erecting wall 263 is provided with a discharge protrusion 263a at the upper end thereof, which protrudes into the storage space in which the rotating body 230 is housed. The distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the protruding end 263a for discharge is longer than the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the outer end of the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, and the difference between the two distances is from the diameter of the game ball B1. Is also short. That is, when the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a of the rotating body 230 are closest to the discharging protruding end 263a, the distance from the discharging protruding end 263a to the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. It protrudes to the position.

Here, the protruding dimension of the discharging protruding end 263a is such that the discharging protruding end 263a does not come into contact with the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a even when the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a are closest to each other. Therefore, the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a do not come into contact with the discharging ends 263a, so that the rotation of the rotating body 230 is not hindered.

The discharge protruding end 263a guides the game ball B1 toward the discharge passage 264 by coming into contact with the upper part of the game ball B1 conveyed to the lower part of the accommodation space by the rotating body 230. As shown in FIG. 44 (b), the game ball B1 transported to the lower part of the accommodation space is subjected to gravity that tends to fall downward. At the bottom of the accommodation space, there is a space that is slightly larger than the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 moves downward from the state of being in contact with the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230 due to its own weight.

As described above, the discharge passage 264 is connected to the right side of the center at the lower part of the accommodation space. Therefore, at the stage when the game ball B1 moves from the accommodation space to the discharge passage 264, the game ball B1 has a velocity component in the left direction and a velocity component in the downward direction. Then, the game ball B1 tries to move downward due to its own weight, and also tries to move to the left by being pushed by the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a in contact with each other.

In the lower part of the containment space, if the downward velocity component of the game ball B1 is sufficiently larger than the left velocity component, the game ball B1 moves to the discharge passage 264 along the right discharge upright wall 266. On the other hand, in the lower part of the accommodation space, when the velocity component of the game ball B1 in the left direction is large, the game ball B1 tends to move to the left away from the right discharge standing wall 266.

On the other hand, as already described, the discharge protruding end 263a of the left side discharge standing wall 263 protrudes into the accommodation space. Then, the distance from the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a pushing the game ball B1 to the left to the discharging end 263a is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, even the game ball B1 having a large velocity component in the left direction cannot move to the left of the ejection protruding end 263a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), even if the game ball B1 is in contact with the support surfaces 241 to 244 without moving downward, the discharge end protruding end 263a and the stepped surface 241a to The protruding position of the discharge protruding end 263a is set so that the straight line connecting 244a passes above the center of gravity of the game ball B1. Therefore, even if the game ball B1 is sandwiched in a state where it is in contact with the ejection protruding end 263a and the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, the force that the rotating body 230 tries to rotate clockwise causes the game ball B1 to be discharged. It works in the direction of pushing toward the passage 264.

In the lower part of the accommodation space, even when the velocity component of the game ball B1 in the left direction is large, the game ball B1 in a state of being in contact with the ejection protruding end 263a and the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a is a rotating body. As the 230 rotates, it moves toward the discharge passage 264. The game ball B1 is strongly sandwiched between the discharging end 263a and the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, and the rotation of the rotating body 230 does not stop.

Next, a case where the game ball B1 comes into contact with both the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a and the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 at the intake port 262 will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, the upper right standing wall 252 at the initial position includes an end surface 252a inclined downward to the right at the free end of the upper right standing wall 252. As the rotating body 230 rotates, the distance between the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a located around the intake port 262 and the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 may become longer or shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. To do.

At the timing when the distance between the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a located near the intake port 262 and the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 changes from a state longer than the diameter of the game ball B1 to a state shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball is inserted into the intake port 262. When B1 enters, the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a and the end surface 252a.

The behavior of the sandwiched game ball B1 is the same regardless of which of the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a sandwiching the game ball B1. Therefore, in the following, the case where the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the second stepped surface 242a and the upper right standing wall 252 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46A to 46C. 46 (a) to 46 (c) are front views of the game board 210 in which the periphery of the adjusting mechanism 220 is enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the second step surface 242a and the upper right upright wall 252, when the rotating body 230 rotates clockwise, the second step surface A force in the right direction is applied to the game ball B1 from 242a. Therefore, a force in the right direction is applied from the game ball B1 to the upper right standing wall 252. As described above, the upper right upright wall 252 can rotate from the initial position to the deformed position shown by the shadow in FIG. 46 (a) about the rotation shaft 254 when a force in the right direction is applied from the outside. Is.

As shown in FIG. 46B, the upper right standing wall 252 rotates from the initial position to the deformed position, so that the distance from the center of the rotating body 230 to the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 is extended and sandwiched. The game ball B1 is guided by the inclination of the end face 252a and moves to the lower right. Next, as shown in FIG. 46 (c), the game ball B1 goes from a state of being in contact with the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 to a state of being in contact with the inner surface of the upper right standing wall 252. Here, the inner surface of the upper right upright wall 252 is a surface of the upper right upright wall 252 facing the rotating body 230, and is a surface that defines the accommodation space of the rotating body 230.

After that, the game ball B1 moves along the inner surface of the upper right standing wall 252 while being pushed by the second stepped surface 242a. As a result, the game ball B1 that is momentarily pinched by the intake port 262 can be conveyed to the discharge position at the same discharge timing as the game ball B1 that is not sandwiched by the intake port 262. ..

As described above, when the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a and the upper right standing wall 252, the adjustment mechanism 220 is configured to eliminate the state in which the game ball B1 is sandwiched and take in the game ball B1. have. As a result, the possibility that the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the rotating body 230 and the upper right standing wall 252 and the rotating body 230 cannot rotate is reduced.

By shifting from the state in which the game ball B1 is in contact with the upper right standing wall 252 to the state in which it is in contact with the lower right standing wall 253, is the rightward force applied from the game ball B1 to the upper right standing wall 252 removed? Is done. Therefore, the upper right upright wall 252 that has rotated to the displacement position returns to the initial position due to its own weight.

In the case of a configuration in which a force for returning to the initial position is applied to the upper right standing wall 252 by using a spring or the like, the force required to rotate the upper right standing wall 252 from the initial position to the displacement position increases. On the other hand, by configuring the upper right standing wall 252 to return to the initial position due to its own weight, the force required to rotate the upper right standing wall 252 is reduced, and the state in which the game ball B1 is sandwiched is instantaneous. In addition, the adjustment drive unit 184 (FIG. 41) can be prevented from being loaded in the process of resolving the condition.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the game ball B1 sandwiched between the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a of the rotating body 230 and the end surface 252a of the upper right standing wall 252 at the intake port 262 of the adjusting mechanism 220, the upper right standing wall 252 is initially centered on the rotating shaft 254. It is configured to be incorporated into the adjusting mechanism 220 by rotating from the position to the deformed position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sandwiched game ball B1 from being repelled upward and disturbing the flow of the game ball B1 around the intake port 262. Further, as compared with the configuration in which the sandwiched game ball B1 is released to the outside of the adjusting mechanism 220, more game balls B1 can be taken into the adjusting mechanism 220. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 periodically supplied to the first through gate 35 from being chipped. In addition, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the timing of winning the general public train is missed during the continuous winning period.

When the game ball B1 is located on the front side (front side in the rotation direction) of the support surfaces 241 to 244 at the intake port 262, the game ball B1 is on the rear side (rear side in the rotation direction) of the support surfaces 241 to 244. The game ball B1 stands by at the intake port 262 while moving downward until it is in a positioned state. By keeping the game ball B1 waiting at the intake port 262 in a constantly moving state, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 from stopping its movement and triggering the player's interest to shift to another. By avoiding a state in which the player's interest is lost in the process of the adjustment mechanism 220 taking in the game ball B1, it is possible to maintain the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 220 and improve the interest of the game. it can.

The adjustment mechanism 220 is configured to take in the game balls B1 one by one from the intake port 262. When two game balls B1 are taken in at the same time, one game ball B1 affects the winning timing of the other game ball B1, so that the first through gate 35 is won even during the winning continuous period. There is a possibility that the possible timing will be outside the winning period. On the other hand, by limiting the number of game balls B1 to be taken in at one time to one, there is a possibility that the game balls B1 will win the first through gate 35 at the timing when the general electric power opening is not won in the winning continuous period. It is possible to reduce the number and increase the probability of occurrence of the open-air winning of the public train during the continuous winning period. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectations of the player for the winning continuous period and improve the interest of the game.

In the game board 210, a right guide nail 292 for guiding the game ball B1 to the intake port 262 is provided above the upper right standing wall 252, and the game ball B1 is on the left above the left standing wall 261. There is a gap that allows it to move in the direction. Therefore, when the game ball B1 already exists in the intake port 262, the other game ball B1 can be released to the left side of the adjustment mechanism 220. Therefore, the number of game balls B1 that have not been taken in may stay near the take-in port 262 or disturb the flow of the game balls B1 upstream of the take-in port 262 and are taken into the adjusting mechanism 220. Can be prevented from decreasing. In this way, by suppressing the lack of the game ball B1 periodically supplied to the first through gate 35, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the timing of winning the general electric power opening is missed during the continuous winning period.

The adjusting mechanism 220 includes a protruding end 263a for discharging, and the lower portion of the adjusting mechanism 220 is prevented from ascending the game ball B1 without being discharged. As a result, the number of game balls B1 transported to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 220 by the rotating body 230 is not properly discharged, and the same game balls B1 continue to rotate and are discharged toward the first through gate 35. It can be prevented from decreasing. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the adjusting mechanism 220 due to a decrease in the frequency with which the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjusting mechanism 220. Further, by configuring the game ball B1 taken into the adjusting mechanism 220 to be discharged within a certain period of time, it is possible to prevent the pace at which the new game ball B1 is taken into the adjusting mechanism 220 from slowing down. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the adjusting mechanism 220 due to a decrease in the frequency with which the game ball B1 is taken into the adjusting mechanism 220.

The first support surface 241 and the second support surface 242, and the third support surface 243 are provided with an inclination for discharging the game ball B1 in a manner of flowing down the front side, and the fourth support surface 244 is the game ball B1. Has a slope for discharging in a manner of flowing down the back side. As already described, the distance from the lower end of the adjusting mechanism 220 to the first through gate 35 is set to be approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, only the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 220 and flowing down the back side collides with the distribution nail 271 and is disconnected from the first through gate 35. As a result, all of the game balls B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 220 win the first through gate 35, and the player avoids the situation where the player pays attention only to the take-in of the game ball B1 to the adjustment mechanism 220 and does not pay attention to the discharge. can do. By attracting the attention of the player until the moment when the first through gate 35 is won, the interest of the game can be improved.

By changing the number and inclination of the support surfaces 241 to 244, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 220 and winning the first through gate 35, and the game ball B1 detached from the first through gate 35, respectively. The frequency of occurrence can be set at the design stage. Therefore, the probability that the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 220 wins the first through gate 35 can be set to a high value other than 100%. As a result, it is possible to raise the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 220 and improve the interest of the game.

<Another form in the second embodiment>
-In the second embodiment described above, a plurality of game balls B1 may stand by while moving downward at the intake port 262. For example, one nail 24b is placed above the left end of the intake port 262, and the second game ball B1 flows down while the first game ball B1 has already entered the intake port 262. When it comes, the second game ball B1 may be held above the intake port 262. The second game ball B1 is in a state of waiting on the first game ball B1, but since the first game ball B1 always keeps moving downward until it is taken in, it comes into contact with the first game ball B1. The waiting second game ball B1 also keeps moving downward at all times.

In this way, by stocking the game ball B1 while moving it at the intake port 262, the game ball B1 taken into the adjusting mechanism 220 is insufficient, and the game ball B1 is the first in spite of the winning continuous period. It is possible to avoid a state in which the through gate 35 is won infrequently.

-In the second embodiment described above, a nail may be used instead of the housing 250 as a configuration for guiding the game ball B1 that moves while being pushed by the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a of the rotating body 230. Then, as a nail to be placed near the intake port 262, when a force in the right direction is applied from the outside, the compression coil spring is in a deformed state and moves to the right from the initial position, and the force from the outside is removed. If this is the case, a movable nail that returns to the initial position by the restoring force of the compression coil spring may be used. By using the movable nail, when the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the rotating body 230 and the movable nail, the movable nail is moved from the center of the rotating body 230 to the right by using the movable nail. It is possible to widen the distance to and take in the sandwiched game ball B1.

In this way, the game ball B1 that moves in the rotation direction while being pushed by the stepped surfaces 241a to 244a of the rotating body 230 is guided by a nail, so that the game ball B1 is guided to the first through gate 35 in the game board 210. The area occupied by the means for periodically supplying the water can be reduced. As a result, in the game board 210, the choice of the position where the means for periodically supplying the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 is provided is increased, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

-In the second embodiment described above, the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230 may not have an inclination in the front-rear direction. In this case, the four support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230 have a common shape. Therefore, the game ball B1 is discharged from the discharge passage 264 in the same manner regardless of whether the game ball B1 is conveyed while being in contact with any of the support surfaces 241 to 244. The probability that the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 220 is located on the front side (window panel 52 side) of the game area PA and the probability that it is located on the rear side (game board 210 side) is the same as that of the game ball B1. It is constant regardless of the support surfaces 241 to 244 that are in contact with each other.

For all the support surfaces 241 to 244, the game ball B1 conveyed while being in contact is located on the front side of the game area PA and wins the first through gate 35 without contacting the distribution nail 271 and the game area. The configuration can be such that both the case where the first through gate 35 is removed by contacting the distribution nail 271 located on the rear side of the PA can occur. As a result, it is possible to raise the player's interest in the behavior of the game ball B1 around the distribution nail 271 and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the configuration in which the support surfaces 241 to 244 of the rotating body 230 do not have an inclination in the front-rear direction, the game board 210 may not be provided with the distribution nail 271. In this case, the course of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge passage 264 is not affected by the position of the game ball B1 in the front-rear direction. The discharged game ball B1 has a high probability of winning the first through gate 35. However, the distance from the discharge passage 264 to the first through gate 35 is set wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, if the passage width at the lower end of the discharge passage 264 is one size wider than that of the game ball B1, the discharge direction of the game ball B1 may shift to either the left-right direction and the first through gate 35 may not be won. There is.

In this way, instead of the configuration in which the distribution nail 271 is provided on the game board 210, the relationship with the first through gate 35 in the discharge passage 264 is adjusted, and all of the discharged game balls B1 are the first. The configuration may be such that the situation of winning a prize in the through gate 35 is avoided.

-In the second embodiment described above, the distribution nail 271 may not be present in the course of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 220 toward the first through gate 35. The first through gate 35 is provided at a position separated from the discharge port 256 of the adjusting mechanism 220 by a diameter of the game ball B1 or more. Therefore, the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 256 may come off from the first through gate 35 depending on the discharge direction and the discharge speed of the game ball B1 at the discharge port 256. The positional relationship between the adjustment mechanism 220 and the first through gate 35 is adjusted so that a part of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 256 is disengaged from the first through gate 35. The behavior of the game ball B1 can also attract the player's attention.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for periodically supplying the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

The configuration around the first through gate 35 in the game board 320 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a front view of the game board 320 in which the configurations above the first through gate 35 and the first through gate 35 are enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 47, the game board 320 is provided with an adjusting mechanism 330 above the first through gate 35. The adjusting mechanism 330 discharges the game ball B1 while guiding the game ball B1 so that it falls toward the first through gate 35. In the adjusting mechanism 330, the timing at which the game ball B1 can be discharged occurs in a cycle of 1 sec.

By generating the winning possible timing already described in the first embodiment in a 1-sec cycle, it is possible to generate a non-winning continuous period when the winning possible timing does not overlap with the winning target period of the public electric open lottery. , When the winning timing overlaps with the winning period, the winning continuous period can be generated. The detailed configuration of the adjusting mechanism 330 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 47, the distance between the adjusting mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35 is set to a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. Specifically, the distance between the adjusting mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35 is set to be approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1. In the game board 320, a part of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 330 is removed from the path toward the first through gate 35 on the upper left side of the first through gate 35 and below the adjusting mechanism 330. An adjusting nail 376 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 47, the adjusting nail 376 is located to the left of the path of the game ball B1 that flows straight down from the adjusting mechanism 330 and wins the first through gate 35. Further, the adjusting nail 376 projects from the front surface of the game board 320 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1). Therefore, the game ball B1 flowing down the course shifted to the left collides with the adjusting nail 376 regardless of the position in the front-rear direction in the game area PA (FIG. 3).

When the discharge direction of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 330 is directly below, the discharged game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 without contacting the adjusting nail 376. On the other hand, when the discharge direction of the game ball B1 is shifted to the left from directly below, the discharged game ball B1 comes into contact with the adjusting nail 376. As described above, since the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35 are provided with a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 in contact with the adjusting nail 376 is disengaged from the first through gate 35. ..

By avoiding that all the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 win the first through gate 35, the movement of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 330 becomes monotonous and the player is prevented from getting bored. Can be done.

The adjustment mechanism 330 takes in the game ball B1 inside the adjustment mechanism 330 and guides it toward the first through gate 35, and the take-in range in which the game ball B1 can be taken in is the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 330. Is located in. As shown in FIG. 47, in the game board 320, a plurality of downstream guide nails 371 for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down from above to the adjustment mechanism 330 are provided upstream of the adjustment mechanism 330.

By arranging the downstream guide nails 371 on the game board 320, a row for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down from the upper right side of the adjustment mechanism 330 to the take-in range of the adjustment mechanism 330, and the adjustment mechanism 330 There is provided a row for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down from the upper left side of the above to the range that can be taken in by the adjusting mechanism 330. Here, as shown in FIG. 47, the region sandwiched between the two rows in the game board 320 is referred to as the downstream guide region 371a. The downstream guide nails 371 arranged in two rows guide the game ball B1 flowing down the downstream guide region 371a toward the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 330.

As shown in FIG. 47, an electric nail 361 that can move left and right is provided near the upper side of the row on the right side of the downstream guide nail 371. Further, above the electric nail 361, an upstream guide nail 372 for guiding most of the game ball B1 flowing down the area on the left side of the center frame 57 (FIG. 3) to the electric nail 361 in the game board 320. Are provided in multiple numbers.

By arranging the upstream guide nails 372 in the area on the left side of the center frame 57 in the game board 320, the electric game ball B1 flowing down the right side of the area is located below the upper part of the area. A row for guiding toward the nail 361 and a row for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down the left side of the area toward the electric nail 361 located below are provided. As shown in FIG. 47, the region sandwiched between the two rows is referred to as the upstream guide region 372a.

The width of the upstream guide area 372a is wide in the upper part of the upstream guide area 372a and gradually narrows toward the lower side, and in the lower part of the upstream guide area 372a (near the electric nail 361), the game balls B1 are arranged in a row. Therefore, it is an interval that allows passage.

As shown in FIG. 47, the electric nail 361 is connected to a nail drive unit 361a which is an electric actuator such as a solenoid via a link mechanism (not shown), and a game ball B1 guided by a row of upstream guide nails 372 is provided. It takes a permitted position that allows entry between the two rows of downstream guide nails 371 and a prohibited position that prohibits the game ball B1 from entering between the two rows of downstream guide nails 371. Here, the relationship between the position of the electric nail 361 and the course of the game ball B1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b).

FIG. 48 (a) is a front view of the game board 320 in which the periphery of the electric nail 361 in the permitted position is enlarged, and FIG. 48 (b) is a game in which the periphery of the electric nail 361 in the prohibited position is enlarged and shown. It is a front view of a board 320. As shown in FIG. 48A, when the drive signal of the nail drive unit 361a is at the LOW level, the electric nail 361 takes a permitted position. The electric nail 361 at the permitted position is located at the upper right of the downstream guide nail 371 located at the upper right end of the downstream guide area 371a, and is located at the lower right end of the upstream guide area 372a. It is located in the lower left of.

First, the case where the electric nail 361 is in the permitted position will be described. As shown in FIG. 48 (a), a region on the right side in the downstream guide region 371a exists below the region on the left side in the upstream guide region 372a. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has flowed downward from the left side region in the upstream guidance region 372a enters the right side region in the downstream guidance region 371a. Further, an electric nail 361 at a permitted position exists below the right side region in the upstream guide region 372a. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has flowed downward from the right side region in the upstream guide region 372a collides with the electric nail 361 and enters the downstream guide region 371a.

Next, a case where the electric nail 361 is in the prohibited position will be described. As shown in FIG. 48 (b), the electric nail 361 in the prohibited position exists below the left side region in the upstream guide region 372a. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has flowed downward from the left side region in the upstream guide region 372a collides with the electric nail 361 and flows down to the right of the downstream guide nail 371. Further, the lower part of the right side region in the upstream guide region 372a corresponds to the right side of the downstream guide region 371a. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has flowed downward from the area on the right side of the upstream guidance area 372a flows down to the right of the downstream guidance area 371a.

As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the distance between the electric nail 361 at the permitted position and the upstream guide nail 372 at the lower right end of the upstream guide area 372a, and the distance between the electric nail 361 at the prohibited position and the upstream guide The distance from the upstream guide nail 372 at the lower left end of the region 372a is set to be slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, when the electric nail 361 moves left and right, the game ball B1 is not sandwiched between the electric nail 361 and the upstream guide nail 372. Further, the distance between the electric nail 361 at the permitted position and the downstream guide nail 371 at the upper right end of the downstream guide area 371a, and the electric nail 361 at the prohibited position and the downstream guide nail 371 at the upper right end of the downstream guide area 371a The interval between the two is a narrowness that the game ball B1 cannot enter. Therefore, when the electric nail 361 moves left and right, the game ball B1 is not sandwiched between the electric nail 361 and the downstream guide nail 371.

As shown in FIG. 47, above the left side region in the downstream guide region 371a, a nail 24b is used to prevent the game ball B1 flowing down to the left of the upstream guide region 372a from entering the downstream guide region 371a. Is provided. Therefore, the game ball B1 that can enter the downstream guide area 371a is limited to the game ball B1 that flows down from the upstream guide area 372a. In this way, the game ball B1 entering the downstream guidance area 371a is limited to the game ball B1 flowing down from the upstream guidance area 372a, and the electric nail 361 moves down from the upstream guidance area 372a by moving to the prohibited position. The structure is such that the incoming game ball B1 can be guided to the right of the downstream guide area 371a. As a result, it is possible to control the frequency with which the game ball B1 enters the downstream guidance region 371a and is taken into the adjusting mechanism 330.

The drive signal of the nail drive unit 361a is a periodic signal in which the HI level for 0.2 sec is repeated at intervals of 0.8 sec. Therefore, the electric nail 361 takes a prohibited position only for 0.2 sec out of 1 sec. When two or more game balls B1 that can be launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) at intervals of 0.6 sec are connected in a row and try to enter the downstream guide area 371a, there is a high probability that the two game balls B1 will be launched. Either one of them collides with the electric nail 361 that has moved to the prohibited position and flows down to the right of the downstream guide area 371a. By using the electric nail 361, it is suppressed that the plurality of game balls B1 enter the downstream guide region 371a in a continuous state and are taken into the adjusting mechanism 330.

Next, the detailed configuration of the adjusting mechanism 330 will be described below. As shown in FIG. 47, the adjusting mechanism 330 rotates the rotating body 340 that conveys the game ball B1 from the upper part to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 330 and the rotating body 340 clockwise. The adjusting drive unit 184 and the rotating body 340 are provided on the right side of the rotating body 340 as described above in the embodiment, and the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 330 is discharged before being discharged so as to be directed toward the first through gate 35. It includes a guide member 350 that guides the direction. The adjustment drive unit 184 gives the rotating body 340 a driving force for the rotating body 340 to make one rotation in 6 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 47, the rotating body 340 includes a substantially disk-shaped rotating body main body 342 and six plate-shaped blade members 343 protruding radially from the outer periphery of the rotating body main body 342. ing. The rotating body main body portion 342 and the blade member 343 are resin members. The game ball B1 incorporated in the adjusting mechanism 330 is conveyed to the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 330 while being supported from below by any of the blade members 343 constituting the rotating body 340.

First, the configuration of the rotating body 340 in the adjusting mechanism 330 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. As shown in FIG. 47, the rotating body main body 342 includes six rotating shafts 344 on its outer circumference. The rotation shaft 344 is provided at an angle orthogonal to the front surface of the game board 320. The blade member 343 is fixed to the outer circumference of the rotating body main body 342 so as to be rotatable counterclockwise about the rotating shaft 344. The six blade members 343 are the same members having the same shape and size, and are arranged at equal intervals in the rotation direction on the outer circumference of the rotating body main body portion 342.

As shown in FIG. 47, an adjustment drive unit 184 is arranged behind the rotating body main body unit 342. The front surface of the adjustment drive unit 184 is parallel to the front surface of the game board 320, and the output shaft 184a of the adjustment drive unit 184 extends forward in a manner orthogonal to the front surface of the adjustment drive unit 184. The rotating body main body 342 is connected to the output shaft 184a so that the axis of the rotating body main body 342 is located on the same straight line as the output shaft 184a of the adjusting drive unit 184. When the adjustment drive unit 184 is put into the drive state, the rotating body body unit 342 rotates clockwise at an angular velocity of 60 ° in 1 second. In a state where the rotating body 340 is mounted on the game board 320, the rotating body main body 342 exists from the vicinity of the front surface of the game board 320 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1).

Here, a mode of fixing the blade member 343 to the rotating body main body portion 342 will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, the initial state of the blade member 343 is a state in which the blade member 343 protrudes in the radial direction from the outer edge of the rotating body main body portion 342. A recess (not shown) is formed around the rotation shaft 344 to prevent the blade member 343 in the initial state from rotating clockwise around the rotation shaft 344. Even if a force for rotating the blade member 343 clockwise acts on the blade member 343 in the initial state, the blade member 343 is in contact with the wall of the recessed portion, so that the blade member 343 rotates. do not.

An urging member (for example, a torsion coil spring) (not shown) is mounted around the rotating shaft 344. The urging member is in a natural state in which the blade member 343 is not deformed in the initial state, and the blade member 343 is rotated counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 344 to be in a displaced state. It becomes a deformed state. Restoring force of the urging member that tries to return from the deformed state to the natural state acts on the blade member 343 in the displaced state. When an external force is applied, the blade member 343 rotates counterclockwise to be in a displaced state, and when an external force is removed, the blade member 343 rotates clockwise due to a restoring force to an initial state. Return to.

Next, the configuration of the guide member 350 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. As shown in FIG. 47, the guide member 350 includes a plate-shaped base body 351. Further, on the right side of the rotating body 340 in the game board 320, a fixing recessed portion (not shown) capable of accommodating the base body 351 without a gap is formed. The guide member 350 is fixed by being nailed to the game board while the base body 351 is housed in the fixing recessed portion. In a state where the guide member 350 is mounted on the game board 320, the front surface of the base body 351 exists on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 320.

As shown in FIG. 47, the guide member 350 includes an upright wall 352 that projects vertically from the front surface of the base body 351 toward the front. The upright wall 352 extends to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52. Further, the upper end of the upright wall 352 is located above the upper end of the rotating body 340, and the lower end of the upright wall 352 is located at substantially the same height as the lower end of the rotating body main body 342.

As shown in FIG. 47, the left side surface 352a of the upright wall 352 facing the rotating body main body 342 at a distance is a gentle bow-shaped curved surface, and is recessed toward the right. The distance from the rotating body main body 342 to the upright wall 352 is set to be longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. Further, the distance from the upper end of the upright wall 352 to the blade member 343 existing at the position closest to the upper end is set to be longer than the diameter of the game ball B1 regardless of the rotational state of the rotating body 340.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the adjusting mechanism 330, the region sandwiched between the rotating body main body portion 342 and the upright wall 352 is defined as the adjusting region 330a. In the lower region of the adjustment region 330a, the distance from the blade member 343 to the upright wall 352 is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1. As described above, the blade members 343 project from the peripheral surface of the rotating body 340 in the radial direction of the rotating body 340 at intervals of 60 °.

Therefore, one of the blade members 343 of the rotating body 340 is always present in the lower region of the adjustment region 330a. Then, the game ball B1 flowing down the adjustment region 330a always comes into contact with the blade member 343 existing in the region below the adjustment region 330a. By preventing the game ball B1 that has entered the adjustment area 330a from passing through without contacting the blade member 343, the game ball B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 330 is the first through gate at a timing other than the discharge timing. It can be prevented from being discharged toward 35.

Here, a mode in which the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjustment region 330a will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c). 49 (a) to 49 (c) are front views of the game board 320 in which the periphery of the adjusting mechanism 330 is enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 49A, in the lower region of the adjustment region 330a, the game ball B1 is supported from below by the blade members existing in the region. Then, as the rotating body 340 rotates, it is conveyed to the lower discharge position. The game ball B1 is conveyed in contact with the upright wall 352 to guide the course of the game ball B1 in the adjustment region 330a.

In the game ball B1 in a state of being supported by the blade member 343 and the upright wall 352 above the first through gate 35, the rotating body 340 rotates, and as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the game ball When the gap between the free end of the blade member 343 supporting B1 and the lower end of the upright wall 352 becomes wider than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 heads toward the first through gate 35 below from the gap. And fall.

As described above, the adjusting drive unit 184 (FIG. 47) rotates the rotating body 340 at a rotation speed of one rotation in 6 seconds. Therefore, in the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 330, the gap between the free end of the blade member 343 and the lower end of the upright wall 352 changes from a state shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1 to a state longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. The timing occurs in a 1 sec cycle. In this way, the adjusting mechanism 330 can discharge the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35 at a cycle of 1 sec.

The game ball B1 entering the adjustment region 330a comes into contact with the blade member 343 and the upright wall 352 while having a downward velocity. Therefore, when the game ball B1 collides with the blade member 343 and bounces, the game ball B1 is temporarily not in contact with the blade member 343. Further, when the game ball B1 collides with the upright wall 352 and bounces, the game ball B1 is temporarily not in contact with the upright wall 352. As shown in FIG. 49 (c), when the discharge timing is reached in a state where the game ball B1 is not in contact with the blade member 343 or the upright wall 352, the game ball B1 is discharged at a timing slightly delayed from the discharge timing. The Rukoto.

In this case, since the rotating body 340 continues to rotate from the discharge timing to the timing when the game ball B1 is actually discharged, the course of the game ball B1 after discharge is shifted to the left. As described above, the adjustment mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35 are provided with a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 flowing down the path shifted to the left collides with the upper right side of the adjusting nail 376 provided on the upper left side of the first through gate 35 and bounces to the right, so that the first through gate It may deviate from 35.

Next, a case where the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the free end of the blade member 343 and the left side surface 352a of the upright wall 352 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50A to 50C. 50 (a) to 50 (c) are front views of the game board 320 in which the periphery of the adjusting mechanism 330 is enlarged.

When the game ball B1 enters the adjustment region 330a at a timing when the distance from the free end of the blade member 343 to the left side surface 352a of the upright wall 352 is substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball B1, as shown in FIG. 50 (a). In addition, the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the blade member 343 and the upright wall 352.

As shown in FIG. 50A, the rotating body 340 continues to rotate clockwise even when the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the blade member 343 and the upright wall 352. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), as the rotating body 340 rotates, a force is applied to the blade member 343 to rotate the blade member 343 counterclockwise. As a result, the blade member 343 rotates counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 344 and is in a displaced state.

A restoring force for returning the blade member 343 to the initial state acts on the blade member 343 in the displaced state from the urging member (not shown). However, the restoring force of the urging member acting on the blade member 343 in the displaced state is a weak force that enables the blade member 343 to return to the initial state when no external force is applied to the blade member 343. Therefore, the force with which the blade member 343 in the displaced state pushes the game ball B1 to the right in an attempt to return to the initial state is not strong enough to completely stop the movement of the game ball B1.

As the rotation of the rotating body 340 progresses, the displacement amount of the blade member 343 increases. During this time, the game ball B1 slowly falls downward due to its own weight. The falling speed of the game ball B1 in contact with the blade member 343 and the upright wall 352 is slower than the speed at which the blade member 343 advances in the rotational direction as the rotating body 340 rotates. Therefore, as the rotation of the rotating body 340 progresses, the free end of the blade member 343 is located below the game ball B1. As a result, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), the force applied from the game ball B1 to the blade member 343 is released, and the blade member 343 returns from the displacement state to the initial state. The game ball B1 is conveyed while being supported by the upper surface of the blade member 343 that has returned to the initial state, so that the game ball B1 is discharged from the adjusting mechanism 330 toward the first through gate 35 without deviating from the discharge timing of the 1 sec cycle. Is possible.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The adjustment mechanism 330 directs one game ball B1 guided to the adjustment area 330a toward the first through gate 35 at a discharge timing of 1 sec cycle regardless of the timing when the game ball B1 is guided to the adjustment area 330a. And discharge. Therefore, it is possible to execute the discharge of the game ball B1 at the discharge timing of the 1 sec cycle without adjusting the timing at which the game ball B1 enters the adjustment region 330a upstream of the adjustment region 330a. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which the timing at which the game ball B1 enters the adjustment area 330a is adjusted, the winning continuous period can be generated in the low frequency support mode while reducing the processing load of the main CPU 63.

When the game ball B1 is taken in by the adjusting mechanism 330, if the game ball B1 is sandwiched between the free end of the blade member 343 and the left side surface 352a of the upright wall 352, the rotating body 340 is deformed and the game ball B1 is sandwiched. It is a configuration that eliminates the state of being. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the adjusting mechanism 330 cannot discharge the game ball B1 due to the game ball B1 being stuck between the blade member 343 and the upright wall 352 or the rotating body 340 being unable to rotate. can do. This reduces the possibility that a problem will occur during the game and it will be necessary to take measures to interrupt the game and resolve the problem.

The deformation of the rotating body 340 performed to eliminate the state in which the game ball B1 is sandwiched is configured to be performed by the rotation of the rotating body 340. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated member in advance in order to eliminate the state in which the game ball B1 is sandwiched. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of members constituting the adjusting mechanism 330, simplify the configuration of the adjusting mechanism 330, and reduce the manufacturing cost of the adjusting mechanism 330.

The deformation of the rotating body 340 performed to eliminate the state in which the game ball B1 is sandwiched is automatically performed in the same state as the control of the rotating body 340 in the state where the game ball B1 is not sandwiched. .. Therefore, the control means of the pachinko machine 10 does not require a means for grasping that the game ball B1 is in a sandwiched state. As a result, a member constituting the adjusting mechanism 330 is compared with a configuration in which the control state of the rotating body 340 is changed to eliminate the state in which the game ball B1 is sandwiched when the game ball B1 is sandwiched. It is possible to suppress the increase in the number of adjusting mechanisms 330, simplify the configuration of the adjusting mechanism 330, and reduce the manufacturing cost of the adjusting mechanism 330.

A distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided between the adjusting mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35. Further, the game board 320 is provided with an adjusting nail 376 that prevents the game ball B1 from winning a prize in the first through gate 35 when the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 330 deviates from a predetermined course. Has been done. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which all of the game balls B1 that have entered the adjustment area 330a win the first through gate 35, and the player does not pay attention to the discharge of the game balls B1 in the adjustment mechanism 330. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by attracting the player's attention until the first through gate 35 is won.

The game board 320 has an electric nail 361 that prevents one of the game balls B1 from entering the downstream guide area 371a when two game balls B1 try to enter the downstream guide area 371a in a row. It is provided. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a plurality of game balls B1 are guided to the adjustment region 330a at one time.

The number of game balls B1 that can be launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 is one in 0.6 sec, and the number of game balls B1 that can be ejected by the adjustment mechanism 330 is one in one sec. Therefore, if the number of game balls B1 entering the adjustment area 330a continues to be larger than the number of game balls B1 moving from the adjustment area 330a to the adjustment area 330a, the game balls B1 stay in the adjustment area 330a. there is a possibility. On the other hand, by using the electric nail 361 to limit the game ball B1 that can enter the downstream guide area 371a located upstream of the adjustment area 330a, the game ball B1 stays in the adjustment area 330a. The possibility can be reduced.

The electric nail 361 has a width through which one game ball B1 can pass, and is provided upstream of the downstream guide area 371a that guides the game ball B1 to the adjustment area 330a. The electric nail 361 is configured to move between a permitted position that allows the game ball B1 to enter the downstream guide area 371a and a prohibited position that prohibits the game ball B1 from entering the downstream guide area 371a. Is. The electric nail 361 that has moved to the prohibited position is configured to move the game ball B1 that is prevented from entering the downstream guide area 371a to the right of the downstream guide area 371a. Therefore, when the electric nail 361 takes a prohibited position, it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 from staying around the electric nail 361. In this way, by appropriately dispersing the game balls B1 upstream of the adjustment area 330a, it is possible to prevent the plurality of game balls B1 from entering the adjustment area 330a in a continuous state.

<Another form in the third embodiment>
-In the third embodiment described above, the configuration that limits the number of game balls B1 that enter the downstream guide region 371a is not limited to the electric nail 361. For example, as the configuration, an adjusting rotating body having a protruding portion may be used. The protrusion of the adjusting rotating body takes a permitted position to allow the game ball B1 to enter the downstream guide area 371a according to the rotational state of the adjusting rotating body, and the protruding portion of the adjusting rotating body enters the downstream guide area 371a of the game ball B1. May take a prohibited position. Therefore, the number of game balls B1 entering the downstream guide region 371a can be limited by using the adjusting rotating body that rotates at a constant speed.

-In the third embodiment described above, the adjusting nail 376 may not exist in the middle of the path of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 330 toward the first through gate 35. The first through gate 35 is provided at a position separated from the adjusting mechanism 330 by a diameter of the game ball B1 or more. Therefore, depending on the discharge direction and the discharge speed of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 330, the discharged game ball B1 may deviate from the first through gate 35. The positional relationship between the adjusting mechanism 330 and the first through gate 35 is adjusted so that a part of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 330 is disengaged from the first through gate 35. The behavior of the game ball B1 can also attract the player's attention.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for periodically supplying the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In the present embodiment, the game board 420 is provided with an adjustment mechanism 430 for periodically supplying the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35. The configuration of the adjusting mechanism 430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. 51 is a front view of the game board 420 in which the periphery of the adjustment mechanism 430 is enlarged and shown.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the game board 420, an adjusting mechanism 430 is provided above the first through gate 35. The adjusting mechanism 430 is provided at a position separated from the first through gate 35 by a diameter of the game ball B1 or more. Specifically, the adjustment mechanism 430 is provided at a position where the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430 reaches the first through gate 35 after flowing down a distance approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball B1. ing. The detailed configuration of the adjustment mechanism 430 will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 51, the adjusting mechanism 430 includes a rotating body 440 that takes in and discharges the game ball B1 and a guide member 450 that adjusts the discharging timing at which the game ball B1 is discharged from the rotating body 440. There is. Further, as shown in FIG. 52, the adjustment mechanism 430 includes the adjustment drive unit 184 already described in the first embodiment. The adjustment drive unit 184 in the present embodiment rotates the rotating body 440 once in 6 seconds.

First, the configuration of the rotating body 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. 52 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the rotating body 440 and the adjusting drive unit 184 when the rotating body 440 is cut on a plane perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 420. As shown in FIG. 51, the rotating body 440 includes a substantially disk-shaped passage forming portion 443, and the passage forming portion 443 has three adjusting passages 444 having a passage width through which the game ball B1 can pass. ~ 446 are formed. The rotating body 440 takes in the game ball B1 into one of the adjustment passages 444 to 446, and discharges the game ball B1 from the adjustment passages 444 to 446 different from the adjustment passages 444 to 446 in which the game ball B1 is taken in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52, the rotating body 440 is a rotating base body that prevents the game balls B1 in the adjusting passages 444 to 446 from moving behind the front surface of the game board 420 behind the passage forming portion 443. It is equipped with 441. The rotation base body 441 is a substantially disk-shaped resin member having a predetermined thickness, and is integrally formed with the passage forming portion 443.

As shown in FIG. 52, the game board 420 is formed with a recessed portion 421 that accommodates the rotating base body 441 in a rotatable manner, and the rotating body 440 is accommodated by the rotating base body 441 in the recessed portion 421. It is fixed so that it can rotate in the fixed state. The passage forming portion 443 exists from the front surface of the rotation base body 441 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52.

As shown in FIG. 52, an adjustment drive unit 184 provided with an output shaft 184a is arranged behind the rotation base body 441. The rotating body 440 is connected to the output shaft 184a so that the axis of the rotating base body 441 is located on the same straight line as the output shaft 184a of the adjusting drive unit 184.

The axis of the rotation base body 441 in the rotating body 440 is orthogonal to the front surface of the game board 420, and the rotating body 440 rotates clockwise at an angular velocity of 60 ° in 1 second when the adjustment drive unit 184 is in the driving state. Rotate. The adjustment drive unit 184 in this embodiment uses the same stepping motor as the adjustment drive unit 184 in the first embodiment. The adjustment drive unit 184 has a configuration in which the output shaft 184a makes one revolution by transmitting an excitation signal for 500 pulses from the main control device 60, and an angle change based on the excitation signal of one pulse, that is, an angle change per step. Is 0.72 °.

As shown in FIG. 51, three entrances 444a to 446a are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the passage forming portion 443 as openings that are open to the outside. The three entrances 444a to 446a are formed so that the centers of the entrances 444a to 446a are evenly spaced in the circumferential direction of the passage forming portion 443. The three entrances 444a to 446a are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the passage forming portion 443 in the order of the first entrance / exit 444a → the second entrance / exit 445a → the third entrance / exit 446a.

The first doorway 444a and the second doorway 445a have a width of 14 mm, which is larger than the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball B1. On the other hand, the third entrance / exit 446a is smaller than the first entrance / exit 444a and the second entrance / exit 445a, and has a width of 11.5 mm, which is larger than the diameter of the game ball B1.

The first adjusting passage 444 is formed from the first entrance / exit 444a toward the central region of the rotating body 440, and the second adjusting passage 445 is formed from the second entrance / exit 445a toward the central region of the rotating body 440. .. Further, the third adjusting passage 446 is formed from the third entrance / exit 446a toward the central region of the rotating body 440.

The first adjusting passage 444 has a passage width of 12 mm, and the passage width gradually widens toward the first entrance / exit 444a in the vicinity of the first entrance / exit 444a. Similarly, the second adjusting passage 445 has a passage width of 12 mm, and the passage width gradually widens toward the second entrance / exit 445a in the vicinity of the second entrance / exit 445a. On the other hand, the third adjusting passage 446 has a passage width of 12 mm, and the passage width gradually narrows toward the third entrance / exit 446a in the vicinity of the third entrance / exit 446a.

If the shapes of the three entrances 444a to 446a are all the same, the movement of the game ball B1 discharged from the rotating body 440 becomes monotonous. On the other hand, by making the shape near the third entrance / exit 446a different from the shape near the first entrance / exit 444a and the second entrance / exit 445a, the player's movement with respect to the movement of the game ball B1 discharged from the rotating body 440 You can raise the degree of attention.

As shown in FIG. 51, the first adjustment passage 444, the second adjustment passage 445, and the third adjustment passage 446 formed in the passage forming portion 443 are straight passages that are open toward the front. As shown in FIG. 52, the rear side of the three adjustment passages 444 to 446 is defined by the front surface of the rotation base body 441, and the front side is defined by the back surface of the window panel 52.

As shown in FIG. 51, an intersection space 443a slightly larger than the game ball B1 is provided at the center of the passage forming portion 443. The first adjustment passage 444 is a passage connecting the first entrance / exit 444a and the intersection space 443a, and the second adjustment passage 445 is a passage connecting the second entrance / exit 445a and the intersection space 443a. Further, the third adjusting passage 446 is a passage connecting the third entrance / exit 446a and the intersection space 443a.

The game ball B1 can move from the adjustment passages 444 to 446 to the intersection space 443a, and can move from the intersection space 443a to the adjustment passages 444 to 446. Further, each of the adjusting passages 444 to 446 has a passage length capable of accommodating two game balls B1.

As shown in FIG. 51, the passage width of each of the adjustment passages 444 to 446 is constant except for the vicinity of the entrances and exits 444a to 446a. Here, the reference line passing through the center of the first adjusting passage 444 is referred to as the first center line 444b, and the reference line passing through the center of the second adjusting passage 445 is referred to as the second center line 445b. Further, the reference line passing through the center of the third adjustment passage 446 is defined as the third center line 446b.

In the first adjustment passage 444, the first central line 444b extends in a direction intersecting the inner wall of the second adjustment passage 445, and in the second adjustment passage 445, the second central line 445b is the inner wall of the third adjustment passage 446. It extends in the direction that intersects with. The third adjustment passage 446 extends in a direction in which the third central line 446b intersects the inner wall of the first adjustment passage 444.

That is, the passage wall of the second adjusting passage 445 exists at the moving destination of the game ball B1 moving along the first adjusting passage 444, and the moving destination of the game ball B1 moving along the second adjusting passage 445. Has a passage wall of the third adjustment passage 446. Further, the passage wall of the first adjustment passage 444 exists at the destination of the game ball B1 that moves along the third adjustment passage 446. Here, as shown in FIG. 51, the central lines 444b to 446b pass near the center of the passage forming portion 443.

Next, the guide member 450 provided on the game board 420 in close proximity to the rotating body 440 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. As shown in FIG. 51, the guide member 450 is provided at the lower right of the rotating body 440.

As shown in FIG. 51, the guide member 450 includes a plate-shaped guide base body 451 having a predetermined thickness. Further, the game board 420 is formed with a guide recessed portion (not shown) capable of accommodating the guide base body 451 without a gap. The guide member 450 is fixed by being nailed to the game board 420 in a state where the guide base body 451 is housed in the guide recessed portion. Then, in a state where the guide member 450 is fixed to the game board 420, the front surface of the guide base body 451 exists on the same plane as the front surface of the game board 420.

Further, the guide member 450 includes an upright wall 452 that projects vertically from the front surface of the guide base body 451 toward the front. The upright wall 452 is integrally formed with the guide base body 451 and extends to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1). As shown in FIG. 51, the upright wall 452 is formed along the outer circumference of the rotating body 440 from the right side to the lower right side of the rotating center 440a of the rotating body 440.

Therefore, the upright wall 452 is in a rotating state in which any of the entrances / exits 444a to 446a of the rotating body 440 is opened toward the right, and the entrances / exits 444a to 446a are opened diagonally downward to the right. Until this happens, the doorways 444a to 446a are closed. As a result, the game balls B1 existing at the entrances 444a to 446a are prevented from falling downward.

Next, the movement of the game ball B1 around the adjustment mechanism 430 will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the game board 420, in the vicinity of the upper side of the rotating body 440, a guide nail 472 for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down from above to any of the entrances and exits 444a to 446a of the rotating body 440. Are provided in multiple numbers.

A plurality of guide nails 472 rotate with a left guide nail row 473 that guides the game ball B1 that is above the rotating body 440 and flows down to the left of the center of the rotating body 440 toward the upper center of the rotating body 440. A right guide nail row 474 that guides the game ball B1 that is above the body 440 and flows down to the right of the center of the rotating body 440 toward the upper center of the rotating body 440 is formed.

The distance between the guide nail 472 located at the lowest position in the left guide nail row 473 and the guide nail 472 located at the lowest position in the right guide nail row 474 is one size larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, in the rotating body 440, when any of the entrances 444a to 446a is opened upward, the game ball B1 guided by the guide nail 472 enters from the entrances 444a to 446a.

As shown in FIG. 51, the distance from the guide nail 472 located at the lowermost position in the left guide nail row 473 and the right guide nail row 474 to the outer circumference of the rotating body 440 is set to be slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. ing. In a rotating state in which none of the entrances 444a to 446a of the rotating body 440 is opened upward, the game ball B1 guided to the upper part of the rotating body 440 by the guide nail 472 enters the entrances 444a to 446a. Can't.

In this case, a gap through which the game ball B1 can pass is provided between the guide nail 472 located at the lowermost position in the left guide nail row 473 and the right guide nail row 474 and the outer circumference of the rotating body 440. , The game ball B1 that has not been taken into the inside of the rotating body 440 from the entrances 444a to 446a can be released to the left and right game areas PA of the rotating body 440. Therefore, the game ball B1 that could not enter the upper part of the rotating body 440 does not stop.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the game board 420, the entrance / exit in a state where the game ball B1 flowing down from the diagonally upper left of the rotating body 440 is opened toward the upper left in the upper left side of the rotating body 440. A left guard nail 475 is provided to prevent the ball from entering from 444a to 446a, and a game ball B1 flowing down from diagonally above the right side of the rotating body 440 is on the upper right side of the rotating body 440 on the upper right side. A right guard nail 476 is provided to prevent the ball from entering from the entrances 444a to 446a that are open toward the direction.

The doorways 444a to 446a capable of taking in the game ball B1 are limited to the doorways 444a to 446a that are open upward by the left side guard nail 475 and the right side guard nail 476. As a result, it is prevented that the plurality of game balls B1 are taken into the inside of the rotating body 440 from the plurality of entrances and exits 444a to 446a at one time.

As shown in FIG. 51, a space wider than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided between the left guard nail 475 and the right guard nail 476 and the rotating body 440. Therefore, the game ball B1 which is guided to the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 430 by the left guide nail row 473 or the right guide nail row 474 and is not taken in is the space between the rotating body 440 and the left guard nail 475, or the rotating body. The space between the 440 and the right guard nail 476 can flow downstream.

As shown in FIG. 51, at the upper right of the first through gate 35 and at the lower right of the adjusting mechanism 430, game balls B1 other than the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 430 are the adjusting mechanism 430 and the first through. A guard nail 471 is provided to prevent the player from entering through the gate 35 and winning the first through gate 35.

By limiting the game ball B1 that can win the first through gate 35 to the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430, the game ball B1 becomes the first through gate 35 at a timing other than the winning target timing during the winning continuous period. It is possible to prevent winning a prize. As a result, in the public electric opening lottery executed during the winning continuous period, the general electric opening winning can be continuously generated.

On the other hand, at the upper left of the first through gate 35 and at the lower left of the adjusting mechanism 430, the game ball B1 which is discharged from the adjusting mechanism 430 toward the lower left and comes off without winning the first through gate 35 is first through. Guard nails 471 are provided at intervals to allow escape to the left of the gate 35.

The guard nail 471 prevents the game balls B1 other than the game balls B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 430 from flowing down from the upper left of the first through gate 35 and winning the first through gate 35. Further, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 430 and detached to the left from the first through gate 35 does not collide with the guard nail 471 and bounce back toward the first through gate 35 again.

Next, the movement of the game ball B1 that has entered from any of the entrances / exits 444a to 446a of the rotating body 440 in the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 430 will be described. First, the movement of the game ball B1 that has entered from the first entrance / exit 444a will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (d). 53 (a) to 53 (d) are front views of the game board 420 showing the adjustment mechanism 430 and the first through gate 35 in an enlarged manner.

FIG. 53A shows a rotational state in which the first doorway 444a is open upward. As shown in FIG. 53A, the game ball B1 is guided to the upper center of the rotating body 440 by the guide nail 472 (FIG. 51) in a rotating state in which the first entrance / exit 444a is open upward. As a result, the ball can enter the first entrance / exit 444a. The game ball B1 that has entered from the first entrance / exit 444a moves in the first adjustment passage 444.

In a state where the first entrance / exit 444a is open upward, the first adjustment passage 444 is inclined downward, and the game ball B1 is directed from the upper first entrance / exit 444a toward the lower intersection space 443a. invite. As already described in FIG. 51, the first central line 444b of the first adjusting passage 444 intersects the passage wall of the second adjusting passage 445. Therefore, the moving direction of the game ball B1 moving in the first adjusting passage 444 is the direction in which the game ball B1 comes into contact with the passage wall of the second adjusting passage 445.

FIG. 53B shows the movement of the game ball B1 after being guided to the intersection space 443a. As shown in FIG. 53B, the game ball B1 entering from the first entrance / exit 444a passes through the first adjustment passage 444 having a passage length approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1 and reaches the intersection space 443a. During this time, the rotating body 440 rotates clockwise.

Even if the rotating body 440 rotates, the positional relationship that the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445 exists on the extension line of the first adjustment passage 444 does not change. Further, as described above, the second entrance / exit 445a exists at a position where the first entrance / exit 444a is rotated by 120 ° around the center of the rotating body 440. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53B, at the timing when the game ball B1 exists in the intersection space 443a, the second adjustment passage 445 has an inclination toward the diagonally downward right side from the intersection space 443a.

As shown in FIG. 53B, after entering the intersection space 443a from the first adjustment passage 444, the game ball B1 in contact with the passage wall of the second adjustment passage 445 is guided by the second adjustment passage 445 to the second. Head toward the doorway 445a.

FIG. 53 (c) shows the game ball B1 that has reached the second entrance / exit 445a. As shown in FIG. 53 (c), at the timing when the game ball B1 is guided to the second entrance / exit 445a by the second adjustment passage 445, at least a part of the second entrance / exit 445a is blocked by the upright wall 452. At this timing, there is no gap through which the game ball B1 can pass in the second entrance / exit 445a.

Therefore, the game ball B1 moves in the rotation direction with the rotation of the rotating body 440 and waits until a passable gap is formed in the second entrance / exit 445a. As described above, the rotation speed of the rotating body 440 is constant. Moreover, the position of the upright wall 452 does not change. Therefore, in a state where the game ball B1 is waiting at the second entrance / exit 445a, a timing at which a gap through which the game ball B1 can pass is formed at the second entrance / exit 445a also periodically occurs.

As shown in FIGS. 53A and 53B, the second entrance / exit 445a is already blocked by the upright wall 452 in a state where the first entrance / exit 444a is opened upward. The upright wall 452 closes at least a part of the doorways 444a to 446a in a state where the doorways 444a to 446a are open to the right, and prevents the game ball B1 from being discharged to the right. Therefore, the game ball B1 taken into the rotating body 440 is not discharged from above the standing wall 452.

FIG. 53D shows the movement of the game ball B1 after a gap through which the game ball B1 can pass is formed at the second entrance / exit 445a. As shown in FIG. 53 (d), when there is a gap in the second entrance / exit 445a through which the game ball B1 can pass, the game ball B1 loses its support and falls downward due to its own weight.

The discharge timing at which the game ball B1 can pass through the second entrance / exit 445a and the discharge position at the discharge timing are constant. The adjusting mechanism 430 is set so that the discharge position is directly above the first through gate 35. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (d), the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge position at the discharge timing from the second entrance / exit 445a falls downward and wins the first through gate 35.

However, at the discharge timing, the distance from the second entrance / exit 445a to the first through gate 35 is set to be longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. Therefore, the game ball B1 discharged from the second entrance / exit 445a has a high probability of winning the first through gate 35, but the winning probability is not 100%.

Next, the movement of the game ball B1 that has entered from the third entrance / exit 446a will be described. In a state where the third entrance / exit 446a is opened upward, the game ball B1 guided to the upper center of the rotating body 440 by the guide nail 472 (FIG. 51) moves from the third entrance / exit 446a to the third adjustment passage 446. Enter the ball.

The inclination of the third adjusting passage 446 in the state where the third entrance / exit 446a is opened upward is the same as the inclination of the first adjusting passage 444 already described with reference to FIG. 53 (a). Therefore, the passage wall of the first adjusting passage 444 exists ahead of the moving direction of the game ball B1 moving in the third adjusting passage 446.

The positional relationship between the third adjusting passage 446 and the first adjusting passage 444 is the same as the positional relationship between the first adjusting passage 444 and the second adjusting passage 445, which has already been described with reference to FIG. 53 (b). Therefore, the game ball B1 that has passed through the third adjusting passage 446 and entered the intersection space 443a comes into contact with the passage wall of the first adjusting passage 444 and is guided toward the first entrance / exit 444a.

As described above, the shape of the first entrance / exit 444a is the same as the shape of the second entrance / exit 445a. Therefore, the discharge timing and the discharge position of the game ball B1 discharged from the first doorway 444a are the discharge timing and the discharge position of the game ball B1 discharged from the second doorway 445a already described with reference to FIG. 53 (d). Same as the position. The game ball B1 discharged from the first entrance / exit 444a has a high probability of winning the first through gate 35.

Next, the movement of the game ball B1 that has entered from the second entrance / exit 445a will be described. In a state where the second entrance / exit 445a is opened upward, the game ball B1 guided to the upper center of the rotating body 440 by the guide nail 472 (FIG. 51) moves from the second entrance / exit 445a to the second adjustment passage 445. Enter the ball.

The inclination of the second adjusting passage 445 in the state where the second entrance / exit 445a is opened upward is the same as the inclination of the first adjusting passage 444 already described with reference to FIG. 53 (a). Further, the positional relationship between the second adjusting passage 445 and the third adjusting passage 446 is the same as the positional relationship between the first adjusting passage 444 and the second adjusting passage 445, which has already been described with reference to FIG. 53 (b). .. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has passed through the second adjusting passage 445 and entered the intersection space 443a comes into contact with the passage wall of the third adjusting passage 446 and is guided toward the third entrance / exit 446a.

Here, the movement of the game ball B1 discharged from the third entrance / exit 446a will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b). 54 (a) and 54 (b) are front views of the game board 420 showing the adjustment mechanism 430 and the first through gate 35 in an enlarged manner.

FIG. 54A shows the game ball B1 that has reached the third entrance / exit 446a. As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the game ball B1 is guided to the third entrance / exit 446a by the third adjusting passage 446. At the timing when the game ball B1 reaches the third entrance / exit 446a, at least a part of the third entrance / exit 446a is blocked by the upright wall 452. There is no gap through which the game ball B1 can pass at the third entrance / exit 446a. Therefore, the game ball B1 waits at the third entrance / exit 446a until a gap through which the game ball B1 can pass is created.

FIG. 54B shows the movement of the game ball B1 discharged from the third entrance / exit 446a. As described above, the third entrance / exit 446a is formed to be narrower than the first entrance / exit 444a and the second entrance / exit 445a. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is discharged from the third entrance / exit 446a, the game ball B1 is easily affected by the passage wall existing on the rear side in the rotation direction in the third adjustment passage 446.

As described above, there is a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 between the discharge position of the game ball B1 in the adjusting mechanism 430 and the first through gate 35. As shown in FIG. 54 (b), at the discharge timing of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 is pushed to the left from the passage wall of the third adjusting passage 446, so that the course of the game ball B1 after discharge is changed. It may shift to the left and come off from the first through gate 35. Therefore, the winning probability of the game ball B1 entering from the second entrance / exit 445a and discharged from the third entrance / exit 446a to the first through gate 35 is such that the ball enters from the first entrance / exit 444a and is discharged from the second entrance / exit 445a. It is lower than the winning probability of the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 and the winning probability of the game ball B1 entering from the third entrance / exit 446a and discharged from the first entrance / exit 444a. ..

Here, when the game balls B1 flow down in a continuous state, the same entrance / exit 444a to 446a in which both the first game ball B1 and the second game ball B1 are facing upward. There is a possibility of entering the ball. In this case, the two game balls B1 are guided to the same entrance / exit 444a to 446a and discharged from the same entrance / exit 444a to 446a. The timing and direction in which the first game ball B1 is discharged are as described above in FIGS. 53 (d) and 54 (b), and are discharged from the first doorway 444a or the second doorway 445a. The game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 with a high probability, and the game ball B1 discharged from the third entrance / exit 446a has a high probability of coming off the first through gate 35.

On the other hand, the second game ball B1 is located inside the rotating body 440 with respect to the first game ball B1 at the timing when the first game ball B1 is discharged. Therefore, the discharge timing of the second game ball B1 is later than the discharge timing of the first game ball B1. In this case, the second game ball B1 is discharged in a state where the rotation of the rotating body 440 advances from the discharge timing of the first game ball B1 and the discharge direction moves to the left. .. Therefore, regardless of the outlets 444a to 446a of the discharge source, the second game ball B1 has a high probability of coming off to the left of the first through gate 35.

In this way, even if the two game balls B1 flow down in a state where the game area PAs are connected, there is a possibility that the game balls B1 will win the first through gate 35 at a timing other than the winning target period in the winning continuous period. It is set to be low. Therefore, even when the adjustment mechanism 430 of the present embodiment is used, when the winning continuous period is reached, the public electric open winning is continuously generated.

The adjustment drive unit 184 rotates the rotating body 440 so that the timing at which the game ball B1 can be discharged in the rotating body 440 occurs once every 2 seconds. By configuring the adjustment drive unit 184 to slowly rotate the rotating body 440, the game ball B1 that collides with the doorways 444a to 446a moving in the rotational direction is strongly directed to the right at the upper part of the adjustment mechanism 430. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is bounced back and gives a sense of discomfort to the player.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The game ball B1 is taken into one of the adjustment passages 444 to 446, and is discharged from the entrances 444a to 446a different from the adjustment passages 444 to 446 in which the game ball B1 is taken in. In a configuration in which the rotating body 440 rotates while the game ball B1 is held by the doorways 444a to 446a that take in the game ball B1, in order to prevent the game ball B1 from falling from the doorways 444a to 446a during rotation. A fall prevention means provided around the rotating body 440 is required. In this case, the game ball B1 may be sandwiched between the rotating body 440 and the fall prevention means, and the rotation of the rotating body 440 may be hindered.

On the other hand, the game ball B1 passes through the inside of the passage forming portion 443 and is discharged from the entrances 444a to 446a different from the entrances 444a to 446a taken in, so that a problem occurs during the game and the game is played. It is possible to reduce the possibility that it is necessary to take measures to solve the problem by interrupting. Further, by suppressing the increase in the number of members constituting the adjusting mechanism 430, the configuration of the adjusting mechanism 430 can be simplified and the manufacturing cost of the adjusting mechanism 430 can be reduced.

The rotating body 440 has a configuration in which the game ball B1 is discharged before the entrances and exits 444a to 446a, which have taken in the game ball B1 upward, are oriented so that the game ball B1 can be discharged. Therefore, the time required from the uptake to the discharge of the game ball B1 is shortened as compared with the configuration in which the rotating body 440 rotates while the game ball B1 is held at the entrances 444a to 446a in which the game ball B1 is taken in. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player's interest shifts to another place between the time when the game ball B1 is taken in and the time when the game ball B1 is discharged, and the degree of attention of the player's adjustment mechanism 430 is lowered.

The adjusting mechanism 430 includes an upright wall 452 that prevents the game ball B1 from falling downward until the game ball B1 guided to the entrances 444a to 446a reaches the discharge timing at which the first through gate 35 can win a prize. .. By using the upright wall 452, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls B1 that are discharged downward and deviate from the first through gate 35 at a timing earlier than the discharge timing. Therefore, in the winning continuous period, the possibility that the game ball B1 deviates from the winning target period and wins the first through gate 35 is reduced, and the probability of being an open winning when a winning occurs in the winning continuous period is increased. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the winning continuous period and improve the interest of the game.

Since the distance between the discharge position of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 430 and the first through gate 35 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1, it depends on the discharge direction and discharge speed of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 430. , The discharged game ball B1 is configured to be detached from the first through gate 35. The width of the third entrance / exit 446a is set to be narrower than the width of the first entrance / exit 444a and the width of the second entrance / exit 445a. Therefore, the possibility that the game ball B1 discharged from the third entrance / exit 446a may come off from the first through gate 35 is the possibility that the game ball B1 discharged from the second entrance / exit 445a may come off from the first through gate 35, and the first There is a higher possibility that the game ball B1 from which the game ball B1 taken in from the entrance / exit 446a is discharged will come off from the first through gate 35. As a result, all of the game balls B1 taken into the adjustment mechanism 430 win the first through gate 35, and the player avoids the situation where the player pays attention only to the take-in of the game ball B1 to the adjustment mechanism 430 and does not pay attention to the discharge. be able to. Then, by attracting the player's attention until the moment when the first through gate 35 is won, the interest of the game can be improved.

The game ball B1 taken into the first adjustment passage 444 from the first entrance / exit 444a is guided by the second adjustment passage 445 and discharged from the second entrance / exit 445a, and is discharged from the second entrance / exit 445a to the second adjustment passage 445a. The game ball B1 taken in is guided by the third adjusting passage 446 and discharged from the third entrance / exit 446a. Further, the game ball B1 taken into the third adjustment passage 446 from the third entrance / exit 446a is guided by the first adjustment passage 444 and discharged from the first entrance / exit 444a. As described above, since the game balls B1 taken in from the entrances 444a to 446a move in the adjustment passages 444 to 446 of the combination capable of discharging the game balls B1 in the shortest distance, the rotating body 440 is rotated. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the captured game ball B1 is not easily discharged and repeats ascending and descending in the adjustment passages 444 to 446. This prevents the number of game balls B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 430 toward the first through gate 35 from decreasing, and prevents the player from losing interest in the adjusting mechanism 430.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for periodically supplying the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

The game board 520 of the present embodiment is provided with an adjusting device 540 for adjusting the timing at which the game ball B1 is supplied to the first through gate 35. The configuration of the adjusting device 540 and the periphery of the adjusting device 540 will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a front view of the game board 520 in which the periphery of the first through gate 35 and the adjusting device 540 is enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the game board 520, above the first through gate 35, the adjusting device 540 and a part of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting device 540 and heading toward the first through gate 35 are first. An adjustment mechanism 530 including an electric nail 560 for preventing the through gate 35 from winning a prize is provided. Here, the electric nail 560 is the same member as the electric nail 361 already described in FIG. 47 of the third embodiment.

First, the adjusting device 540 will be described with reference to FIG. 55. As shown in FIG. 55, when the adjusting device 540 is in the open state, the game ball B1 is allowed to enter the adjusting device 540, and when the adjusting device 540 is closed, the game ball B1 is entered into the adjusting device 540. The adjustment unit 546 that prohibits the above, the adjustment drive unit 547 that executes the transition from the closed state to the open state, and the transition from the open state to the closed state in the adjustment unit 546, and the game ball B1 incorporated in the adjustment device 540. Is provided with a guide member 541 for guiding the vehicle toward the first through gate 35.

As shown in FIG. 55, the adjusting device 540 includes a plate-shaped base body 542 having a predetermined thickness. Further, the game board 520 is provided with a base recessed portion (not shown) capable of accommodating the base body 542 without a gap. The adjusting device 540 is fixed by being nailed to the game board 520 in a state where the base body 542 is housed in the recessed portion for the base. In a state where the guide member 541 is fixed to the game board 520, the front surface of the base body 542 exists in the same plane as the front surface of the game board 520.

As shown in FIG. 55, the guide member 541 includes a passage forming portion 543 formed so as to project vertically from the front surface of the base body 542 toward the front. The passage forming portion 543 exists from the central portion to the lower portion in the vertical direction of the front surface of the base body 542, and also exists from the front surface of the base body 542 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1). There is. A guide passage 545 for guiding the game ball B1 toward the first through gate 35 is formed in the passage forming portion 543.

The guide passage 545 is formed by providing a through hole that penetrates the passage forming portion 543 in the vertical direction with respect to the passage forming portion 543, and enables one game ball B1 to pass through. , Has a passage cross section that makes it impossible for a plurality of game balls B1 to pass at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 55, the guide passage 545 is a straight passage toward the first through gate 35. The guide passage 545 has a passage length approximately 1.2 times the diameter of the game ball B1, and it is possible to direct the discharged game ball B1. The distance from the lower end of the guide passage 525 to the upper end of the first through gate 35 is set to be approximately twice the diameter of the game ball B1, and the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 545 is located at the position of the electric nail 560. Depending on the situation, the first through gate 35 may or may not be won.

As shown in FIG. 55, the adjusting portion 546 is an upper portion of the base body 542 and is provided in front of the front surface of the base body 542. Further, the adjustment drive unit 547 is arranged behind the adjustment unit 546 and behind the base body 542. The adjustment unit 546 is connected to an adjustment drive unit 547 mounted on the back side of the game board 520, and is driven by the adjustment drive unit 547 to take either a closed state or an open state. When the adjusting unit 546 is closed, the game ball B1 cannot enter the guide passage 545, and when the adjusting unit 546 is opened, it is possible to enter the guide passage 545.

The adjustment drive unit 547 is connected to the output port of the MPU 62 (FIG. 12), and the drive signal output from the MPU 62 is input to the adjustment drive unit 547. The adjustment drive unit 547 keeps the adjustment unit 546 in the closed state when the drive signal is in the LOW state, and opens the adjustment unit 546 when the drive signal is in the HI state.

The main CPU 63 (FIG. 12) informs the adjustment drive unit 547 on the condition that it is the switching timing for shifting the adjustment unit 546 from the closed state to the open state in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) executed in a cycle of 4 msec. The drive signal output to the adjustment drive unit 547 is HI, provided that the output drive signal is raised from the LOW state to the HI state and the adjustment unit 546 is changed from the open state to the closed state. It goes down from the state to the LOW state.

Based on the drive signal input from the main CPU 63, the adjustment drive unit 547 repeats the opening / closing operation of the adjustment unit 546 that closes the adjustment unit 546 for 0.95 sec and opens it for 0.05 sec. Therefore, the guide passage 545 is in a state where the game ball B1 can be taken in at a cycle of 1 sec, and the game ball B1 can be discharged toward the first through gate 35 at a cycle of about 1 sec.

Here, the closed state and the open state of the adjusting unit 546 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56A and 56B. FIG. 56A is a front view of the adjusting device 540 in the closed state, and FIG. 56B is a front view of the adjusting device 540 in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 56A, the adjusting unit 546 is located on the upper left of the guide passage 545 in the base body 542, and is attached to the left side rotating shaft 548 extending in the front-rear direction and the left side rotating shaft 548. It includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped left side adjusting member 549, which is fixed in a rotatable manner. The left side adjusting member 549 exists from the front surface of the game board 520 (FIG. 55) to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52 (FIG. 1).

As shown in FIG. 56A, the left side adjusting member 549 includes a right side surface 549a located inside the adjusting portion 546 in the closed state and a left side surface 549b located outside. In the closed adjustment unit 546, the right side surface 549a and the left side surface 549b are inclined to the left toward the bottom.

As shown in FIG. 56B, the left side adjusting member 549 rotates counterclockwise around the left side rotating shaft 548 when the adjusting portion 546 shifts from the closed state to the open state. Then, in the open state of the adjusting portion 546, the left side adjusting member 549 is in a state in which the right side surface 549a is inclined downward toward the right and the left side surface 549b is inclined downward toward the right. It will be in the state of being.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56A, the adjusting portion 546 is located at the upper right of the guide passage 545 in the base body 542, and has a right-hand rotation shaft 551 extending in the front-rear direction and the right-side rotation shaft. It includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped right side adjusting member 552 fixed to 551 in a rotatable manner. The right side adjusting member 552 exists from the front surface of the game board 520 to the vicinity of the back surface of the window panel 52.

As shown in FIG. 56A, the right side adjusting member 552 includes a left side surface 552a located inside the adjusting portion 546 in the closed state and a right side surface 552b located outside. In the closed adjustment unit 546, the left side surface 552a and the right side surface 552b are inclined downward to the right.

As shown in FIG. 56B, the right side adjusting member 552 rotates clockwise around the right side rotating shaft 551 when the adjusting portion 546 shifts from the closed state to the open state. Then, in the open state of the adjusting portion 546, the right side adjusting member 552 is in a state in which the left side surface 552a is inclined downward toward the left and the right side surface 552b is inclined downward toward the left. It will be in the state of being.

As shown in FIG. 56 (a), in the closed adjustment unit 546, the game ball B1 cannot fit in the gap between the upper end of the left side adjustment member 549 and the upper end of the right side adjustment member 552. It is narrow to the extent. Then, as described above, in the closed state of the adjusting portion 546, the left side surface 549b of the left side adjusting member 549 is inclined downward toward the left side, and the game ball B1 in contact with the left side surface 549b is moved downward to the left. Let go. Further, the right side surface 552b of the right side adjusting member 552 is inclined downward toward the right side, and the game ball B1 in contact with the right side surface 552b is released to the lower right side.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 56B, in the adjustment unit 546 in the open state, the diameter between the right side surface 549a of the left side adjustment member 549 and the left side surface 552a of the right side adjustment member 552 is larger than the diameter of the game ball B1. A large space is spreading. Then, as described above, in the open state of the adjusting portion 546, the right side surface 549a of the left side adjusting member 549 is inclined downward toward the right, and the game ball B1 in contact with the right side surface 549a is moved downward to the right. It bounces back and enters the guide passage 545. Further, the left side surface 552a of the right side adjusting member 552 is inclined downward toward the left side, and the game ball B1 in contact with the left side surface 552a is bounced downward to the left and entered into the guide passage 545.

Further, in the process of shifting the adjusting unit 546 from the open state to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the left side adjusting member 549 and the upper end of the right side adjusting member 552 gradually becomes narrower. In the adjusting unit 546, the right side surface 549a of the left side adjusting member 549 is directed downward to the left before the distance between the upper end of the left side adjusting member 549 and the upper end of the right side adjusting member 552 becomes narrower than the diameter of the game ball B1. It has a shape in which the left side surface 552a of the right side adjusting member 552 is inclined downward and to the right while being inclined toward the right side.

As shown in FIG. 55, the electric nail 560 is connected to the nail drive unit 560a, comes into contact with the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525, changes the course of the game ball B1, and the game ball B1 changes its course. A prohibited position that prevents the first through gate 35 from winning a prize, and a permitted position that allows the game ball B1 to win a prize in the first through gate 35 by deviating from the path of the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525. And take.

A nail drive signal output from the output port of the MPU 62 is input to the nail drive unit 560a. The nail drive unit 560a keeps the electric nail 560 in the prohibited position when the nail drive signal is in the LOW state, and moves the electric nail 560 to the permitted position when the nail drive signal is in the HI state. The switching between the prohibited position and the permitted position of the electric nail 560 in the nail drive unit 560a is performed in conjunction with the switching between the closed state and the open state of the adjustment unit 546 in the adjustment drive unit 547.

Specifically, in the main CPU 63, the start-up of the nail drive signal from the LOW state to the HI state is performed in synchronization with the start-up of the drive signal from the LOW state to the HI state. Therefore, the electric nail 560 moves from the prohibited position to the permitted position in synchronization with the timing when the adjusting unit 546 shifts from the closed state to the open state. The electric nail 560 always takes a permitted position during the period when the adjusting unit 546 is in the open state. Therefore, during the period when the adjusting unit 546 is in the open state, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting device 540 is in a state where the first through gate 35 can win a prize.

In the main CPU 63, the lowering of the nail drive signal from the HI state to the LOW state is executed at a timing after the timing at which the lowering of the drive signal from the HI state to the LOW state is executed. Therefore, the electric nail 560 returns from the permitted position to the prohibited position slightly later than the timing when the adjusting unit 546 returns from the open state to the closed state. The timing at which the electric nail 560 returns to the prohibited position is permitted by the game ball B1 that has entered the guide passage 525 within 0.04 sec from the start timing of the open state in the open state of the adjusting unit 546 that continues for 0.05 sec. It is a timing that enables the first through gate 35 to win a prize by passing to the left of the electric nail 560 at the position.

Further, the timing at which the electric nail 560 returns to the prohibited position is such that the adjusting unit 546 in the open state is temporarily sandwiched between the adjusting units 546 and then taken into the guide passage 525. This is the timing to prevent the game ball B1 from winning the first through gate 35.

Here, a situation in which the winning of the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting device 540 to the first through gate 35 is blocked by the electric nail 560 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 (a) to 57 (d). 57 (a) to 57 (d) are front views of the game board 520 in which the periphery of the adjustment mechanism 530 is enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 57 (a), when the game ball B1 enters the adjusting unit 546 in the intermediate state of transition from the open state to the closed state, the game ball B1 is the right side surface 549a and the right side adjusting member of the left side adjusting member 549. There is a possibility that it will be sandwiched between the left side surface 552a of 552. In this state, the condition is that the right side surface 549a of the left side adjusting member 549 is inclined downward to the left and the left side surface 552a of the right side adjusting member 552 is inclined downward to the right. When the condition that the contact position with the adjusting unit 546 is above the center of gravity of the game ball B1 is satisfied, the sandwiched game ball B1 is moved downward by the force that the adjusting unit 546 tries to return to the closed state. It is pushed and enters the guide passage 525.

As shown in FIG. 57B, the electric nail 560 returns to the prohibited position before the game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 passes the position of the electric nail 560. Therefore, in the intermediate state, the game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 collides with the electric nail 560 returning to the prohibited position downstream of the guide passage 525 and comes off to the left of the first through gate 35.

As already described in the first embodiment, the firing interval of the game ball B1 in the game ball launch mechanism 27 (FIG. 2) is 0.6 sec at the shortest. The game ball B1 may flow down toward the adjusting unit 546 of the adjusting device 540 in a state where a plurality of the game balls B1 are connected in a row. As described above, the duration of the open state of the adjusting unit 546 is set to 0.05 sec. Therefore, when two game balls B1 are connected to enter the adjustment unit 546 during 0.05 sec, the first game ball B1 is the adjustment unit 546 as shown in FIG. 57 (c). After entering the guide passage 525 in the open state of the above, there is a possibility that the second game ball B1 is sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 that are about to return from the open state to the closed state.

In this case, when the second game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 enters the guide passage 525, the electric nail 560 causes the first game ball B1 to reach the position of the electric nail 560. It is in the permitted position at the timing. Therefore, the first game ball B1 can pass to the left of the electric nail 560 and win the first through gate 35.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57 (d), the electric nail 560 returns to the prohibited position before the second game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 reaches the position of the electric nail 560. Therefore, the second game ball B1 collides with the electric nail 560. In this way, the winning of the game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 to the first through gate 35 is blocked by the electric nail 560. As a result, in the winning continuous period, a prize is generated in the first through gate 35 of the second game ball B1 at a timing deviated from the winning target period, and it is avoided that the result is lost in the public electric open lottery. Can be done.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The adjustment mechanism 530 has a configuration that does not allow the game ball B1 to enter the guide passage 525 in the closed state of the adjustment unit 546. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 at the timing when the winning is not won. As a result, it is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of the public electric open winning in the winning continuous period. In this way, by raising the expectations of the player for the winning continuous period, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The guide passage 525 and the first through gate 35 are separated by the diameter of the game ball B1 or more, and the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525 flows down toward the first through gate 35 in the middle of the path. An electric nail 560 that moves between a prohibited position that blocks the path and a permitted position that allows the path to pass is provided, and the electric nail 560 is at the end of the period in which the adjustment unit 546 is kept open. It is configured to prevent the game ball B1 entering the guide passage 525 from winning the first through gate 35.

When all of the game balls B1 taken into the guide passage 525 win the first through gate 35, there is a possibility that the player pays attention only to the take-in of the game ball B1 in the adjustment mechanism 530 and does not pay attention to the discharge. On the other hand, by making the configuration in which a part of the game ball B1 taken into the guide passage 525 is prevented from winning the first through gate 35, the player adjusts until the moment when the first through gate 35 is won. It is possible to maintain interest in the area around the mechanism 530 and improve the interest of the game.

In the adjustment mechanism 530, after the first game ball B1 is taken into the guide passage 525 in the open state of the adjustment unit 546, the second game ball B1 connected to the first game ball B1 When the player is sandwiched between the adjusting units 546 in the intermediate state, the electric nail 560 at the prohibited position prevents the second game ball B1 from winning the first through gate 35. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 at the timing when the winning is not won. As a result, it is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of the public electric open winning in the winning continuous period. In this way, by raising the expectations of the player for the winning continuous period, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Another form in the fifth embodiment>
-In the fifth embodiment described above, the adjustment drive unit 547 may not be provided, and the adjustment unit 546 may remain open and do not move. In this case, since the adjusting unit 546 does not take the closed state, the game ball B1 can always enter the guide passage 525. When the electric nail 560 is in the prohibited position, the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525 collides with the electric nail 560, and therefore deviates from the path toward the first through gate 35. On the other hand, when the electric nail 560 is in the permitted position, it is possible to pass the left side of the electric nail 560 and win a prize in the first through gate 35. For example, the adjusting mechanism 530 is configured to repeat the prohibited position for 0.95 sec and the permitted position for 0.05 sec by the driving unit 560a for nail, so that the adjusting mechanism 530 refers to the first through gate 35. It is possible to provide the game ball B1 in a cycle of 1 sec.

-In the fifth embodiment described above, an escape passage may be formed behind the game board 520, and the game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 may be released to the rear of the game board 520. Specifically, in the game board 520, the passage entrance is formed as an opening facing forward in the region located behind the adjusting portion 546. The game board 520 includes an escape passage that guides the game ball B1 taken in from the passage entrance downward, and a passage exit that discharges the game ball B1 guided by the escape passage to the front of the game board 520.

When the adjusting unit 546 sandwiches the game ball B1, the right side surface of the left side adjusting member 549 is inclined to the left toward the rear, and the left side surface of the right side adjusting member 552 is directed to the right toward the rear. It will be in a state of being inclined toward the direction. Therefore, the game ball B1 sandwiched between the adjusting portions 546 is guided to the passage entrance formed behind the adjusting portion 546 as the adjusting portion 546 shifts to the closed state. The game ball B1 that has entered the escape passage from the passage entrance is guided downward by the escape passage. The game ball B1 is discharged from the passage exit, and is in a state of being positioned in front of the game board 520 again.

-In the fifth embodiment described above, by adjusting the relationship between the guide passage 525 and the first through gate 35, the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525 wins the first through gate 35 and wins a prize. It may be configured to cause a case where it does not occur. Specifically, the guide passage 525 is provided diagonally upward to the left of the first through gate 35, and a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 is provided between the guide passage 525 and the first through gate 35. ing. In this case, even if the electric nail 560 does not exist between the guide passage 525 and the first through gate 35, the discharged game is performed according to the speed at which the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525 is discharged. A case where the ball B1 wins the first through gate 35 and a case where the ball B1 does not win the prize can occur. By leaving the possibility that the game ball B1 discharged from the guide passage 525 deviates from the first through gate 35, the behavior of the game ball B1 after discharge can also attract the player's attention.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the second operating port 582 is provided in the right side area PA3 of the game area PA, and the distribution winning device 583 is provided below the second operating port 582. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 580 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a front view of the game board 580. As shown in FIG. 58, the game area PA includes an upper area PA1 located above the variable display unit 36, a left area PA2 located on the left side of the variable display unit 36, and a right area PA3 located on the right side of the variable display unit 36. , And a lower region PA4 located below the variable display unit 36.

As described in the first embodiment, the left side region PA2 is provided with the first through gate 35, and the adjusting mechanism 180 is provided above the first through gate 35. The winning timing at which the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 180 can win the first through gate 35 occurs in a cycle of 1 sec. In addition, in the public electric opening lottery held with the winning of the first through gate 35 as a trigger, the winning target period in which the general electric opening is won also occurs in a cycle of 1 sec. Therefore, if the winning timing overlaps with the winning period, the winning continuous period is set, and if the winning timing does not overlap with the winning period, the non-winning continuous period is set.

As shown in FIG. 58, the game board 580 is provided with a passage entrance 171, an escape passage 172, a passage exit 173, and an exit roof 174 around the adjusting mechanism 180, similarly to the game board 24 in the first embodiment. ing. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has flowed down toward the adjusting mechanism 180 but has not been taken into the adjusting mechanism 180 enters the escape passage 172 from the passage entrance 171. Then, the game ball B1 is guided to the passage exit 173 by the escape passage 172, and is discharged from the passage exit 173 toward the front of the game board 580.

As shown in FIG. 58, the lower region PA4 is provided with a first operating port 581. The first operating port 581 is not provided with a member for opening and closing the first operating port 581, and is opened upward. As shown in FIG. 58, the variable display unit 36 includes a stage 36a through which the game ball B1 can pass and the game ball B1 can be discharged. The variable display unit 36 is formed with a guide passage for allowing the game ball B1 to flow into the stage 36a. The game ball B1 that flows into the stage 36a and is discharged from the center of the stage 36a to the outside of the variable display unit 36 falls from directly above the first operating port 581 toward the first operating port 581. Therefore, the game ball B1 discharged from the center of the stage 36a is likely to win a prize in the first operating port 581.

When the launch operation device 28 (FIG. 2) is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left side region PA2 by providing the first operating port 581 in the lower region PA4, and the right side region PA3. In any case where the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down, it is possible to win a prize in the first operating port 581 of the game ball B1. However, since the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 36a is provided for the left side region PA2 and not for the right side region PA3, the person who flows down the left side region PA2 flows down the right side region PA3. The first operating port 581 is more likely to win a prize than the above. Further, as for the arrangement of the game parts and the nails 24b in the left side region PA2 and the right side region PA3, the first operating port 581 is more likely to win a prize when the left side region PA2 is flowed down than when the right side region PA3 is flowed down. Is set to. Then, the game ball B1 that has flowed down the right side region PA3 is designed so that a prize is hardly generated in the first operating port 581.

As shown in FIG. 58, the right side region PA3 is provided with a second operating port 582. When the launch operation device 28 (FIG. 2) is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left side area PA2, the second operating port 582 cannot win a prize, and the game ball B1 flows down the right side area PA3. It is provided so that a prize can be won when the launch operation device 28 is operated.

The configuration of the second operating port 582 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. 59 (a) and 59 (b) are schematic views showing the configuration of the second operating port 582. The second operating port 582 is provided with a general electric accessory 582a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The general electric accessory 582a is connected to a general electric drive unit 582b mounted on the back side of the game board 580, and is driven by the general electric drive unit 582b to be driven by the general electric drive unit 582b in the closed state shown in FIG. 59 (a). And it is arranged in any of the open states shown in FIG. 59 (b). In the closed state of the general electric accessory 582a, the game ball B1 cannot win a prize in the second operating port 582, and when the general electric accessory 582a is in the open state, a prize can be won in the second operating port 582. By the way, when it is in the open state, the general electric accessory 582a protrudes toward the game area PA side and guides the winning of the second operating port 582. The second operating port 582 is provided with a detection sensor 582c for detecting the game ball B1 that has won a prize in the second operating port 582. The detection sensor 582c is connected to the input port of the MPU 62 (FIG. 12), and the main CPU 63 (FIG. 12) detects the winning of the second operating port 582 based on the detection information from the detection sensor 582c. ..

As shown in FIG. 58, a second through gate 39 is provided above the second operating port 582 in the right region PA3. The second through gate 39 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 (FIG. 2) is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left side area PA2, and the game ball B1 flows down the right side area PA3. It is provided at a position where a prize can be won when the launch operation device 28 is operated. The second through gate 39 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball B1 that has won the second through gate 39 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball B1 that has won the second through gate 39 can win the second operating port 582. The second through gate 39 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting the game ball B1 that has won the second through gate 39. The detection sensor is connected to the input port of the MPU 62 (FIG. 12), and the main CPU 63 (FIG. 12) detects the winning of the second through gate 39 based on the detection information from the detection sensor.

As already described in the first embodiment, the public electric open lottery is executed when any of the first through gate 35 and the second through gate 39 of the game ball B1 is won. Then, when the general electric power opening lottery is won, the general electric power accessory 582a of the second operating port 582 is switched from the closed state to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 58, a first special figure display unit 584 and a second special figure display unit 585 are provided at the lower right of the game board 580. In the first special figure display unit 584, a winning lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating port 581 as a trigger, so that the pattern is displayed in a variable manner or a predetermined display, and the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Will be. In addition, in the second special figure display unit 585, a winning lottery is performed with the winning of the second operating port 582 as an opportunity to display a variable pattern or a predetermined display, and display the result corresponding to the lottery result. Is done.

As shown in FIG. 58, a first special figure holding display unit 586 is provided at a position adjacent to the first special figure display unit 584, and a second special figure display unit 585 is provided at a position adjacent to the second special figure display unit 585. A special figure holding display unit 587 is provided. The first special figure hold display unit 586 holds and displays up to four game balls B1 that have won the first operation port 581, and the second special figure hold display unit 587 displays the number of game balls B1 on the second operation port 582. The maximum number of winning game balls B1 is displayed on hold.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the lower region PA4, the special electric winning device 32 already described in the first embodiment is provided at a position below the first operating port 581 and above the out port 24a. Has been done. In the special electric winning device 32, the launch operation device 28 is operated when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left side region PA2, and the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the right side region PA3. Winning is possible in any case.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the right region PA3, a distribution winning device 583 is provided below the second operating port 582. When the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left area PA2, the distribution winning device 583 cannot win a prize, and the launch operation device so that the game ball B1 flows down the right area PA3. If 28 is operated, a prize can be won.

A winning lottery is executed with a prize in either the first operating port 581 or the second operating port 582. When a big hit result is obtained in the winning lottery, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode already described in the first embodiment. As a result, the special electric winning device 32 is opened, and the special electric winning device 32 of the game ball B1 can be won. Further, in the winning lottery executed when the second operating port 582 is won, a small winning result is provided in addition to the big winning result. When a small win result is obtained in the winning lottery executed with the winning of the second operating port 582 as a trigger, the mode shifts to the branch execution mode in which the winning of the distribution winning device 583 is possible.

Here, the distribution winning device 583 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b). FIG. 60A is a vertical cross-sectional view of the distribution winning device 583 as viewed from the side, and FIG. 60B is a vertical cross-sectional view of the sorting winning device 583 as viewed from the back side.

As shown in FIG. 60A, the distribution winning device 583 is formed with a distribution entrance 591 having a size that allows the game ball B1 to pass through, and the game ball B1 passes through the distribution entrance 591. An opening / closing member 592 on the distribution side is provided to switch between an impossible closed state and an open state through which the game ball B1 can pass. The opening / closing member 592 on the distribution side is opened by being driven by a drive unit 593 for the distribution inlet through a link mechanism (not shown). The distribution entrance 591 constitutes the entrance of the guide passage 594, and the game ball B1 flowing in from the distribution entrance 591 flows down the guide passage 594 to the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 60B, the guide passage 594 is bifurcated from the intermediate position, and constitutes an upstream region 595 constituting the upstream side of the branch position and one of the downstream sides of the branch position. The V winning area 596 and the discharging area 597 forming the other on the downstream side of the branch position are provided. Further, at the branch position, a shutter 598 is provided as a distribution means for distributing the game ball B1 that has reached the branch position from the upstream region 595 to either the V winning region 596 or the discharge region 597. When the shutter 598 is not driven by the shutter drive unit 599, the game ball B1 that has reached the branch position flows into the discharge area 597, and the shutter 598 is driven by the shutter drive unit 599. Then, the game ball B1 that has reached the branch position flows into the V winning area 596.

The detection sensor 595a for counting is provided so that the detection region exists at a position where the game ball B1 that has flowed into the upstream region 595 always passes. Based on the fact that the game ball B1 is detected by the counting detection sensor 595a, the prize ball corresponding to the winning to the distribution winning device 583 is paid out. Further, the detection sensor 596a for V prize is provided so that the detection region exists at a position where the game ball B1 flowing into the V prize region 596 always passes. Based on the fact that the game ball B1 is detected by the detection sensor 596a for V winning, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is opened / closed. Further, the discharge detection sensor 597a is provided so that the detection region exists at a position where the game ball B1 that has flowed into the discharge region 597 always passes. Based on the detection results from the discharge detection sensor 597a and the V winning detection sensor 596a, it is determined whether or not the game ball B1 remains in the distribution winning device 583.

By the way, the drive timing of the shutter drive unit 599 is set so that the game ball B1 that has won the distribution winning device 583 is guided to the V winning area 596 with a probability of 80%. Is arbitrary, and may be configured with a higher probability of being guided to the discharge region 597. However, in order to enhance the advantage of winning in the big hit lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 582, the probability of shifting to the branch execution mode based on the winning of the second operating port 582 and the distribution winning device Shake the shutter 598 so that the product of the probability that the game ball B1 that has won 583 flows into the V winning area 596 is higher than the probability that it will be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 581. It is preferable that the minute probability is set. For example, it is preferable that the probability of being guided to the V winning region 596 is set higher, and it is more preferable that the probability of being guided to the V winning region 596 is 75% or more and less than 100%.

Further, the distribution winning device 583 is preferably formed so that it can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 whether the winning game ball B1 is distributed to the V winning area 596 or the discharging area 597. Specifically, it is preferable that the front side of the distribution winning device 583 is formed to be colored transparent or colorless and transparent.

In the branch execution mode, when the game ball B1 enters the distribution winning device 583, flows into the V winning area 596, and is detected by the V winning detection sensor 597a, the V winning occurs. On the other hand, in the branch execution mode, if the game ball B1 is not detected by the detection sensor 597a for V winning, V winning does not occur.

Next, the winning lottery in this embodiment will be described. First, an electrical configuration for performing a winning lottery on the main CPU 63 (FIG. 13) will be described.

The hold storage area 65a (FIG. 13) of the present embodiment includes a first hold area and a second hold area. In the first holding area, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 (FIG. 13), the jackpot type counter C2 (FIG. 13), and the reach random number counter C3 (FIG. 13) according to the winning history of the first operating port 581. The combination of is stored as hold information, and the second hold area is each numerical value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 according to the winning history of the second operating port 582. An area in which a combination of information is stored as pending information.

Up to four winning histories are held and stored in each of the first holding area and the second holding area. Each numerical information stored in the first holding area and the second holding area is moved to the execution area AE (FIG. 13). At the start of one game, the main CPU 63 executes a winning lottery based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Next, various tables used for the winning lottery will be described. The main ROM 64 (FIG. 12) stores a low-frequency left table, a regular right table, and a non-regular right table as tables used for the winning lottery.

In each table for winning lottery, the probability of a big hit result is set to be the same. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is not set with the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode described in the first embodiment, and the main ROM 64 has a low-frequency left table, a regular right table, and a regular right table. One type of non-regular right table is stored.

First, the low-frequency left table will be described. When the support mode of the second operating port 582 is the low frequency support mode, the holding information stored in the first holding area when a prize is generated in the first operating port 581 is referred to as the low frequency left holding information. To do. The low-frequency left hold information includes information indicating that the hold information is stored in the low-frequency support mode and that the hold information is stored based on the winning of the first operating port 581. There is. The low-frequency left-side table is a table to be read when the hold information stored in the execution area AE is the low-frequency left-side hold information.

Only the big hit result is set in the low frequency left table, and the small hit result is not set. As a big hit result, a high frequency result that becomes a high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode and a low frequency result that becomes a low frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode are set in the low frequency left table.

When a prize is generated in the first operation port 581 in the low frequency support mode and a big hit result is obtained in the winning lottery based on the winning, the big hit result this time is a high frequency result and the above first implementation is performed. When "1" is not set in the high frequency flag described in the embodiment, "1" is set in the high frequency flag. Further, when the jackpot result of this time is a low frequency result and the high frequency flag is set to "1", the high frequency flag is cleared to "0". If a big hit result is obtained in the winning lottery, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. When the high-frequency flag is set to "1" after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the support mode of the second operating port 582 becomes the high-frequency support mode, and the value of the high-frequency flag is "0". , The support mode of the second operating port 582 becomes the low frequency support mode.

Next, the regular right table will be described. When a prize is won in the second operating port 582 in the high frequency support mode, the hold information stored in the second hold area is set as the regular right hold information. The regular right hold information includes information indicating that the hold information is stored based on the winning of the second operating port 582 and that the winning of the second operating port 582 is generated by the normal flow. include. The regular right hold information is also stored in the second hold area even when a prize is generated in the second operation port 582 during the winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode. The normal right side table is a table to be read when the hold information stored in the execution area AE is the normal right hold information.

Here, the normal flow means that the game ball B1 is launched toward the right region PA3, triggered by either the high frequency support mode or the winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode. It is the flow of the game in which the operation is performed. On the other hand, in the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, the flow of the game in which the operation of firing the game ball B1 toward the right region PA3 is performed is regarded as the non-regular flow.

The big hit result and the small hit result are set in the right side table for regular use. In the regular right table, the above-mentioned high-frequency results and low-frequency results are set as jackpot results.

In the regular right table, the probability of occurrence of a small hit result is set so that a small hit result is obtained with a probability of approximately 100% when a big hit result is not obtained. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the probability of occurrence of the small hit result is set to 100% when the big hit result is not obtained. In the regular right table, high-frequency small hit results and low-frequency small hit results, which will be described later, are set as small hit results.

If a prize is generated in the second operating port 582 in either the low frequency support mode winning continuous period or the high frequency support mode, and the winning lottery based on the winning result is a big hit result, this big hit result Is a high-frequency result and "1" is not set in the high-frequency flag, "1" is set in the high-frequency flag. Further, when the jackpot result of this time is a low frequency result and the high frequency flag is set to "1", the high frequency flag is cleared to "0". If a big hit result is obtained by the winning lottery, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In addition, in the case where the small hit result is obtained in the current winning lottery, if the current small hit result is a high frequency small hit result and the high frequency flag is not set to "1", the high frequency is concerned. "1" is set in the flag. If the small hit result this time is a low frequency small hit result and the high frequency flag is set to "1", the high frequency flag is cleared to "0". If a small win result is obtained in the winning lottery, the mode shifts to the branch execution mode described above, and if a V prize occurs in the branch execution mode, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

When the high-frequency flag is set to "1" after the open / close execution mode ends, the support mode of the second operating port 582 becomes the high-frequency support mode, and the value of the high-frequency flag is "0". If, the support mode of the second operating port 582 becomes the low frequency support mode. Further, when the branch execution mode ends without the occurrence of V winning, the high frequency flag is cleared to "0". Therefore, after the branch execution mode, the support mode of the second operating port 582 becomes the low frequency support mode.

As described above, in the low frequency support mode, the winning continuous period is set, so that the general electric opening winning is continuously generated with the second operating port 582 in the open state. In this case, the winning lottery executed when the second operating port 582 is won is the same as the winning lottery executed when the second operating port 582 is won in the high frequency support mode.

As described above, the probability that a jackpot result will occur in the winning lottery using the low frequency left table is the same as the probability that the jackpot result will occur in the winning lottery using the regular right table. In addition, if the winning lottery using the low-frequency left table does not result in a big hit result, the result will be a loss, whereas if the winning lottery using the regular right table does not result in a big hit result, the result will be approximately 100. There is a% chance of shifting to branch execution mode. Therefore, the low-frequency support mode is a support mode that is more disadvantageous to the player than the high-frequency support mode.

Even in the low-frequency support mode, which is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the high-frequency support mode, the same winning lottery as in the high-frequency support mode is executed when the winning continuous period is reached. As already described in the first embodiment, the player is not notified of the occurrence timing of the winning continuous period. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the player may be in an advantageous state at an unexpected timing of the player. In this way, in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player a sense of expectation that the winning continuous period will occur.

Next, the non-regular right table will be described. The hold information stored in the second hold area when the second operating port 582 is won in the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode is set as the non-regular right side hold information. The non-regular right side hold information indicates that the hold information is stored with the winning of the second operating port 582 as a trigger, and that the winning of the second operating port 582 has occurred due to the non-regular flow. Contains information. The non-regular right side table is a table to be read when the hold information stored in the execution area AE is the non-regular right side hold information.

The big hit result and the small hit result are set in the non-regular right table. The jackpot result set in the non-regular right table is the above-mentioned low frequency result, and the small hit result set in the non-regular right table is the above-mentioned low frequency small hit result. In the non-regular right table, the probability of occurrence of a small hit result is set so that a small hit result is obtained with a probability of approximately 100% when a large hit result is not obtained. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the probability of occurrence of the small hit result is set to 100% when the big hit result is not obtained.

If a prize is won in the second operating port 582 during the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, a winning lottery is performed. If a big hit result is obtained in the winning lottery, or if a small hit result is obtained and a V prize is generated after shifting to the branch execution mode, the high frequency flag is opened and closed while being kept at "0". Move to execution mode. Therefore, after the opening / closing execution mode, the support mode of the second operating port 582 becomes the low frequency support mode. Further, even when the branch execution mode ends without V winning, the value of the high frequency flag is maintained at "0", and the support mode of the second operating port 582 becomes the low frequency support mode.

A player who does not accurately grasp the flow of the game may unintentionally execute the above-mentioned non-regular flow. As already explained in the first embodiment, the possibility of winning the general power opening lottery in the low frequency support mode is the general power opening lottery in the high frequency support mode. It is set lower than possible. For this reason, the situation where the game is played in the non-regular flow is more disadvantageous to the player than the situation where the game is played in the regular flow, and the player who does not accurately grasp the flow of the game loses. It becomes.

On the other hand, even if the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the right region PA3 during the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, a prize is generated in the second operating port 582. In that case, it is possible to give a remedy to a player who does not accurately grasp the flow of the game by configuring the device to shift to the branch execution mode with a high probability. However, after the open / close execution mode executed in a non-regular flow, the low frequency support mode is always set. As a result, it is possible to configure the configuration in which playing a game in a non-regular flow after grasping the flow of the game does not lead to a favorable result for the player.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Winning lottery that is executed when the second operating port 582 is won in the low frequency support mode winning consecutive period, and winning that is executed when the second operating port 582 is won in the high frequency support mode The lottery is run on the basis of a common regular right table. In the low-frequency support mode, which is disadvantageous to the player compared to the high-frequency support mode, the opening / closing execution mode is set and the opening / closing is performed by configuring the configuration in which a state advantageous to the player occurs at an unexpected timing of the player. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the high frequency support mode will be established after the execution mode.

In the situation of the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the left side area PA2, the game ball B1 flows down the right side area PA3. This configuration is more advantageous to the player than when operating the launch operation device 28. Even when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball B1 flows down the right region PA3 during the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, if a prize is generated in the second operating port 582, It is a configuration that shifts to the open / close execution mode with a high probability. Therefore, it is possible to provide relief measures to an unfamiliar player who does not accurately grasp the flow of the game.

In the winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, there is a possibility that a high frequency big hit result and a high frequency small hit result will be obtained in the winning lottery held with the winning of the second operating port 582 as a trigger. Rather than a winning lottery that is held when a prize is won in the second operating port 582 during the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, the winning is performed by winning the second operating port 582 during the winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode. The winning lottery is more likely to give a favorable result to the player. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the winning consecutive period attractive. Further, when a player who understands the flow of a regular game dares to play a game in a non-regular flow, it is suppressed that the non-regular flow leads to a favorable result for the player.

<Another form in the sixth embodiment>
-In the sixth embodiment described above, when the branch execution mode ends without V winning, the support mode of the second operating port 582 may not change before and after the branch execution mode. When a prize is generated in the second operating port 582 and a small win result is obtained in the winning lottery based on the winning, the mode shifts to the branch execution mode while maintaining the value of the high frequency flag. Then, when the V prize does not occur in the branch execution mode, the current value of the high frequency flag is maintained as it is.

When a prize is generated in the second operating port 582 in the high frequency support mode, "1" is set in the high frequency flag when the prize is generated. The value of the high frequency flag becomes a small hit result in the winning lottery, and is maintained as it is when the branch execution mode ends without V winning. In this case, the support mode of the second operating port 582 after the branch execution mode is maintained in the high frequency support mode.

Further, when a prize is generated in the second operating port 582 in the low frequency support mode, the value of the high frequency flag is "0" when the prize is generated. The value of the high frequency flag becomes a small hit result in the winning lottery, and is maintained as it is when the branch execution mode ends without V winning. In this case, the support mode of the second operating port 582 after the branch execution mode is maintained in the low frequency support mode.

As described above, when the branch execution mode ends without V winning, the support mode before the transition to the branch execution mode is maintained even after the branch execution mode. The winning continuous period in the frequency support mode can be set to be more advantageous to the player than the non-winning continuous period in the low frequency support mode, and can be set to be more disadvantageous to the player than the high frequency support mode. While maintaining the superiority of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to set the winning continuous period as a state advantageous to the player in the low-frequency support mode.

-During the continuous winning period of the low frequency support mode in the sixth embodiment described above, the winning lottery executed when a prize is generated in the second operating port 582 is the same as the winning of the non-regular right table. A continuous table may be used. The big hit result set in the winning continuous table is only the low frequency result, and the small hit result set in the winning continuous table is only the low frequency small hit result. Therefore, even if the opening / closing execution mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the winning lottery based on the winning continuous table, the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode does not become the high-frequency support mode.

The winning lottery executed when the second operating port 582 is won in the low frequency support mode winning consecutive period is the winning lottery executed when the second operating port 582 is won in the high frequency support mode. Compared with, it will be a winning lottery that is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, the superiority of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode can be maintained.

In the low-frequency support mode, when playing a game in a regular flow, it can be expected to shift to the open / close execution mode triggered by winning a prize in the first operating port 581, and when the winning continuous period is reached, the first It can be expected that the opening / closing execution mode will be triggered by winning a prize in the two operating ports 582. On the other hand, when the game is played in a non-regular flow, it can only be expected to shift to the open / close execution mode when the second operating port 582 is won. Then, the probability of winning the Fuden opening, which is a condition for winning the second operating port 582, is low. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the advantage of playing the game in the regular flow over playing the game in the non-regular flow is maintained, and the player who understands the flow of the game is intentionally non-regular. The possibility of playing a game in a regular flow is reduced.

-In the sixth embodiment described above, when a prize is won in the second through gate 39 in a non-regular flow, the player may be warned to play the game in the regular flow. .. The warning to the player is given when a prize is won in the second through gate 39 during the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode. Specifically, when the main CPU 63 detects the winning of the second through gate 39, the value of the winning continuous flag already described in the first embodiment is "0", and the frequency is high. On condition that the value of the flag is "0", the process for transmitting the warning command to the voice emission control device 81 is executed. Upon receiving the warning command, the voice emission control device 81 warns the player to operate the game ball launching device aiming at the first through gate 35 by transmitting the command to the display control device 82. It is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In addition, the voice emission control device 81 controls the speaker unit 54 to output sound that warns the player to operate the game ball launching device aiming at the first through gate 35. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a player who does not accurately grasp the flow of the game will generate a prize in the second operating port 582 in a non-regular flow. Here, as already described in the first embodiment, when the low frequency support mode shifts from the non-winning continuous period to the winning continuous period, the winning continuous flag is set to "1". Therefore, when the operation mode of the game ball launching device is switched so that the game ball B1 flows down the right region PA3 in the wake of the winning continuous period, no warning is given to the player.

In the sixth embodiment described above, the opening mode of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode performed in the non-regular flow is different from the opening mode of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode performed in the normal flow. May be. The main CPU 63 this time, on condition that the value of the winning continuous flag is "0" and the value of the high frequency flag is "0" when the second operating port 582 is won. Set "1" to the non-regular flag indicating that the prize of is a prize generated in a non-regular flow. Further, in the open / close execution mode, when the non-regular flag is set to "1", the main CPU 63 executes the open / close operation of the special electric winning device 32 in the non-regular mode, and sets the non-regular flag to "1". If is not set, the opening / closing operation of the special electric winning device 32 is executed in the normal mode. In the non-normal mode, as compared with the normal mode, the closing time from the end of the open state of the special electric winning device 32 to the next open state is set to be longer. Therefore, in the non-normal mode, the amount of the game ball B1 consumed in the open / close execution mode is larger than that in the normal mode. The game ball B1 is fired so as to flow down the left side area PA2 during the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode, and the game ball B1 is fired so as to flow down the right side area PA3 when the winning continuous period is reached. The regular flow of switching operations is more advantageous for the player than the non-regular flow of launching the game ball B1 so as to flow down the right region PA3 during the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a player who is aware of the flow of the game from intentionally playing the game in a non-regular flow.

<7th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for discharging the game ball B1 in the adjusting mechanism 620 and the inclination of the opening of the first through gate 35 in the game board 610 are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

First, the configuration of the adjusting mechanism 620 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The adjusting mechanism 620 periodically supplies the game ball B1 to the first through gate 35. FIG. 61 is an enlarged front view of the first through gate 35 and the game board 610 showing the upper configuration of the first through gate 35 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 61, in the game board 610 of the present embodiment, an adjusting mechanism 620 is provided above the first through gate 35 in place of the adjusting mechanism 180 of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the adjusting mechanism 620 of the present embodiment, the accommodating portion 181 includes the left standing wall 181h and the right standing wall 181d described in the first embodiment, and accommodates the rotating body 183. The accommodation space is divided.

The left standing wall 181h and the right standing wall 181d are formed so as to project forward from the front surface of the base body 181a at intervals in the circumferential direction of the base body 181a. As shown in FIG. 61, since the left standing wall 181h and the right standing wall 181d are separated from each other, the intake port 185 described in the first embodiment exists above the adjusting mechanism 620. , There is a discharge port 621 at the lower right of the adjusting mechanism 620. As shown in FIG. 61, the discharge port 621 has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B1.

As shown in FIG. 61, the adjusting mechanism 620 includes an adjusting drive unit 184 described in the first embodiment behind the rotating body 183. The adjustment drive unit 184 is connected to the output port of the MPU 62 (FIG. 12). In the present embodiment, the adjustment drive unit 184 slowly rotates the rotating body 183 clockwise at an angular velocity of 90 ° for 5 seconds by supplying a drive signal to the drive state.

When any of the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is opened upward at the intake port 185 located at the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 620, the adjusting mechanism 620 is in a state where the game ball B1 can be taken in. At the same time, when any of the recessed portions 183b to 183e is opened to the lower right at the discharge port 621 located at the lower right of the adjustment mechanism 620, the adjustment mechanism 620 can discharge the game ball B1. It becomes a state.

The duration of the state in which the game ball B1 can be taken in at the intake port 185 and the duration of the state in which the game ball B1 can be discharged at the discharge port 621 are determined depending on the rotation speed of the rotating body 183. When the rotation speed of the rotating body 183 is slow, the time in which the recessed portions 183b to 183e are open to the outside at the intake port 185 and the discharge port 621 becomes long. As a result, the duration of the state in which the game ball B1 can be taken in and the state in which the game ball B1 can be discharged is extended.

In the present embodiment, the rotation speed of the rotating body 183 is set sufficiently slow so that the state in which the game ball B1 can be discharged continues at the discharge port 621 until the discharge of the game ball B1 is completed. The flow in which the game ball B1 is discharged from the discharge port 621 is common even when the discharged game ball B1 is taken into any of the recessed portions 183b to 183e. Therefore, in the following, the discharge mode of the game ball B1 in the adjusting mechanism 620 will be described with reference to FIG. 61, taking the game ball B1 incorporated in the first recessed portion 183b as an example.

As shown in FIG. 61, the game ball B1 taken into the first recessed portion 183b and conveyed clockwise in the circumferential direction of the base body 181a has a discharge port 621 and a first recessed portion 183b at the lower right of the adjusting mechanism 620. When the first recessed portion 183b is opened toward the lower right side, the first recessed portion 183b is discharged.

Specifically, even if the first recessed portion 183b begins to overlap the discharge port 621 due to the rotation of the rotating body 183, the width of the region open to the outside in the first recessed portion 183b is the width of the game ball. When the diameter is smaller than the diameter of B1, the game ball B1 in the first recessed portion 183b is not discharged to the outside. In this state, the game ball B1 in the first recessed portion 183b is supported by the inner wall of the first recessed portion 183b and the right standing wall 181d to prevent the game ball B1 from falling downward.

As the rotation of the rotating body 183 progresses, the distance between the inner wall of the first recessed portion 183b supporting the game ball B1 and the right standing wall 181d becomes longer, so that the first recessed portion 183b is open to the outside. The width of the area becomes wider. Then, when the distance between the inner wall of the first recessed portion 183b and the right standing wall 181d becomes longer than the diameter of the game ball B1, the game ball B1 loses its support and falls downward.

When the rotating body 183 rotates quickly, the rotating body at the discharge port 621 is between the time when the first recessed portion 183b is opened to the outside and the time when the game ball B1 is actually discharged. The rotation of the 183 progresses, the game ball B1 in the middle of being discharged is sandwiched between the rotating body 183 and the left standing wall 181h, or the first recessed portion 183b is opened to the outside before the game ball B1 is discharged. It may end. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation speed of the rotating body 183 is set to be sufficiently slow. Therefore, the game ball B1 is discharged from the state in which the first recessed portion 183b is open to the outside until the end of the state.

As already described in the first embodiment, the intake port 185 can take in the game ball B1 when any of the recessed portions 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 is opened upward. It will be in the permitted state. When the rotation speed of the rotating body 183 is set to be slow, the duration of one capture permission state at the capture port 185 becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the capture permission state ends without the game ball B1 being captured in the recessed portions 183b to 183e opened upward. As a result, when the adjustment mechanism 620 reaches the discharge timing, the frequency with which the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 toward the first through gate 35 does not exist can be reduced.

As already described in the first embodiment, the number of game balls B1 that can be taken into any of the recesses 183b to 183e of the rotating body 183 during one take-in permission state is limited to one. .. When the rotation speed of the rotating body 183 is set to be slow, the frequency with which the adjustment mechanism 620 is in the capture permission state decreases per unit time, so that the number of game balls B1 that the adjustment mechanism 620 can capture per unit time also decreases. It will be.

On the other hand, as already described in the first embodiment, the adjusting mechanism 620 moves the game ball B1 flowing down near the intake port 185 between the nail 24b and the left standing wall 181h. Alternatively, it can be discharged from between the nail 24b and the right standing wall 181d to the left and right spaces of the adjusting mechanism 180, and is discharged from the passage entrance 171 provided behind the intake port 185 toward the escape passage 172. be able to. Therefore, even if the number of game balls B1 that have flowed down to the vicinity of the intake port 185 and have not been taken into the intake port 185 increases, it is possible to prevent the game balls B1 from staying in the vicinity of the intake port 185.

Further, as described above, the discharge port 621 exists in the lower right portion of the adjusting mechanism 620, and the game ball B1 taken in by the upper portion of the adjusting mechanism 620 rotates 180 ° around the center of the rotating body 183. It is discharged to the outside at an earlier timing. The game ball B1 taken in by the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 620 does not rotate more than 180 ° around the center of the rotating body 183. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has reached the lower part of the adjusting mechanism 620 does not rise again due to the rotation of the rotating body 183.

As shown in FIG. 61, the left standing wall 181h includes an end surface 181i that comes into contact with the game ball B1 that falls downward from the discharge port 621. The end face 181i is inclined downward toward the right, and comes into contact with the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 to guide the game ball B1 to the lower right.

As described above, the width of the discharge port 621 is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1 and is set to be relatively narrow. Therefore, it is possible to keep the variation in the discharge start position of the game ball B1 at the discharge port 621 small. Further, since the variation in the discharge start position of the game ball B1 is small, most of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 can be brought into contact with the end surface 181i of the left standing wall 261. As a result, the variation in the discharge direction of the game ball B1 can be suppressed to be small.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the game board 610, the first through gate 35 is located below the discharge port 621. The distance from the discharge port 621 to the first through gate 35 is set to be one size longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. Since there is a gap between the discharge port 621 and the first through gate 35 through which the game ball B1 can pass, there is a possibility that a part of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 will come off from the first through gate 35. There is. For example, if the course of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 shifts to either the left or right and the game ball B1 collides with the edge of the first through gate 35, a prize is generated for the first through gate 35. May not.

By avoiding the configuration in which all of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 win the first through gate 35, it is possible to avoid that the player's interest in the adjustment mechanism 620 is limited only to the capture of the game ball B1. it can. Further, by setting the distance from the discharge port 621 to the first through gate 35 to be short, the influence of the discharge speed of the game ball B1 on the timing when the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 wins the first through gate 35. Can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 61, the first through gate 35 in the present embodiment facilitates entry of the game ball B1 which is guided by the end surface 181i of the left standing wall 181h and falls toward the lower right at the discharge port 621. In order to do so, the game board 610 is provided so as to incline downward toward the left.

As shown in FIG. 61, at the discharge port 621, the game ball B1 guided by the end surface 181i of the left standing wall 181h and discharged downward to the right gradually corrects its course downward due to the influence of the attractive force. While falling. The inclination angle of the first through gate 35 is set so as to be substantially perpendicular to the course at the height position of the first through gate 35 of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621. As a result, the possibility that the game ball B1 will smoothly win the prize without colliding with the edge of the first through gate 35 is increased. By preventing the game ball B1 from coming into contact with the edge of the first through gate 35 immediately before winning the first through gate 35, the winning timing of the game ball B1 in contact with the edge of the first through gate 35 may shift. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball B1 will come off from the first through gate 35.

As described above, since the variation in the discharge start position and the variation in the discharge direction of the game ball B1 in the discharge port 621 are suppressed to be small, most of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 is the first through gate 35. Can be smoothly won.

Next, the low-frequency winning determination value table in this embodiment will be described. As described in the first embodiment, the low-frequency winning determination value table stored in the main ROM 64 (FIG. 12) shows the low-frequency open winning lottery executed in the low-frequency support mode. The winning judgment value that is the target of is recorded. The low-frequency winning determination value table of the present embodiment includes the winning determination values set in the low-frequency winning determination value table T1 described with reference to FIG. 14A in the first embodiment. Is set to a different value.

In the low-frequency winning determination value table of the present embodiment, the winning determination value of the public electric open lottery is set to (1250 × n-5) to (1250 × n). Here, the variable n is a natural number from 1 to 52. In the public power opening lottery executed in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the general power opening is approximately 1/210.

The winning judgment values that are the targets of the Fuden Open Winning are serial numbers in units of six. Further, the update cycle of the release random number in the general electric accessory release counter C4 (FIG. 13) is 4 msec. Therefore, in the general electric accessory opening counter C4, the period in which the updated random number for opening becomes the winning determination value of the general electric opening winning target in the general electric opening lottery in the low frequency support mode continues for 24 msec.

In the low-frequency support mode, the winning determination value, which is the target of the general electric open winning, continues for 24 msec, and the winning target period occurs in a cycle of 5 sec. As described above, the cycle in which the winning possible timing in which the game ball B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 wins the first through gate 35 occurs is 5 sec, which is the same as the cycle in which the winning target period occurs in the low frequency support mode. is there.

Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the winning timing overlaps with the winning target period, so that the winning continuous period is such that the Fuden open winning is continuously generated. The winning continuous period continues until the initial value of the general electric utility opening counter C4 is updated and the timing of occurrence of the winning target period shifts. If the timing of the winning period is different, the non-winning continuous period will continue until the winning period and the winning timing overlap again in the Fuden open lottery executed in the low frequency support mode.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The discharge port 621 is provided at a position where the game ball B1 taken in at the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 620 reaches before rotating 180 ° around the center of the rotating body 183. Further, in the discharge port 621, when the game ball B1 can be discharged from the recessed portions 183b to 183e, the adjustment drive unit 184 does not end before the discharge of the game ball B1 is completed. Drive controlled. As a result, it is prevented that the game ball B1 conveyed downward from the upper part of the adjusting mechanism 620 rotates around the center of the rotating body 183 by 180 ° or more and rises again.

The left standing wall 181h is provided with an end surface 181i that comes into contact with the game ball B1 that is about to fall downward due to its own weight from the discharge port 621 and guides the game ball B1 to the lower right. Further, the width of the discharge port 621 is set to be slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B1. Since the width of the discharge port 621 is set to be relatively narrow, the variation in the discharge start position of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 is small, and most of the game balls B1 discharged from the discharge port 621 stand up to the left. It can be brought into contact with the end surface 181i of the wall 261 and guided to the lower right. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the variation in the discharge direction of the game ball B1 discharged from the discharge port 621.

The variation in the ejection start position of the game ball B1 ejected from the adjusting mechanism 620 is small, and the variation in the ejection direction is small. Therefore, when the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 620 falls to the height position of the first through gate 35, the variation in the moving direction is small. The first through gate 35 is discharged downward from the adjusting mechanism 620 and downwards toward the left so as to have an opening perpendicular to the moving direction of the game ball B1 that has flowed down to the height position of the first through gate 35. It is tilted. Therefore, the game ball B1 discharged from the adjusting mechanism 620 is easily taken in smoothly without colliding with the edge of the first through gate 35. As a result, it is prevented that the game ball B1 collides with the edge of the first through gate 35 immediately before winning the first through gate 35, the winning timing is shifted, or the game ball B1 deviates from the first through gate 35.

The distance from the discharge port 621 of the adjusting mechanism 620 to the first through gate 35 is set to be one size longer than the diameter of the game ball B1. Since there is a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball B1 between the discharge port 621 and the first through gate 35, all of the game balls B1 discharged from the adjustment mechanism 620 win the first through gate 35. Can be avoided. Further, since the distance from the discharge port 621 to the first through gate 35 is relatively short, even if the game ball B1 is discharged at a different discharge speed each time, the difference in the discharge speed is the winning timing for the first through gate 35. It can be configured so as not to have a great influence on. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the winning timing of the first through gate 35 is shifted due to the difference in the discharge speed during the winning continuous period, and the winning is not won.

<8th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, among the first to 16th buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 on the management side I / F 111, the type of buffer whose input signal type is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 is described above. It is different from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 in order to make the management CPU 112 specify the type of the input signal is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

Signals of the same type as those in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the 16th buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the second buffer 122b corresponds to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. Two signals are input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, and the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal. The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, but in the present embodiment, the buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, the signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the 13th buffer 122m as the open / close execution mode signal, and the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the 14th buffer 122n as the high frequency support mode signal. , The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the 15th buffer 122o as a signal during opening of the door.

The opening / closing execution mode signal is input to the 13th buffer 122m, the high frequency support mode signal is input to the 14th buffer 122n, the door opening signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o, and the thirteenth buffer 122o is input. It is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16 buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 does not receive an instruction from the main CPU 63, and the management CPU 112 has these 13th to 16th buffers 122m to 122p. It is possible to specify that each of the above signals corresponding to each is input to. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management side CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the recognition process of the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 17) as in the first embodiment.

First, "12", which is the number of the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l to be recognized for the signal type, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1701). After that, the output processing of the identification start signal is executed (step S1702). In the output process, the output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n, respectively. Is set to the HI level to start the output of the identification start signal. The period for maintaining these signals at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

After that, the information on the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the information on the number of outputs read is set in the output counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( Step S1703). The output count counter is a counter for specifying the output count of the type identification signal by the main CPU 63.

In the present embodiment, when the management side CPU 112 is made to recognize the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l, the number of prize balls set for the ball entry unit corresponding to the signal type. Outputs the type identification signal the same number of times as. The management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal is received for each of the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l in the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. .. That is, the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l is grasped as the number of prize balls set for the ball entry unit corresponding to the signal type.

In step S1703, when the value of the recognition output counter is any of "12", "11", and "10", "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the output count counter. .. When the value of the recognition output counter is "9", "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is "8", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the first operating port 33 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is "7", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "6", even if the game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a, the game ball is not paid out, so that the output count counter Set to "0". When the value of the recognition output counter is any of "5" to "1", the corresponding ball entry portion does not exist and the ball is blank, so "0" is set in the output count counter.

After that, the output processing of the start trigger signal is executed (step S1704). In the output process, the output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to the HI level. The period for maintaining the first signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

After that, on the condition that the value of the output count counter of the main RAM 65 is not "0" (step S1705: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output count counter in step S1703. Step S1706 proceeds. In step S1706, the output processing of the type identification signal is executed. In the output process, the output of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to the HI level. The period for maintaining the second signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

After that, the value of the output count counter of the main RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1707), and it is determined whether or not the value of the output count counter after the subtraction is "0" (step S1708). If the value of the output count counter is 1 or more (step S1708: NO), the process returns to step S1706.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1705, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1708, the end trigger signal output process is executed (step S1709). In the output process, the output of the end trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to the HI level. The period for maintaining the third signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

After that, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1710), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the subtraction is "0" (step S1711). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S1711: NO), the process returns to step S1703 and the process for recognizing the signal type corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after 1 subtraction is executed. To do.

On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S1711: YES), the output processing of the identification end signal is executed (step S1712). In the output processing, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n, respectively. Is set to the HI level to start the output of the identification end signal. The period for maintaining these signals at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Next, the management process in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of the operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started as in the first embodiment.

When the reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S1801: YES), the value of the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1802). After that, the process proceeds to step S1804 on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1803: YES). In step S1804, it is determined whether or not a type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63. When the type identification signal is received (step S1804: YES), the value of the reception count counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is added by 1 (step S1805). The reception count counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the number of times the type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. The value of the reception count counter is cleared to "0" when an affirmative determination is made in step S1803.

When a negative determination is made in step S1804 or when the process of step S1805 is executed, it is determined whether or not an end trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1806). When the end trigger signal is not received (step S1806: NO), the process returns to step S1804, and when the end trigger signal is received (step S1806: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S1807). In the correspondence setting process, the reception count is set in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 among the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. Stores the value that has been set. In this case, "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c, and the fourth correspondence area 123d is set. Is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32, and "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operating port 33 is set in the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence relationship. In the area 123f, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 is set. Further, "0" is set in the 7th to 12th correspondence related areas 123g to 123l. After that, the value of the setting target counter of the management side RAM 114 is added by 1 (step S1808).

When a negative determination is made in step S1803 or when the process of step S1808 is executed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S1809). If the reception of the identification end signal is not completed (step S1809: NO), the process returns to step S1803, and the processing after step S1804 is performed on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1803: YES). Execute. When the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S1809: YES), the history setting process in step S1810 and the external output process in step S1811 are repeatedly executed.

FIG. 65 is a time chart showing how the correspondence relationship information between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l is stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116. FIG. 65 (a) shows a period during which the output state of the first signal is at the HI level, and FIG. 65 (b) shows a period during which the output state of the second signal is at the HI level. ) Indicates the period during which the output state of the third signal is at the HI level, FIG. 65 (d) indicates the period during which the output state of the signal during the open / close execution mode is at the HI level, and FIG. 65 (e) shows the period. The period during which the output state of the signal during the high frequency support mode is at the HI level is shown, and FIG. 65 (f) shows the types of signals input to the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and these buffers 122a to 122l. FIG. 65 (g) shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed, FIG. 65 (g) shows the timing when the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 114 is added by 1, and FIG. 65 (h) shows the timing. The timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S1807) is executed by the management side CPU 112 is shown.

When the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, the first signal is shown at the timing of t1 as shown in FIGS. 65 (a), 65 (d) and 65 (e). , The output state of the signal in the open / close execution mode and the signal in the high frequency support mode is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. After that, at the timing of t2, the output states of the first signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t2, the management side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1801 of the management process (FIG. 64), so that the identification state is entered as shown in FIG. 65 (f).

After that, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 65 (a). As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing of t5 to the timing of t7. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management side CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t6, the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 65 (g).

After that, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing of t8 to the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 65 (c). As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t9, the management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 65 (h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "1" at the timing when the correspondence relation setting process is executed, "1" is used as the correspondence relation information in the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123l to be set this time in the correspondence relation memory 116. ”Information is stored.

After that, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12 as shown in FIG. 65 (a). As a result, the start trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the second timing is from t13 timing to t15 timing, t16 timing to t18 timing, t19 timing to t21 timing, and t22 timing to t24 timing, respectively. The output state of the signal is maintained at the HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management side CPU 112. In this case, the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 114 is added by 1 at each of the timing of t14, the timing of t17, the timing of t20, and the timing of t23, as shown in FIG. 65 (g).

After that, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing of t25 to the timing of t27 as shown in FIG. 65 (c). As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t26, the management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 65 (h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "10" at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, "10" is provided as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l to be set this time in the correspondence memory 116. ”Information is stored.

After that, at the timing of t28, as shown in FIGS. 65 (c), 65 (d), and 65 (e), the output states of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are LOW. The level is changed to the HI level. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. After that, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t29, the management side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1809 of the management process (FIG. 64), so that the identification state is released as shown in FIG. 65 (f).

Since the information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information in the present embodiment, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes the prize balls corresponding to the ball entry portion that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number of pieces is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, when there are a plurality of types of entry portions having the same number of prize balls, it is not possible to distinguish those entry portions in the history information. Specifically, since the number of prize balls is one in each of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, it is possible to distinguish between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls may be different between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. Thereby, even in the configuration in which the history information is stored as in the eighth embodiment, it is possible to distinguish between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information.

Further, in the present embodiment, "15" is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 in step S801 of the history setting process. As a result, all of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are to be confirmed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the output instruction signal, but also the information corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, the information corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress, and the front door. Regarding the information corresponding to whether or not the frame 14 is open, it is possible for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the signal path corresponds to these information without receiving the correspondence information from the main side CPU 63. It has become. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is the information that the main CPU 63 needs to make the management CPU 112 recognize the correspondence relationship between each information and each signal path 118a to 118g. Become. Then, when the management side CPU 112 is made to recognize the correspondence information, the same number of pulse signals as the number of prize balls corresponding to the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a are generated from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 by using the second signal. Is output to. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration related to the transmission of correspondence information.

<9th embodiment>
In this embodiment, the trigger for executing the calculation of various parameters using the history information is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 66 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in the present embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117. These functions are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 631. In the present embodiment, as will be described in detail later, when a calculation trigger occurs, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. Then, the various calculated parameters are sequentially stored in the calculation result memory 631. Various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 631 are output to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

The calculation trigger of various parameters occurs before the timing when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to make the timing of calculating various parameters different from the timing of externally outputting to the reading device, and it is possible to distribute the processing load.

In addition, since the calculation result memory 631 for storing the calculation results of various parameters is provided, not only the various parameters for one calculation trigger but also the various parameters for multiple calculation triggers are collectively collected. It becomes possible to memorize it. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required to calculate various parameters at each calculation trigger.

FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

Signals of the same type as those in the first embodiment are input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the second buffer 122b corresponds to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. Two signals are input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth signal is input, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, the signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h, and the ninth is A signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the buffer 122i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the 10th buffer 122j, and an output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the various signals described above, a calculation instruction signal is input to the 15th buffer 122o. The calculation instruction signal is a signal output from the main CPU 63 in order to provide a calculation trigger for various parameters to the management side CPU 112. The input of the calculation instruction signal to the 15th buffer 122o is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 in the same manner as the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p, and is an instruction from the main CPU 63. The management side CPU 112 can specify that each of the above signals corresponding to the 15th to 16th buffers 122o to 122p is input to the 15th to 16th buffers 122o to 122p without receiving the signal. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to 14th buffers 122a to 122n is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management side CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

Next, a processing configuration for causing the management CPU 112 to execute various parameter calculations in response to the occurrence of a calculation trigger will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a power failure information storage process executed by the main CPU 63. The power failure information storage process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

In the power failure information storage process, when the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power cutoff is received from the power failure monitoring board 67 (step S1901: YES), the output process of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1902). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a sufficient period for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level. After that, after executing the power failure processing in step S1903, an infinite loop is formed, and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power failure processing, "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 65, a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a power failure response process executed by the management side CPU 112. The power failure response process is configured to be executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 34). In the management process, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S1006: YES), step S1007 The history setting process, the external output process of step S1008, and the power failure response process are repeatedly executed in this order.

In the power failure response process, when the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 reaches the HI level (step S2001: YES), in steps S2002 to step S2006, the external output according to the first embodiment is described. In the same manner as in steps S1602 to S1606 of the processing (FIG. 40), the number of balls entered for each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated. .. Further, in step S2007, similarly to step S1607 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, the number of various balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Further, in step S2008, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1608 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, and in step S2009, for external output in the first embodiment. The total time is calculated in the same manner as in step S1609 of the process (FIG. 40). Then, the calculation result information of step S2008 and the calculation result information of step S2009 are written to the calculation result memory 631 (step S2010). In this case, if the calculation result memory 631 already stores information on other calculation results, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

After that, in step S2011, the number of various balls entered in the open / close execution mode is calculated in the same manner as in step S1611 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, and in step S2012, the first Similar to step S1612 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the embodiment, the number of various balls entered in the open / closed execution mode and the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Further, in step S2013, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1613 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. Then, the calculation result information in step S2014 is written in the calculation result memory 631 (step S2014). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 631. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

After that, in step S2015, the number of various balls entered in the high-frequency support mode is calculated in the same manner as in step S1615 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, and in step S2016, the above-mentioned first. Similar to step S1616 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, the number of various balls entered in the high frequency support mode and the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Further, in step S2017, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1617 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. Then, the calculation result information of step S2017 is written to the calculation result memory 631 (step S2018). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 631. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing. After that, an infinite loop is formed, and the system waits until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by the management CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S1208 of the management process (FIG. 34).

When the output state of the output instruction signal from the main CPU 63 reaches the HI level (step S2101: YES), the output processing of the calculation result is executed (step S2102). In the output process, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 631 are output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 can read various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 631. In this case, when only the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of one calculation trigger are stored in the calculation result memory 631, only the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the one calculation trigger are stored in the reading device. When it is read and various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of a plurality of calculation triggers are stored in the calculation result memory 631, the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the multiple calculation triggers are read by the reading device. ..

After that, the history information output process is executed (step S2103). In the output process, all the history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, various history information stored in the history area 124 is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. By outputting not only the various calculation results but also the history information in this way, it is possible for the operator using the reading device to perform detailed analysis on the various calculation results.

After that, the clearing process is executed (step S2104). In the clearing process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is in the initialized state. Further, in the clearing process, all the areas of the calculation result memory 631 are cleared to "0". As a result, the calculation result memory 631 is in the initialized state.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. This makes it possible to manage various parameters on a business day basis.

When it is specified that the supply of the operating power is stopped in the main CPU 63, the output state of the calculation instruction signal is changed to the HI level, so that the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. This makes it possible for the management side CPU 112 to calculate various parameters based on the instruction from the main side CPU 63.

Various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 are sequentially written in the calculation result memory 631. As a result, various parameters can be accumulated in the management IC 66, and when the various parameters are read by the reading device, the various parameters on a plurality of business days can be read together.

When various parameters are written in the calculation result memory 631, information that enables the identification of the time when the various parameters are calculated is written in the calculation result memory 631 along with the various parameters. This makes it possible to analyze various parameter information while grasping the time when the various parameters are calculated.

When a calculation trigger occurs and the calculation results of various parameters for the calculation result are written in the calculation result memory 631, the history memory 117 may be cleared to "0". As a result, in a situation where the maximum number of storable history information is already stored in the history memory 117, it is difficult for a new history information to be written to the history memory 117.

Further, the target information to be externally output to the reading device may be only the information of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 631, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be output externally. .. This makes it possible to suppress the amount of information output to the outside.

<10th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the power failure response process executed by the management side CPU 112 is different from that of the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the ninth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a power failure response process executed by the management side CPU 112 in the present embodiment.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 reaches the HI level (step S2201: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2202). In various arithmetic processes, the processes of steps S2002 to Step S2009, steps S2011 to Step S2013, and steps S2015 to Step S2017 of the power failure response process (FIG. 69) in the ninth embodiment are executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not a predetermined parameter is within the reference range among the various parameters calculated in step S2202 (step S2203). In particular,
7th parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general""Number of prize balls for winning the prize opening 31" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning a prize") ・ Eighth parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "for winning a prize in the general winning opening 31""Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34" The two parameters of the ratio of ") are set as the parameters to be determined whether or not they are within the reference range. Then, when the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, an affirmative determination is made in step S2203 assuming that the predetermined parameter is in the reference range.

The predetermined parameter is not limited to the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter, and may be configured in which other parameters are set as predetermined parameters in place of or in addition to these. For example
Second parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 K2 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) may be set as a predetermined parameter. .. In this case, for example, when the value of the second parameter is 0.1 or more and 0.2 or less, the predetermined parameter may be determined to be in the reference range. Further, only the predetermined parameters to be determined in step S2203 may be calculated by various arithmetic processes in step S2202.

When the predetermined parameter is not in the reference range (step S2203: NO), the various parameters calculated in step S2202 are written to the calculation result memory 631 (step S2204). In this case, if the calculation result memory 631 already stores information on other calculation results, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

On the other hand, when the predetermined parameter is in the reference range (step S2203: YES), the process of step S2204 is not executed. As a result, only various parameters when the predetermined parameters are not in the reference range are written in the calculation result memory 631. Therefore, when an abnormal situation occurs, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required as the calculation result memory 631 while leaving the history in the calculation result memory 631.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2203 or when the process of step S2204 is executed, the clear process of the history memory 117 is executed (step S2205). In the clearing process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is in the initialized state. After executing the process of step S2205, an infinite loop is formed, and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is completely stopped.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, it is determined whether or not the contents of the various calculated parameters are included in the reference range, and only the various parameters determined to be included in the reference range are stored in the calculation result memory 631. Written. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 631, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the calculation result memory 631.

<11th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger for causing the management CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters is different from the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the ninth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 72A is a flowchart showing a trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. The trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S1312 in the management output process (FIG. 36).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S2301). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, the addition process of the ball entry counter provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S2302). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated this time. The management output process (FIG. 36) of the above is specified based on the number of times step S1305 is executed. Then, the number of the specified game balls is added to the ball entry counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or more than the trigger reference number “500” (step S2303). When it is "500" or more (step S2303: YES), the subtraction process of the ball entry counter of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S2304). In the subtraction process, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by "500". After that, the output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S2305). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a sufficient period for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

FIG. 72B is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing executed by the management side CPU 112. The arithmetic processing is a processing executed instead of the power failure response processing in the ninth embodiment. Therefore, the arithmetic processing is configured to be executed after the external output processing in the management processing (FIG. 34), and in the management processing, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S1206: YES), in step S1207. The history setting process, the external output process of step S1208, and the arithmetic process are repeatedly executed in this order.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 reaches the HI level (step S2401: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2402). In the various arithmetic processes, the same processes as in steps S2002 to S2018 of the power failure response process (FIG. 69) in the ninth embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112. In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in a situation where the main CPU 63 is supplied with operating power, various parameters are calculated, so that the game ball enters the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage the mode in detail.

Further, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated on condition that the game is executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being performed meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

<12th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger for causing the management side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters is different from the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the eleventh embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the eleventh embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. The trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S1312 in the management output process (FIG. 36).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S2501). If a negative determination is made in step S2501, the value of the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2502). The continuation counter is the main CPU 63 during the period in which the game ball does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It is a counter for specifying in.

When the value of the continuation counter after 1 addition is equal to or greater than the stop reference value (step S2503: YES), the time measurement flag provided in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S2504). When the state in which the game ball does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 continues for 5 seconds, an affirmative determination is made in step S2503. The stop reference value is set so as to. Further, the time measurement flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not to measure the time for specifying the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level, and is a time measurement flag. When the value of is "0", the time is not measured, and when the value of the time measurement flag is "1", the time is measured. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, the time measurement flag is set to "1" (step S2505).

When a negative determination is made in step S2503, when the process of step S2504 is executed, or when the process of step S2505 is executed, the time measurement flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (condition). Step S2506: YES), the value of the measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2507). The measurement counter is a counter used for measuring the time for specifying the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level.

It is determined whether or not the value of the measurement counter after 1 addition is equal to or greater than the indicated reference value (step S2508). An instruction reference value is set so that an affirmative determination is made in step S2508 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2508, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to "0" (step S2509), and the calculation instruction signal output process is executed (step S2510). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is a sufficient period for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, since various parameters are calculated each time a predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of various parameters simply by adjusting the predetermined period. Become. In this case, in the situation where the game is not executed, the measurement for the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game round is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation where the game is not executed from the calculation targets of various parameters, and it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters in the situation where the game is being executed.

In addition, instead of the configuration in which whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed is measured by using the measurement counter, the configuration may be such that the RTC 115 is used for measurement.

<13th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger for executing the calculation of various parameters by the management side CPU 112 is different from that of the first embodiment, and the presence or absence of the occurrence of the calculation trigger is specified by the main CPU 63. It is not performed independently by the management side CPU 112. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing executed by the management side CPU 112. The calculation process is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S1412 in the history setting process (FIG. 37).

Corresponding to the occurrence of a game ball entering any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 in the history setting process of this processing time. It is determined whether or not the history information to be stored is stored in the history memory 117 (step S2601). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, the addition process of the ball entry counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is executed (step S2602). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated this time. In the history setting process of, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the game ball is specified based on the number of times of storage. Then, the number of the specified game balls is added to the ball entry counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or more than the trigger reference number “500” (step S2603). When it is "500" or more (step S2603: YES), the subtraction process of the ball entry counter of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S2604). In the subtraction process, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by "500". After that, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2605). In the various arithmetic processes, the same processes as in steps S2002 to S2018 of the power failure response process (FIG. 69) in the ninth embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or more than the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112. In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in a situation where the main CPU 63 is supplied with operating power, various parameters are calculated, so that the game ball enters the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage the mode in detail.

Further, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated on condition that the game is executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters from being performed meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

Further, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is measured by the management side CPU 112, and the management side CPU 112 determines whether or not the total number is equal to or more than the trigger reference number. That is, the calculation trigger of various parameters is independently determined by the management side CPU 112. As a result, it is not necessary for the main CPU 63 to execute the process for determining the calculation trigger of various parameters, so that the processing load of the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

<14th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In the present embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with the calculation result memory 631 as in the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 66). When a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and writes the various parameters of the calculation result to the calculation result memory 631. Further, in the present embodiment, a signal indicating that the opening / closing execution mode has been started, a signal indicating that the opening / closing execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode has been started, and a high-frequency support mode are provided. A signal indicating that the front door frame 14 has been opened, a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has started, and a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has been completed are individually sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Will be sent to.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a history setting process in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2701). Specifically, the number of correspondence-related areas in the correspondence-relationship memory 116 in which information other than the information indicating that the correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o are blank is stored is specified, and the identification thereof is specified. Set the information of the specified number in the confirmation target counter. In the present embodiment, information indicating that any of the ball entry portions is supported is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the opening / closing execution mode is started in the eighth correspondence area 123h. Corresponding information is stored, information corresponding to the end of the open / close execution mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and information corresponding to the start of the high frequency support mode is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j. Information corresponding to the end of the high frequency support mode is stored in the 11th correspondence area 123k, and information corresponding to the opening start of the front door frame 14 is stored in the 12th correspondence area 123l. , Information corresponding to the end of opening of the front door frame 14 is stored in the thirteenth correspondence area 123m. Therefore, in step S2701, "13" is set in the confirmation target counter.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2702). When the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is the confirmation target of the numerical information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the confirmation target of the numerical information. ..

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, the RTC information which is the date information and the time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S2703). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2704). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 currently being written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S2703 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence relation information is read from the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter, and the correspondence relation information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the nth correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o are the targets for reading the correspondence-related information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "10", the tenth correspondence area 123j is the target for reading the correspondence information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence. Information is to be read out.

After that, the value of the target pointer is added by 1 (step S2705). Specifically, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read, and the numerical information is added by 1. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer information after the 1 addition exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 (step S2706).

When the maximum value is exceeded (step S2706: YES), various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2707). In various arithmetic processes, the same processes as in steps S1402 to S1409, steps S141 to S1413, and steps S1415 to S1417 of the external output process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, various parameters of the calculation result and information on the total time are written in the calculation result memory 631 (step S2708). In this case, if the calculation result memory 631 already stores information on other calculation results, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

After that, the status information takeover process is executed (step S2709). In the takeover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, whether the current state is in the open / close execution mode, whether the high frequency support mode is in the high frequency support mode, and whether the front door frame 14 is open. It is determined whether or not it is. Then, the state information is written to the management side RAM 114.

After that, the history memory 117 is cleared (step S2710). In the clearing process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is in the initialized state. Further, after executing the clearing process, the state information written in the management side RAM 114 is read out in step S2709. Then, when the state information indicating that the open / close execution mode is being stored is stored, the history information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in the open / close execution mode is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. At the same time as writing, the pointer information to be written is added by 1. In addition, when the status information indicating that the high frequency support mode is being stored is stored, the history information storage area corresponding to the pointer information to which the history information indicating that the high frequency support mode is being written is written. While writing to 125, the pointer information to be written is added by 1. Further, when the state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored, the history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open corresponds to the pointer information to be written. While writing to the history information storage area 125, the pointer information to be written is added by 1.

When a negative determination is made in step S2702, a negative determination is made in step S2706, or the process of step S2710 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S2711). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2712). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2712: NO), the processing after step S2702 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the value of the new confirmation target counter.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated when the history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the history information exceeds the upper limit of the number that can be stored in the history memory 117 and the operation of various parameters cannot be performed accurately.

Further, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all the history information is deleted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information that has already been calculated for various parameters from being calculated again for various parameters.

Further, even when the history memory 117 is initialized, the state information takeover process is executed. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the state information.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112 are different from those of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 641, a first state area 642, a second state area 643, and a third state area 644. Each of these areas 641 to 644 is provided with first to fifteenth counters 641a to 641o, 642a to 642o, 643a to 643o, and 644a to 644o. The first counters 641a to 644a of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The second counters 641b to 644b in each of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The third counters 641c to 644c of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourth counters 641d to 644d in each of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifth counters 641e to 644e in each area 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The sixth counters 641f to 644f of each area 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the seventh counters 641g to 644g of each area 641 to 644. The eighth counters 641h to 644h of each area 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth counters 641i to 644i of the areas 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The tenth counters 641j to 644j of each area 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 11th counters 641k to 644k of each area 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the 11th signal input to the 11th buffer 122k is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 12th counters 641l to 644l of each area 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the 12th signal input to the 12th buffer 122l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 13th counters 641m to 644m in each area 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the 13th signal input to the 13th buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 14th counters 641n to 644n of each area 641 to 644 store information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 122o is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the 15th counters 641o to 644o of the areas 641 to 644.

However, the measurement targets using the first to fifteenth counters 641a to 641o, 642a to 642o, 643a to 643o, 644a to 644o are the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operation. The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, to which a signal corresponding to the result of entering the ball into any of the mouth 33 and the second operating port 34 is input. Therefore, the eighth to eighth signals corresponding to the state information such as whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect, and whether or not the front door frame 14 is open are input. The 10 buffers 122h to 122j are excluded from the measurement target. Distinguishing whether or not these are measurement targets is performed based on the correspondence relation information stored in the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence relation memory 116.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a history setting process in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2801). Specifically, the number of correspondence-related areas in the correspondence-relationship memory 116 in which information other than the information indicating that the correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o are blank is stored is specified, and the identification thereof is specified. Set the information of the specified number in the confirmation target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, information other than the information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j as described above. Therefore, in step S2801, "10" is set in the confirmation target counter. To do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122o corresponding to the current confirmation target counters are buffers to which the state information signal is input (step S2802). Specifically, in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the values of the current confirmation target counters, the correspondence information includes information indicating that the open / close execution mode is in effect, information indicating that the high frequency support mode is in effect, and information indicating that the mode is in high frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not any of the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is stored is stored.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2802, the state information setting process is executed (step S2803). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the management side manages the information of the first state indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. It is stored in the RAM 114, and when the output state of the eighth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the first state is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the second state indicating that the high frequency support mode is in progress is stored in the management side RAM 114. When the output state of the ninth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the second state is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the third state indicating that the front door frame 14 is open. Is stored in the management side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information of the third state is erased from the management side RAM 114.

When a negative determination is made in step S2802, it is stored in a buffer among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o that corresponds to the value of the current confirmation target counter and in which a signal of information different from the state information is input. By confirming whether or not the numerical information displayed has been changed from "0" to "1", whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level. It is determined whether or not (step S2804). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2804, the corresponding total counter addition process is executed (step S2805). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 641a to 641o for totalization in the totalization area 641 of the history memory 117 is added by one. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth counter 641e for total is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 641a for total is the addition target. ..

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode (step S2806). In the case of the first state (step S2806: YES), the counter addition processing for the corresponding first state is executed (step S2807). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 642a to 642o for the first state in the first state area 642 of the history memory 117 is added by one. .. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth counter 642e for the first state is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 642a for the first state is the addition target. It is subject to addition.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode (step S2808). In the case of the second state (step S2808: YES), the counter addition processing for the corresponding second state is executed (step S2809). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 643a to 643o for the second state in the second state area 643 of the history memory 117 is added by one. .. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth counter 643e for the second state is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 643a for the second state is the addition target. It is subject to addition.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is open (step S2810). In the case of the third state (step S2810: YES), the counter addition processing for the corresponding third state is executed (step S2811). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 644a to 644o for the third state in the third state area 644 of the history memory 117 is added by one. .. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth counter 644e for the third state is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first counter 644a for the third state is the addition target. It is subject to addition.

When the process of step S2803 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S2804, when a negative determination is made in step S2810, or when the process of step S2811 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to 1. Subtract (step S2812). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2813). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2813: NO), the processing after step S2802 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the value of the new confirmation target counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the ball entry history of the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is described above. It is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but is stored as information on the number of times a game ball is detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 as compared with the configuration in which each history information is individually stored.

As described above, the configuration is such that the game balls are stored as the number of times information that the game balls are detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. Therefore, in the external output process (FIG. 40) in the present embodiment, the out port 24a such as step S1602 The process of calculating the number of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 such as step S1604, the process of calculating the number of game balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 such as step S1604, and the number of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 such as step S1605. It is not necessary to perform the calculation process and the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 such as step S1606. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

In the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 such as step S1603, the first to third counters 641a to 641c, 642a to 642c, 643a to 643c, and 644a to 644c are all general winning openings. Since it corresponds to 31, it is necessary to execute the process of summing the values of the first to third counters 641a to 641c, 642a to 642c, 643a to 643c, and 644a to 644c. In addition, the number of balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open in the open / close execution mode cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entered in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1612 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 40) in the present embodiment. Similarly, the number of balls entered in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open in the high frequency support mode cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entered in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1616 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 40) in the present embodiment.

<16th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the storage means for storing the history information is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 78 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in the present embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I / F 101, and a reading terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, and a management side RAM 114 as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117. Instead, the management IC 66 is provided with the calculation result memory 631 as in the twelfth embodiment. Since the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117, the history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is stored in the main RAM 65. That is, the main RAM 65, in which the information necessary for executing the program in the main CPU 63 is temporarily stored, is also used as the memory for storing the ball entry history. Then, the management IC 66 can access the main RAM 65 through the management I / F 111, and when a calculation trigger for various parameters occurs, the management IC 66 is accessed to read the ball entry history and read the reading. Various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history. The various calculated parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 631. When the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various parameters are provided to the reading device from the calculation result memory 631, but the ball entry history stored in the main RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device. ..

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a ball entry detection process in the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. The ball entry detection process is executed in step S211 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the 0th bit D0 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a 1 It is determined that the number of game balls has been detected (step S2901: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2902). The general winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 as a winning history. The value of the general winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 by the reading device. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the general winning counter is still high even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power cutoff state. It is stored in memory. After that, the value of the counter for 10 prize balls of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2903).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the first bit D1 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a 1 It is determined that the number of game balls has been detected (step S2904: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2905). After that, the value of the 10 prize ball counters of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2906).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the second bit D2 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a 1 It is determined that the number of game balls has been detected (step S2907: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2908). After that, the value of the counter for 10 prize balls of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2909).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the third bit D3 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one game is played by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that the sphere has been detected (step S2910: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the special electric winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2911). Further, the value of the special electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2912). The special electric winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 as a winning history. The value of the special electric winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 by the reading device. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the special electric winning counter is still high even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power cutoff state. It is stored in memory. After that, the value of the 15 prize ball counters of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2913).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the 4th bit D4 is switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a is used for 1 It is determined that the number of game balls has been detected (step S2914: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the first operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2915). Further, the value of the first operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2916). The first operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the first operation port 33 as a ball entry history. The value of the first operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 631 by the reading device. .. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the first operation counter even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power cutoff state. Is stored in memory. After that, the value of the one prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2917).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the fifth bit D5 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, the second operation port detection sensor 47a is used for 1 It is determined that the number of game balls has been detected (step S2918: YES). In this case, "1" is set in the second operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2919). Further, the value of the second operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2920). The second operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 as a ball entry history. The value of the second operation counter is cleared to "0" when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and the reading device reads various parameters from the calculation result memory 631. .. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the second operation counter even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power cutoff state. Is stored in memory. After that, the value of the one prize ball counter of the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2921).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the 6th bit D6 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one out port detection sensor 48a is used. It is determined that the game ball has been detected (step S2922: YES). In this case, the value of the out counter provided in the main RAM 65 is added by 1 (step S2923). The out counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the out port 24a as an entry history. The value of the out counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and the reading device reads various parameters from the calculation result memory 631. By the way, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the out counter is stored even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the power cutoff state. Be retained.

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the 7th bit D7 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one by the first gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that the game ball of (step S2924: YES) is detected. In this case, "1" is set in the first gate winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2925).

When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of "0" is stored for the 8th bit D8 has been switched to the situation in which the information of "1" is stored, one by the second gate detection sensor 50a It is determined that the game ball of (step S2926: YES) is detected. In this case, "1" is set in the second gate winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2927).

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is recorded in each ball entry section. It is stored in the main RAM 65 as the number of balls entering the ball. As a result, every time a ball enters any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a signal is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112. No need to output. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration for outputting a signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112.

In the present embodiment, when a calculation trigger occurs, the management side CPU 112 reads the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 from the general winning counter of the main RAM 65, and transfers the special electric winning counter to the special electric winning device 32 of the main RAM 65. The number of balls entered into the first operating port 33 is read from the first operation counter of the main RAM 65, the number of balls entered into the second operating port 34 is read from the second operating counter of the main RAM 65, and the number of balls entered into the second operating port 34 is read. The number of balls entering the out port 24a is read from the out counter of the main RAM 65. Then, the first parameter to the eighth parameter described in the first embodiment are calculated by using the read-out number of balls. However, the number of balls entered when the front door frame 14 is open and the number of balls entered when the front door frame 14 is closed are not measured. Therefore, the first parameter to the eighth parameter are calculated in a state including the number of balls entered when the front door frame 14 is open. Further, since the number of balls entered in the open / close execution mode and the number of balls entered in the high frequency support mode are not measured individually, the first parameter to the eighteenth parameter and the twenty-first parameter described in the first embodiment are not measured individually. ~ 26th parameter is not calculated. The calculated first parameter to eighth parameter are written in the calculation result memory 631. Then, when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all the parameters written at that time in the calculation result memory 631 are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 631 is cleared to "0".

The management IC 66 does not access the main RAM 65 independently, but the information on the number of each ball entered stored in the main RAM 65 as the entry history is transmitted to the management IC 66 by transfer control by the main CPU 63. It may be configured as such. In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent the event that the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 access the main RAM 65 at the same time.

<17th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the main control board 61, the type of signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112, and the method of storing the ball entry history in each ball entry section are different from those in the first embodiment. ing. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 80 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in the present embodiment. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 as in the first embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I / F 101, and a reading terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, a correspondence-related memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115. Also. In addition to the MPU 62, the main control board 61 is provided with a light emitting unit 651 for notification. The light emitting unit 651 for notification is directly controlled to emit light by the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66, and calculates various parameters by using the information of the ball entry history to each ball entry unit read from the history memory 117. Then, the light emitting state of the notification light emitting unit 651 is controlled according to the contents of the various calculated parameters. The light emitting unit 651 for notification is housed in the accommodation space of the board box 60a of the main control device 60. The board box 60a is transparently formed, and the light emitting state of the light emitting unit 651 for notification is displayed outside the board box 60a. A light emitting unit 651 for notification is provided so that visual confirmation can be performed from the above. As a result, the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 so that the main control device 60 can be visually confirmed, so that the light emitting unit 651 for notification does not require the opening work of the board box 60a. It is possible to visually confirm the light emitting state of.

FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

Signals of the same type as those in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the 16th buffer 122p. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. A signal is input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. Is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first actuating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the second actuating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The 6 signals are input, the 7th signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the 7th buffer 122g, and the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, and the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal. The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, but in the present embodiment, the signal corresponding to these open / close execution modes, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and the front The signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is not input to the input port 121. That is, no signal related to the ball entry history is input to the 8th to 15th buffers 122h to 122o.

What kind of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals is determined by receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is specified by the management side CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of the signal is executed when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, it is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 outputs to the 16th buffer 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is possible to specify that the instruction signal is input.

FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with counters 652a to 652o for the first to fifteenth buffers. The first buffer counter 652a stores information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The second buffer counter 652b stores information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The third buffer counter 652c stores information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourth buffer counter 652d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifth buffer counter 652e stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The sixth buffer counter 652f stores information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 7th buffer counter 652g stores information on the number of times the output state of the 7th signal input to the 7th buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eighth buffer counter 652h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth buffer counter 652i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The tenth buffer counter 652j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 11th buffer counter 652k stores information on the number of times the output state of the 11th signal input to the 11th buffer 122k has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 12th buffer counter 652l stores information on the number of times the output state of the 12th signal input to the 12th buffer 122l has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 13th buffer counter 652m stores information on the number of times the output state of the 13th signal input to the 13th buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 14th buffer counter 652n stores information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 15th buffer counter 652o stores information on the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 122o has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

However, the measurement target using the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o is any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g are input with signals corresponding to the result of entering the ball. Therefore, the 8th to 15th buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the measurement target. Distinguishing whether or not these are measurement targets is performed based on the correspondence relation information stored in the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence relation memory 116.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112. The history setting process is executed in step S1207 of the management process (FIG. 34).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S3001). Specifically, the number of correspondence-related areas in the correspondence-relationship memory 116 in which information other than the information indicating that the correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o are blank is stored is specified, and the identification thereof is specified. Set the information of the specified number in the confirmation target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, information other than the information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is blank is stored in the first to seventh response areas 123a to 123j as described above. Therefore, in step S3001, "7" is set in the confirmation target counter. To do.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the value of the current confirmation target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S3002). When the value of the confirmation target counter is "n", the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is the confirmation target of the numerical information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first buffer 122a is the confirmation target of the numerical information. ..

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the addition processing of the corresponding buffer counters 652a to 652o is executed (step S3003). In the addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the counters 652a to 652o of the first to fifteenth buffers of the history memory 117 is added by one. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth buffer counter 652e is the addition target, and if the confirmation target counter value is "1", the first buffer counter 652a is the addition target.

When a negative determination is made in step S3002, or when the process of step S3003 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S3004). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3005). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S3005: NO), the processing after step S3002 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the value of the new confirmation target counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the ball entry history of the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is described above. It is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but is stored as information on the number of times a game ball is detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 as compared with the configuration in which each history information is individually stored.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an external output process in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S1208 of the management process (FIG. 34).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 reaches the HI level (step S3101: YES), the output target counters provided in the management side RAM 114 are set to the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to Of the 652o, the management side CPU 112 sets the number of counters for which the number of times information is output (step S3102). Specifically, the number of correspondence-related areas in the correspondence-relationship memory 116 in which information other than the information indicating that the correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o are blank is stored is specified, and the identification thereof is specified. Set the information of the specified number in the confirmation target counter. In the present embodiment, as described above, information other than the information indicating that the blank is stored is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. Therefore, in step S3102, “7” is set in the output target counter. ..

After that, the correspondence information stored in the area corresponding to the value of the current output target counter among the 1st to 15th correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is read (step S3103), and the history is used. Of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o in the memory 117, the number of times information stored in the counter corresponding to the current value of the output target counter is read (step S3104). In this case, when the value of the output target counter is "n", the nth correspondence-related areas 123a to 123o are the reading targets of the correspondence-related information, and the n-th buffer counters 652a to 652o read the number of times information. Be the target. For example, if the value of the output target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the target for reading the correspondence information, the fifth buffer counter 652e is the target for reading the number of times information, and the value of the output target counter is If it is "1", the first correspondence area 123a is the target for reading the correspondence information, and the first buffer counter 652a is the target for reading the number of times information.

After that, the information output process is executed (step S3105). In the information output process, the combination of the correspondence information read in step S3103 and the number of times information read in step S3104 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads the number of times information about the correspondence information that is the output target this time.

After that, the value of the output target counter of the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S3106). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the output target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3107). When the value of the output target counter is 1 or more (step S3107: NO), the processes after step S3103 are executed for the output target corresponding to the value of the new output target counter. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3107, the values of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 652a to 652o are cleared to "0".

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the parameter management process executed by the main CPU 63. The parameter management process is executed after the management output process of step S221 is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18).

First, it is determined whether or not a calculation trigger for various parameters has occurred (step S3201). The calculation trigger is when the parameter management process is executed for the first time after the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and as in the eleventh embodiment, the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, and the special electric winning opening It occurs every time the total number of game balls entered into the device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 reaches 500 or more, which is the trigger reference number. Since the case where the parameter management process is first executed after the supply of operating power is started is set as the calculation trigger, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off and then turned on again to calculate various parameters. It is possible to easily generate an opportunity. Then, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3201, notification corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters is executed as described later. It becomes possible to grasp the entry mode of the game ball. In addition, it is possible to finely manage the entry mode of the game balls in the game area PA by configuring the calculation trigger to occur every time the total number of balls entered is 500 or more, which is the trigger reference number. It becomes.

When a calculation trigger occurs (step S3201: YES), the ball entry history is read from the counters for storing the ball entry history among the counters 652a to 652o for the first to fifteenth buffers of the history memory 117. Specifically, the numerical information of the first to seventh buffer counters 652a to 652g is read out. In this case, the main CPU 63 can recognize the buffer counters 652a to 652o to be read from the ball entry history by the program and data stored in the main ROM 64.

After that, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S3203). In the various calculation processes, various parameters are calculated by using the information on the number of winning balls read in step S3202 and the number of prize balls corresponding to the history of entering balls. The main CPU 63 has the program and data stored in the main ROM 64, and each ball entry history read in step S3202 is the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the first operating port 33. It is possible to specify which of the two operating ports 34 is supported, and it is also possible to specify the information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each ball entry history read in step S3202.

Specifically, the various parameters calculated in step S3203 are specifically described.
7th parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general""Number of prize balls for winning the prize opening 31" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning a prize") ・ Eighth parameter: K3 x "number of prize balls for winning a prize in the special electric winning device 32" / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "for winning a prize in the general winning opening 31""Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning the second operating port 34"") Is calculated.

After that, it is determined whether or not the various calculated parameters are in the first range (step S3204). When the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, affirmative determination is made in step S3204 assuming that the various calculated parameters are in the first range. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3204, the first notification state setting process is executed (step S3205). In the setting process, the light emitting unit 651 for notification is controlled to emit light so as to be in the first notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 651 is in a blue light emitting state.

When a negative determination is made in step S3204, it is determined whether or not the various calculated parameters are in the second range (step S3206). If only one of the conditions that the value of the 7th parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the 8th parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the various calculated parameters are the first. Assuming that there are two ranges, an affirmative determination is made in step S3206. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3206, the second notification state setting process is executed (step S3207). In the setting process, the light emitting unit 651 for notification is controlled to emit light so as to be in the second notification state. In this case, the light emitting unit 651 for notification is in a yellow light emitting state.

When a negative determination is made in step S3206, it means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, the third notification state setting process is executed (step S3208). In the setting process, the light emitting unit 651 for notification is controlled to emit light so as to be in the third notification state. In this case, the light emitting unit 651 for notification is in a red light emitting state.

The light emitting state set in step S3205, step S3207 or step S3208 is stopped until a new notification state is set for the notification light emitting unit 651 or the supply of operating power to the notification light emitting unit 651 is stopped. Continue until. Further, since the notification state of the notification light emitting unit 651 is stored and held in the main RAM 65 and the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and the notification light emitting unit Even if the 651 is turned off once, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed, the light emitting state corresponding to the type of notification state information stored in the main RAM 65 is set. The light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 651 is executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The ball entry history of the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is stored as history information as in the first embodiment. However, it is stored as information on the number of times the game ball is detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 as compared with the configuration in which each history information is individually stored.

A notification light emitting unit 651 for notifying the contents corresponding to various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 is provided. As a result, the contents corresponding to various parameters are notified by the pachinko machine 10 itself, so that the manager of the game hall or the like does not need to read the information stored in the history memory 117, but the game ball in the game area PA. It becomes possible to grasp the ball entry mode.

The main control board 61 housed in the board box 60a is provided with a light emitting unit 651 for notification together with the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to illegally access the communication path between the MPU 62 and the light emitting unit 651 for notification.

Calculation of various parameters and light emission control of the light emitting unit 651 for notification are executed not by the management side CPU 112 but by the main side CPU 63. This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the notification content in the notification light emitting unit 651.

When the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the first range, the first notification state is set, and when the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the second range, the second notification state is set, and the calculation results of various parameters are in the second notification state. When neither the first range nor the second range is supported, the third notification state is set. That is, the various parameters are not notified as they are, but the contents corresponding to the range including the various parameters are notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification light emitting unit 651 from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification light emitting unit 651.

Even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, immediately before the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped by continuing the power supply to the notification light emitting unit 651. The light emitting state may be maintained. In this case, even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, it is possible to grasp the entering mode of the game ball in the game area PA by checking the notification light emitting unit 651. ..

Further, instead of the configuration, when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the notification light emitting unit 651 is turned off, but when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. May be configured such that the light emitting unit 651 for notification is controlled to emit light so as to be in a light emitting state corresponding to the results of various parameters calculated before the supply of operating power is stopped. In this case, for example, by checking the notification light emitting unit 651 in the game hall before the start of business, it is possible to grasp the ball entering mode of the game ball on the immediately preceding business day.

The notification means for notifying the calculation results of various parameters is not limited to the configuration of the notification light emitting unit 651, and may be a display device having a display surface such as a symbol display device 41, or a speaker unit 54. It may be. Further, the signal corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters may be externally output to the hall computer HC of the game hall through the external terminal plate 97.

The special figure display unit 37a of the special figure unit 37 or the normal figure display unit 38a of the normal figure unit 38 may also have a function as a light emitting unit 651 for notification. For example, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, various parameters are calculated, and the calculation result is included in the first range, the second range, or any other of them as in the above embodiment. Immediately after the start of supply of the operating power, the special figure display unit 37a or the normal figure display unit 38a may be configured to execute the notification corresponding to the calculation result. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when the start condition of the variable display of the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a or the start condition of the variable display of the pattern on the normal figure display unit 38a is satisfied. The configuration may be such that it is temporarily interrupted when the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, and restarted when the variable display of the pattern is completed. According to this configuration, the special figure display unit 37a or the normal figure display unit 38a can also be used as the notification means for notifying the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA.

The notification light emitting unit 651 may be provided at a position where it can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are closed. For example, the light emitting unit 651 for notification may be provided at a position behind the pachinko machine 10 behind the window panel 52 and visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. In this case, it is possible to confirm the notification contents corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters without requiring the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14.

<18th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for providing the information of each ball entry result to the management IC 66 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for inputting the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. Further, the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. Further, the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. Further, the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. Further, the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. Further, the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

The first branch path SL21 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the second branch path SL22 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the third branch path SL23 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the fourth branch path SL24 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the fifth branch path SL25 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the sixth branch path SL26 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, the seventh branch path SL27 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without intervening processing by the main CPU 63. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes a process for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize the ball entry results of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 63.

Further, the branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist in the MPU 62. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to access the branch point and each branch route SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that cause an abnormal entry result to be input only to the management IC 66. ..

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the discharge adjusting means for periodically discharging the captured game ball B1 is provided above the first through gate 35, but the arrangement of the discharge adjusting means is not limited to this. Here, the discharge adjusting means includes the adjusting mechanism 180 in the first embodiment and the sixth embodiment, the adjusting mechanism 220 in the second embodiment, the adjusting mechanism 330 in the third embodiment, and the fourth embodiment. 430, the adjustment mechanism 530 in the fifth embodiment, and the adjustment mechanism 620 in the seventh embodiment. For example, instead of the second through gate 39 in each of the above embodiments, there is an opening through which a game ball can enter, and the first opening that is open upward can be switched between an open state and a closed state. In a game board provided with a second opening which is an opening provided with a possible opening / closing means, the discharge adjusting means may be arranged above the first opening and the second opening.

Specifically, in the game board, the first opening and the second opening are provided on the right side of the game area. The discharge adjusting means is located above the first opening, and only the game balls discharged from the discharge adjusting means can enter the first opening. The opening / closing means of the second opening prohibits the game ball from entering the second opening in the closed state. When the game ball is taken into the discharge adjusting means, the game ball is discharged from the discharge adjusting means and enters the first opening, the opening / closing means is switched from the closed state to the open state, and the first of the game balls. 2 The ball can enter the opening. The open state of the opening / closing means is continued for a predetermined period, and when the number of times the game ball enters the second opening in the predetermined period reaches a predetermined number of times, a privilege advantageous to the player is given.

In order to shift the opening / closing means from the closed state to the open state, it is necessary for the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the discharge adjusting means. Further, in order for the game ball to enter the second opening a predetermined number of times, it is necessary for the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the second opening. In this way, the player aims and launches the game ball, and when a predetermined result is obtained, the player is given a privilege that is advantageous to the player, thereby increasing the player's awareness of participation. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, by limiting the timing of entering the game ball into the first opening by using the discharge adjusting means, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the opening / closing means is frequently opened. That is, by using the discharge adjusting means, it is possible to appropriately manage the interval at which the opening / closing means shifts to the open state.

(2) The discharge adjusting means in each of the above embodiments may be provided above the first operating port 33, and there may be only one type of lottery mode by the winning / failing lottery means. Here, the discharge adjusting means includes the adjusting mechanism 180 in the first embodiment and the sixth embodiment, the adjusting mechanism 220 in the second embodiment, the adjusting mechanism 330 in the third embodiment, and the fourth embodiment. 430, the adjustment mechanism 530 in the fifth embodiment, and the adjustment mechanism 620 in the seventh embodiment. Specifically, the main CPU 63 drives and controls the discharge adjusting means so that the discharged game ball B1 can be discharged toward the first operating port 33 in a 1 sec cycle. .. The main ROM 64 stores a winning / failing determination table in which a determination value for which a big hit is to be won in the winning / failing determination process is set. As described above, the winning / failing determination process is a process for determining whether or not the hold information corresponds to the jackpot winning, and is executed in the special figure special electric control process (step S215) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18). Processing. In the winning / failing determination table, (1250 × n-5) to (1250 × n) are set as the determination values to be the target of the jackpot winning. Here, the variable n is a natural number from 1 to 52. The probability that the winning / failing determination process will be executed and the jackpot will be won is approximately 1/210. In the first operating port 33, the jackpot target period in which the hold information acquired by winning the game ball B1 is the target of the jackpot winning occurs in a cycle of 5 sec and continues for 24 msec. If the dischargeable period in the discharge adjusting means does not correspond to the jackpot target period, the jackpot result will not be obtained in the hit / fail determination process. In this case, by updating the initial value of the hit random number counter C1 (FIG. 13), there is a possibility that the dischargeable period corresponds to the jackpot target period. When the dischargeable period corresponds to the jackpot target period, the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning / failing determination process is high. Specifically, when the game ball B1 is discharged from the discharge adjusting means toward the first operating port 33 without fail in a 1-sec cycle, the first operating port 33 is awarded once every five times. You will be eligible for a big hit. In this way, the emission adjusting means creates a situation in which a jackpot winning is likely to occur in the winning / failing determination process and a situation in which the big hit is not generated. It is possible to attract interest and improve the interest of the game.

(3) The configuration for preventing the game ball B1 from rising and stopping, which has been described in each of the above embodiments, may be applied to the member for allocating the game ball B1 to any of the two passages.

Specifically, the game board is provided with a distribution winning device. A winning lottery is executed when a prize is generated in either the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Of these, if a small win is won in the winning lottery executed with the winning of the second operating port 34 as a trigger, the mode shifts to the distribution execution mode. In the distribution execution mode, when a V prize is generated, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed.

The distribution winning device is provided with an upstream passage, and the upstream passage is branched into a V winning passage and a discharging passage in the branch space. The upstream passage, the V winning passage, and the discharge passage have a passage cross section that allows one game ball B1 to pass through and prevents a plurality of game balls B1 from passing through at the same time. There is. Around the branch space, the upstream passage is formed in a straight line downward. Further, around the branch space, the entrance of the discharge passage is provided directly below the exit of the upstream passage. Therefore, when the game ball B1 that has flowed straight down the upstream passage in the vicinity of the branch space goes downward as it is, it enters the discharge passage.

In the branch space, a switching member is provided below the upstream passage and above the discharge passage. The switching member includes a rotating shaft, a plate-shaped switching piece that rotates around the rotating shaft from an initial position to a displacement position, and switching from the initial position to the displacement position of the switching piece based on a signal from the main CPU 63. It also has a switching drive unit that switches from the displacement position to the initial position. When the switching piece is in the initial position, the switching piece is in the first state extending downward. In the first state, the discharge passage is opened upward. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has flowed down the upstream passage enters the discharge passage.

On the other hand, when the switching piece is in the displacement position, the switching piece is in the second state extending diagonally forward to the left. In the second state, since the switching piece exists above the discharge passage, the game ball B1 discharged from the upstream passage comes into contact with the switching piece. In the second state, the contact surface of the switching piece with the game ball B1 is inclined downward toward the front. Therefore, the course of the game ball B1 in contact with the switching piece moves forward. The V winning passage is formed in such a manner that the game ball B1 in contact with the switching piece in the second state enters in front of the discharging passage. Therefore, when the switching drive unit switches the switching piece to the displacement position, the game ball B1 discharged from the upstream passage is guided to the V winning passage. The distribution winning device includes a detection sensor for detecting the game ball B1 flowing down the V winning passage, and when the game ball B1 is detected by the detection sensor, a V winning is given.

The V winning passage is separated from the discharge passage by a plate-shaped partition member. The displacement position of the switching piece is set so that the distance from the free end of the switching piece at the displacement position to the upper end of the partition member is narrower than the diameter of the game ball B1. As a result, in the second state in which the switching piece is in the displacement position, the game ball B1 is prevented from entering the discharge passage through the gap between the switching piece and the partition member. In this configuration, while the switching piece is switching from the initial position to the displacement position, an intermediate state occurs in which the distance from the free end of the switching piece to the upper end of the partition member is substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball B1. In the intermediate state, if the game ball B1 discharged from the upstream passage enters the gap between the rotating switching piece and the partition member, the game ball B1 may be sandwiched between the switching piece and the partition member and stop. There is.

The configuration described in the first embodiment can be applied to this configuration. Specifically, the distribution winning device is provided with an escape passage adjacent to the discharge passage on the left side of the discharge passage. The entrance of the escape passage is provided at a position lower than the upper end of the partition member. The contact surface of the switching piece with the game ball B1 is inclined rearward toward the left, and the wall surface on the discharge passage side near the upper end of the partition member is inclined forward toward the left. That is, the two surfaces in contact with the game ball B1 in the intermediate state both have an inclination for pushing the game ball B1 toward the escape passage. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is in contact with the switching piece and the partition member in the intermediate state, the game ball B1 is pushed out into the escape passage as the switching piece moves to the displacement state. As a result, in the distribution winning device, it is possible to avoid pinching the game ball B1 without causing the game ball B1 to rise and stop. The escape passage merges with the discharge passage at a position in the middle of the discharge passage. When the game ball B1 is pushed toward the escape passage in the intermediate state in which the switching piece is switched, the game ball B1 flows down the escape passage and is guided to a position in the middle of the discharge passage. The game ball B1 guided to the escape passage is not detected by the detection sensor provided in the V winning passage. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is pushed out into the escape passage in the intermediate state, the V prize is not generated as in the case where the game ball B1 flows down the discharge passage.

The configuration described in the third embodiment can be applied to this configuration. Specifically, when the game ball B1 is in contact with the blade member 343 and the upright wall 352, the blade member 343 rotates around the rotation shaft 344 as the rotating body 340 rotates, and the blades A configuration can be applied in which the member 343 takes a displacement position to avoid pinching the game ball B1. Specifically, the plate-shaped switching piece includes a fixed portion on the fixed end side and a rotatable portion on the free end side. A rotating shaft is provided on the free end side of the plate-shaped fixing portion, and the plate-shaped rotatable portion is connected to the fixing portion in a manner that allows it to rotate around the rotating shaft. When no external force is applied, the surface of the fixed portion of the switching piece is coplanar with the surface of the rotatable portion. The rotatable portion rotates downward when pushed downward from the outside, and returns to the original state by the restoring force of the urging member when the force from the outside is removed. When the game ball B1 is in contact with the switching piece and the partition member in the intermediate state, the rotatable portion rotates downward as the switching piece moves to the displacement position. The restoring force of the urging member is not strong enough to prevent the game ball B1 in contact with the partition member and the rotatable portion from falling downward due to its own weight. Therefore, the game ball B1 that is temporarily in contact with the partition member and the rotatable portion moves downward due to its own weight and enters the discharge passage without being sandwiched and stopped. In the switching piece at the displacement position, the protruding length of the fixed portion upward in the discharge passage is a length that allows the game ball B1 to be guided to the V winning passage by the fixed portion alone. When the game ball B1 that has fallen from above collides with the rotatable portion while the switching piece is in the displacement position, the rotatable portion rotates downward. However, the distance from the free end of the rotatable portion to the upper end of the partition member is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B1 in both the non-rotating state and the rotating state. Therefore, when the switching piece is completely moved to the displacement position, the game ball B1 does not enter the gap between the free end of the rotatable portion and the upper end of the partition plate and enter the discharge passage. .. As described above, the game ball B1 has a structure in which the switching piece is provided with a fixed portion, a rotating shaft, and a rotatable portion, and the rotatable portion is rotatable around the rotating shaft. It is possible to enter the discharge passage without climbing and stopping.

(4) In a gaming machine in which the second operating port 34 is opened when the gaming ball B1 that has entered the trigger generator is detected, the gaming ball B1 described in each of the above embodiments with respect to the trigger generator. A configuration may be applied to prevent the rise and stop of the.

Specifically, the game area PA is composed of an upper region PA1, a left region PA2, a right region PA3, and a lower region PA4 of the variable display unit 36. The lower region PA4 is provided with a first operating port 33, and the right region PA3 is provided with an opportunity generator and a special opening device.

In the right region PA3, the special opening device is located below the trigger generator. The trigger generator includes a rotating body, an accommodating portion for accommodating the rotating body, a trigger generating drive unit for rotating the rotating body based on a signal from the main CPU 63, and a game ball in the trigger generating region of the trigger generating device. It is equipped with an opportunity occurrence detection sensor that detects B1. The containment section is provided with an upright wall for partitioning the containment space. At the upper part of the accommodating portion, the standing wall on the left side and the standing wall on the right side are separated from each other, and the gap between the standing wall on the left side and the standing wall on the right side serves as the entrance of the trigger generator. The entrance of the trigger generator is an opening that is open upward, and the width of the entrance is set to be one size wider than the diameter of the game ball B1.

The game ball B1 can enter the trigger generator from the entrance. With the rotation of the rotating body, at the entrance of the trigger generator, a state in which the game ball B1 can enter and a state in which the game ball B1 cannot enter occurs. The special opening device includes a special opening that is open upward, an opening / closing member that can open and close the special opening, and a main CPU 63. It is provided with a special drive unit that opens or closes the special opening by driving the opening / closing member based on the signal.

The main CPU 63 executes a big hit lottery when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33. The right will be generated when the big hit result is obtained in the big hit lottery. When the game ball B1 enters the trigger generator and the game ball B1 is detected by the trigger generation detection sensor in the right generation state, the opening / closing period of the special opening device is started. Then, the game ball B1 is paid out when the ball enters the special opening that has been opened. When a preset reference time elapses while the opening / closing operation of the special opening device is being executed, or when the number of times the ball enters the special opening reaches the reference number, the opening / closing of the special opening device is opened / closed. The period ends. Of these, if a preset reference time elapses while the opening / closing operation of the special opening device is being executed, the special opening device executes the second opening / closing operation.

In this configuration, when a rotating body having one or more recesses capable of accommodating the game ball B1 is used as the rotating body of the trigger generator, the rotating body and the rotating body stand up when the game ball B1 enters the trigger generator. It may get caught in the wall. On the other hand, the configuration described in the first embodiment can be applied to this configuration.

Specifically, on the surface of the game board, a passage entrance is provided at a position corresponding to the upper part of the trigger generator. Further, the game board is formed with an escape passage for allowing the game ball B1 that has entered from the entrance of the passage to escape both backward and downward. The rotating body has a disk shape, and the peripheral surface of the rotating body excluding the recessed portion is inclined in the axial direction toward the rear. Therefore, the game ball B1 that has not been taken into the recessed portion at the upper part of the trigger generator is guided to the passage entrance along the inclination of the peripheral surface of the rotating body. In the upper part of the trigger generator, the contact surface with the game ball B1 on the upright wall is inclined to the right toward the rear. Also, the rotating body rotates clockwise. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is pressed against the upright wall from the rotating body at the upper part of the trigger generator, the game ball B1 is guided along the inclination of the upright wall and escapes toward the rear passage entrance. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is in contact with the rotating body and the upright wall at the upper part of the trigger generator, the game ball B1 enters the passage entrance as the rotating body rotates. In this way, by applying the configuration for avoiding the pinching of the game ball B1 to the upper part of the trigger generator, the game ball B1 rises or stops when the game ball B1 enters the trigger generator. Is being avoided. The trigger generation detection sensor is provided inside the trigger generator, and can detect only the game ball B1 taken inside the trigger generator. Therefore, even if the game ball B1 enters the passage entrance, the entry does not trigger the opening / closing operation of the special opening device.

The configuration described in the second embodiment can be applied to this configuration. Specifically, when the game ball B1 is in contact with the rotating body 230 and the upper right standing wall 252, the upper right standing wall 252 rotates around the rotation shaft 254 to take in the game ball B1. The possible configurations can be applied. Specifically, the upright wall includes a rotation shaft and a movable upright wall that can rotate around the rotation shaft. The movable upright wall is located above the trigger generator and defines the right end of the entrance to the trigger generator. The rotating body rotates clockwise. At the upper part of the trigger generator, the game ball B1 trying to enter the trigger generator may be in contact with the rotating body and the movable upright wall. In this case, the game ball B1 is pushed toward the right side where the movable standing wall exists as the rotating body rotates. By rotating the movable standing wall around the rotation axis, the force of the rotating body pressing the game ball B1 against the movable standing wall can be released. Further, the contact surface of the movable upright wall with the game ball B1 is inclined downward to the right. Therefore, when the game ball B1 is pushed toward the contact surface by the rotating body, the movable standing wall rotates to the right and the game ball B1 is guided by the inclination of the contact surface with the rotating standing wall. It is taken into the trigger generator. By avoiding pinching the game ball B1 that is temporarily in contact with the rotating body and the movable upright wall, it is possible to avoid the game ball B1 from rising and stopping. When the game ball B1 taken into the trigger generation device is detected by the trigger generation detection sensor after the rotating body is temporarily in contact with the movable standing wall, the opening / closing operation of the special opening device is performed. It will be an opportunity to start.

(5) The adjusting mechanism (adjusting mechanism 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) in each of the above embodiments has a fixed discharge period during which the game ball B1 can be discharged toward the first through gate 35. It is not limited to the configuration that occurs in. For example, the adjustment mechanism is a game ball within a range in which the normal electric holding area HA (FIG. 13) does not exceed the upper limit number (4 pieces) of numerical information that can be held even at a timing other than the dischargeable period that occurs at a fixed cycle. B1 may be configured to be discharged toward the first through gate 35.

In the first embodiment, in addition to the four recessed portions 183b to 183e (FIG. 4) arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the rotating body 183 may be provided with an additional fifth recessed portion. Good. The fifth recessed portion has the same shape and size as the first recessed portion 183b, the second recessed portion 183c, and the third recessed portion 183d, and one game ball B1 can be taken in. In this case, the game ball B1 discharged from any of the four recessed portions 183b to 183e wins a prize in the first through gate 35 in a 1 sec cycle, and is taken into the fifth recessed portion and discharged in a 1 sec cycle. The game ball B1 discharged at a timing other than the possible period enters.

In the fifth embodiment, the adjustment unit 546 (FIG. 55) may be opened in a cycle of 0.5 sec. In the low-frequency support mode winning continuous period, if the game ball B1 enters the first through gate 35, the winning of the opening of the public power will occur once every two times. be able to. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the open state of the adjusting unit 546 (FIG. 55) generated in a cycle of 1 sec may be continued for 0.5 sec, which is longer than that of the fifth embodiment. In this case, a plurality of game balls B1 can be ejected toward the first through gate 35 in one open state. Here, the shortest firing interval in the game ball launching mechanism 27 is 0.6 sec. Therefore, in one open state, the upper limit of the numerical information that the general electric holding area HA can hold the number of game balls B1 that are discharged at a timing outside the original dischargeable period and win the first through gate 35. It can be contained within the range that does not exceed the number.

The game ball B1 shall enter the first through gate 35 within a range not exceeding the upper limit of the numerical information that can be held by the normal electric holding area HA even at a timing other than the dischargeable period that occurs in a 1-sec cycle. As a result, even during the non-winning continuous period of the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to generate a single non-continuous open-air winning. For this reason, even if the non-winning continuous period of the low frequency support mode continues for a long time, the player's expectation for the winning continuous period is raised every time the public electric open winning occurs, and the player does not get bored. can do.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, all of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are configured to store history information (or ball entry history). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is the storage target of the history information. It may be configured as. For example, the configuration may be such that only the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the second operating port 34 are the storage targets of the history information, and only the general winning opening 31 is the storage target of the history information. May be good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball in a predetermined period for the ball entry portion for which the history information is stored.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, information corresponding to the winning result of the game ball is transmitted in correspondence with each of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and the third winning opening detection sensor 44a. Although the configuration is such that the signal paths 118a to 118c are set, the information corresponding to the ball entry result for the same type of ball entry unit is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to the ball entry result is the same type of ball entry unit. There may be a configuration in which a plurality of ball entry detection sensors are present and a plurality of ball entry detection sensors are present in accordance with the existence of a plurality of sensors, or a configuration in which one type of information is transmitted may be used. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

(8) In the first embodiment or the like, correspondence information indicating the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in advance in the management IC 66. In this case, it is not necessary to execute the process for causing the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, so that the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

(9) In the first embodiment or the like, transmission of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the configuration is such that the operation power is supplied to the main CPU 63 at the start of supply, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 can be bidirectionally communicated with each other, and the management IC 66 can be used. When a signal requesting transmission of the relational information is received, the correspondence relational information may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is sent to the main CPU 63. Even if the supply of operating power is stopped, the memory 116 for correspondence is stored and held. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which correspondence information is transmitted.

(10) In the first embodiment or the like, transmission of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the configuration is such that the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the detection result information of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a are used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the correspondence information is mainly used. A configuration may be configured in which a dedicated signal path for transmission from the side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is provided. As a result, the management IC 66 can grasp which type of information is being received from the main CPU 63 by the types of buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

(11) In the first embodiment or the like, information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63, but the configuration is limited to this. Instead, information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 based on the history information may be transmitted to the main side CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute the notification control of the notification means as in the seventeenth embodiment in order to perform the notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters. When the main CPU 63 transmits a command corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters to the voice emission control device 81, the display light emission unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41 are used to change the contents of the various parameters. The configuration may be such that the corresponding notification is executed.

(12) When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, various parameters are calculated by the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, and the parameters are calculated. The contents of various parameters may be notified by using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, the symbol display device 41, and the like. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball entering mode of the game ball in the game area PA on the immediately preceding business day was normal at the start of business of the game hall.

(13) If various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 cannot start the game until the prohibition release operation is performed. May be. As a configuration for preventing the start of the game, for example, the launch of the game ball may be prohibited, the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a may be disabled, and the first operating port may be disabled. Even if a prize is won in the 33 or the second operating port 34, the winning / failing determination process may not be executed. Further, the prohibition release operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again with the RAM erasing switch turned on, and can be operated when the game machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. It may be the operation of the operating means. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the ball entering mode of the game ball in the game area PA is an abnormal mode.

(14) Although the history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, the calculation of various parameters using the history information is performed by either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. May not be executed. In this case, the history information is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and the operator of the reading operation executes the calculation of various parameters using the read history information. Often, the reading device may be configured to perform operations on various parameters using the read history information. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

(15) The management IC 66 may not be provided, and the main CPU 63 may have a function of executing storage processing of history information and a function of calculating various parameters in each of the above embodiments, and the payout side may be provided. The configuration may be provided by the CPU 92, or the configuration may be provided by the voice emission control device 81. When the payout side CPU 92 or the voice emission control device 81 is provided with these functions, the information of the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control subject having the functions. It will be.

(16) The management IC 66 is provided with a power supply separate from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters using the history information. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that history information or information of various parameters can be output. As a result, the history information and various parameters can be read by the reading device even when the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped.

(17) The reading terminal 102 used for reading the program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters by the reading device, but the configuration is limited to this. The terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters by the reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters may be provided on the MPU 62, or may be provided at a position different from the MPU 62 on the main control board 61.

(18) The correspondence-related memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 631 in each of the above embodiments are not limited to the configuration provided as the non-volatile storage means such as the flash memory, for example, these memories. One of 116, 117, and 131 is provided as a volatile storage means that requires power supply to store and hold information, and by supplying backup power to the memory, operating power to the main CPU 63 is provided. The information may be stored and retained even if the supply of the above is stopped. In this case, a dedicated backup power device may be provided for the memory, and the backup power is supplied to the memory from the power supply / emission control device 78 that supplies the backup power to the main RAM 65. May be good.

(19) The game ball is not limited to the configuration in which various parameters are calculated using the history information, and the history information is not stored and retained, and the game ball can be played by any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. The configuration may be such that various parameters are calculated and updated each time a new detection is made. In this case, although the calculation frequency of various parameters is high, it is possible to extract various parameters at arbitrary timings.

(20) The management IC 66 is not limited to a configuration in which the management side CPU 112 is provided as a general-purpose CPU and the history information storage process and various parameter calculation processes are executed based on the programs and data stored in the management side ROM 113. A hard circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66. Specifically, for example, in the case of the first embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that the game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a. , The correspondence information corresponding to the buffer receiving the signal is stored in the history memory 117 from the correspondence memory 116, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. To do. Further, for example, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that the game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a, the hardware circuit receives the signal. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is added by 1. Further, when the calculation trigger in the first embodiment or the like occurs, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters by using the history information at that time. Further, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 102 occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters as calculation results and externally outputs history information.

(21) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the detection result information of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored as history information, the configuration in which the transition to the open / close execution mode is stored as history information is also possible. Often, the configuration may be such that the transition timing and the end timing to the open / close execution mode are stored as history information, or the transition to the high-frequency support mode may be stored as history information, and a predetermined abnormality may be obtained. It may be configured that the occurrence of is stored as history information. Further, the transition probability to the open / close execution mode may be calculated by using the history information as described above, or the transition probability to the high frequency support mode may be calculated, and a predetermined abnormality may occur. The configuration may be such that the frequency of occurrence is calculated. Then, the history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device.

(22) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as separate substrates, or may be provided as separate control devices.

(23) In the first embodiment or the like, the number of balls entered into the out port 24a is measured, while the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the first operating port 33 are measured. The history information including the RTC information may be stored with respect to the payout of the prize ball of the game ball such as the second operating port 34 and the entry into the privilege trigger entry section that triggers the winning / failing determination process. This makes it possible to extract the entry history of the game ball into the privilege trigger entry section, and calculate the frequency of entry of the game ball into each privilege trigger entry section with respect to the total number of game balls discharged. Become.

(24) The configuration may include items other than those in each of the above embodiments as targets to be left as history information. For example, at least one of the timing when the lower plate 56a is full, the timing when the full tank is started, and the timing when the full tank is released may be stored as history information, and the tank 75 may be stored. At least one of the timing when the ball-free state is started, the timing when the ball-free state is released, and the timing when the ball-free state is released may be stored as history information, and the payout device 76 is in an abnormal state. That is, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is released may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

(25) In the first embodiment or the like, the configuration is set in advance at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 on the management side I / F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 when the type identification command is transmitted from the main CPU 63. It may be configured. In this case, it is not necessary to set in advance the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p in the management IC 66.

(26) The number of balls entered into a predetermined entry portion generated in a situation where the front door frame 14 is open is stored as history information, and the number of balls entered by using the history information is stored. May be configured to be output to the reader externally. As a result, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry portion in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state, and it is possible to grasp the presence or absence of fraud. Further, the number of balls entered into a predetermined ball entry portion generated in a situation where the front door frame 14 is open is calculated when a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and the calculated number of balls entered is an abnormal number. In that case, the abnormality notification may be executed. This makes it possible to deal with fraudulent acts in which the front door frame 14 is illegally opened to allow a game ball to enter a predetermined ball entry portion.

(27) The management IC 66 may be configured to transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when it is operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether or not the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(28) In the first embodiment or the like, the order in which the management side CPU 112 executes the confirmation processing of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o may be opposite to that in the first embodiment or the like. In this case, the order in which the main CPU 63 executes the change processing of the output state of each signal and the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the confirmation processing of the buffers 122a to 122o are the same.

(29) When the information stored in the main ROM 64 is output to the outside by using the reading terminal 102, one of the program and the data may be selectively output to the outside, and a predetermined program may be used. It may be configured so that only can be output to the outside. In this case, the information to be analyzed can be selectively read by the reading device. As a configuration for selectively outputting information to the outside, the main CPU 63 selects information to be externally output from the selection information received from the reading device through the reading terminal 102, and outputs the selected information to the outside. Can be considered.

(30) The other information of the target to be externally output through the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 is not limited to the history information and various parameters, for example, when an abnormality occurs. May be configured to store the history information of the abnormality occurrence and output the stored history information to the outside through the reading terminal 102.

(31) Detection sensors 42a to 48a are individually provided for each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, and the detection sensors 42a to 48a are provided. The total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is grasped by totaling the number of game balls detected in the above-mentioned method, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, all the game balls discharged from the game area PA are not limited to this. A passage area through which the game balls of the above are passed one by one may be provided, and an discharge detection sensor for detecting the game balls passing through the passage area may be provided. In this case, it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA by using the detection result of the discharge detection sensor. Further, in the same configuration as in each of the above embodiments, a detection sensor for detecting the number of balls entered in each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. By providing 42a to 47a, it is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game balls entered into each entry portion to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA.

(32) Display control based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the voice emission control device 81 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The device 82 may be configured to control the voice emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the voice emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 60, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 60. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

(33) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the gaming machine body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

Historical information on the result of the lottery process of the winning combination executed when the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, for example, when one game is started based on the operation of the start lever. It may be configured to calculate the actual winning probability of each role by using the history information, and when a transition to a special game state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information and the history is stored. The information may be used to calculate the actual transition probability to the special gaming state, or the ratio of the number of staying games in the special gaming state to the total number of digested games may be calculated. Then, the history information and various parameters may be readable by a reading device, or the gaming machine itself may provide notification corresponding to the calculation results of the various parameters.

(34) The characteristic configurations of the first to eighteenth embodiments may be applied to each other in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the twelfth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the eighteenth embodiment may be combined, and the second embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the tenth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the fourteenth embodiment may be combined. Further, the configuration of the other embodiment may be applied in any combination to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to fifteenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A ball entry section (first through gate 35) through which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter.
A privilege granting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S705 and S706 in the main CPU 63) that grants the privilege on the condition that the game ball has entered the ball entry portion, and
With
As the control mode of the privilege grant status, a first mode (low frequency support mode) and a second mode (high frequency support mode) in which the privilege grant status is more likely to occur than the first mode are set. ,
Guidance means (adjustment mechanism 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) for guiding the game ball toward the ball entry portion, and
In the first mode, each guidance timing of the game ball guided by the guidance means corresponds to or corresponds to the grant trigger timing in which the game ball guided to the entry portion triggers the grant of the privilege. A predetermined situation generating means (a function of executing the processes of steps S312 and S313 in the main CPU 63) that causes a predetermined situation (winning continuous period) that facilitates easy operation, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A1, the first mode has a configuration in which the privilege is less likely to be granted as compared with the second mode. Therefore, in the first mode, the player's expectation that the privilege will be granted is low. In this configuration, as a situation that occurs in the first mode, a predetermined situation is provided in which the guidance timing of the game ball guided by the guidance means corresponds to the grant trigger timing or becomes easy to correspond. As a result, it is possible to give the player who is performing the firing operation of the game ball in the first mode a sense of expectation that a predetermined situation may occur. In the first mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by suppressing a decrease in the player's expectation that the privilege will be granted.

Feature A2. A ball entry section (first through gate 35) through which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter.
A privilege granting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S705 and S706 in the main CPU 63) that grants the privilege on the condition that the game ball has entered the ball entry portion, and
Guidance means (adjustment mechanism 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) for guiding the game ball toward the ball entry portion, and
Each guidance timing of the game ball guided by the guiding means at a predetermined time interval in the ball entry portion is the grant trigger timing in which the game ball guided to the ball entry portion triggers the grant of the privilege. A predetermined situation generating means (a function of executing the processes of steps S312 and S313 in the main CPU 63) that causes a predetermined situation (winning continuous period) to correspond to or easily correspond to
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A2, all or a part of the conditions for granting the privilege are satisfied when the guidance timing corresponds to the grant trigger timing or becomes a predetermined situation in which it becomes easy to correspond. The predetermined situation is a situation in which the possibility of granting a privilege occurs every time the guidance timing is reached, which is an advantageous situation for the player. By adopting a configuration in which a predetermined situation occurs, it is possible to make the player aware of the occurrence of the predetermined situation even when the predetermined situation is not present, and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the predetermined situation generating means causes the predetermined situation by changing the timing of granting the trigger.

According to the feature A3, when the grant trigger timing is changed and the guidance timing corresponds to the grant trigger timing, or when it becomes easier to respond, a predetermined situation occurs and the grant trigger timing is changed. When the guidance timing does not correspond to the grant trigger timing, the predetermined situation ends. By assuming that the predetermined situation occurs without warning, the player can always be aware of the predetermined situation. By always keeping the player's expectation for the occurrence of a predetermined situation high, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A4. The first update means (function of executing the process of step S202 in the general electric accessory release counter C4 and the main CPU 63) for updating and storing the numerical information, and
A second updating means (opening initial value counter C5, a function of executing the process of step S113 in the main CPU 63, in the main CPU 63) for updating and storing numerical information for updating the initial value of the first updating means. (Function to execute the process of step S204) and
With
The privilege granting means
Predetermined processing (Public electricity) using the numerical information stored in the first update means based on the judgment standard information (low frequency winning judgment value table T1) in which the numerical information corresponding to the grant trigger timing is set. Means for executing the open lottery) (a function of executing the process of step S705 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step S717 in the main CPU 63), and
In the predetermined process, a means for granting the privilege when the numerical information stored in the first update means becomes a predetermined grant result (Public electricity opening winning) which is numerical information corresponding to the grant trigger timing (Public electricity opening winning). A function of executing the processes of steps S410 and S411 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the processes of steps S803 to S807 in the main CPU 63), and
Is equipped with
The game according to feature A3, wherein the predetermined situation generating means causes the predetermined situation by setting numerical information stored in the second updating means as an initial value of the first updating means. Machine.

According to the feature A4, by setting the numerical information stored in the second updating means as the initial value of the first updating means, the timing of occurrence of the predetermined situation can be made irregular. By not knowing when the predetermined situation will occur, the player can always be aware of the predetermined situation. By always keeping the player's expectation for the occurrence of a predetermined situation high, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A5. The predetermined situation generating means is
Means (step S312 in the main CPU 63) for generating the predetermined situation by executing a predetermined change process for changing the temporal context between the guidance timing and the grant trigger timing each time a predetermined change timing is reached. And the function to execute the process of step S313),
In the predetermined situation, when the change timing comes, the extension means for extending the predetermined situation (a function of executing step S305 in the main CPU 63, a step in the main CPU 63) by forgoing the execution of the predetermined change process. Function to execute the processing of S712) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that

According to the feature A5, since the execution of the predetermined change process is postponed, the predetermined situation advantageous to the player is continued for a long time, and the predetermined situation can be made attractive. As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for a predetermined situation and improve the interest of the game.

Feature A6. Starting ball entry portions (first operating port 33,581, second operating port 34,582) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
A means for generating an advantageous state for the player (a function of executing the process of step S215 in the main CPU 63) on the condition that the game ball has entered the starting ball entry portion is at least one condition.
With
The starting ball entering portion is based on the first predetermined state (closed state of the universal electric accessory 34a) in which the game ball is difficult to enter or the ball cannot be entered, and the first predetermined state. Also equipped with acceptance control means (a function to execute the normal power control process in the main CPU 63) that can be switched to the second predetermined state (open state of the normal power accessory 34a) where the game ball can easily enter. ,
As the control mode of the start-in ball portion by the acceptance control means, there are a first mode (low frequency support mode) and a second mode (high frequency support mode) in which the second predetermined state is more likely to occur than the first mode. , Is set,
The privilege granting means executes a predetermined determination (Public electricity opening lottery) on the condition that a game ball has entered the ball entry portion, and in the predetermined determination, a predetermined determination result (Public electricity opening winning) is obtained. In that case, as the privilege, the means for setting the starting ball entry portion to the second predetermined state (a function of executing the processes of steps S407 to S411 in the main CPU 63) is provided.
Any one of the features A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined situation generating means causes the predetermined situation on the condition that the control mode of the starting ball entering portion is the first mode. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature A6, in the first mode, the starting ball entry portion is less likely to be in the second predetermined state as compared with the second mode. Therefore, in the first mode, the player's expectation that the game ball enters the starting ball entry portion is lower than in the second mode. On the other hand, by configuring the configuration in which a predetermined situation occurs in the first mode, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the game ball will enter the starting ball entry portion in the first mode. .. Since the predetermined situation occurs on condition that the mode is the first mode, the impression that the first mode is disadvantageous as compared with the second mode can be alleviated.

Feature A7. The probability of occurrence of the predetermined situation is such that when the control mode in the acceptance control means is the second mode, the first mode includes both the case where the predetermined situation is and the case where the control mode is not the predetermined situation. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the probability is set to be more advantageous to the player than in the case of.

According to the feature A7, when the entire first mode including both the case where the predetermined situation is set and the case where the predetermined situation is not set and the second mode are compared, the case where the second mode is set is the first mode. It is more advantageous for the player than in the case. By generating a predetermined situation in the first mode while maintaining the premise that the case of the second mode is more advantageous to the player than the case of the first mode, the game ball is started in the first mode. It is possible to prevent the player's expectation of entering the ball entering portion from being significantly reduced.

Feature A8. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player is provided.
In the game area, a first ball entry unit (first through) exists as the ball entry unit at a position where a ball can occur when the player performs a launch operation of the launch means in the first launch mode. The gate 35) and the second ball-entry portion (second ball-entry portion) (second) that exists at a position where a ball can occur when the player performs a launch operation of the launching means in a second launch mode different from the first launch mode. Through gate 39) and are provided,
The guiding means guides the game ball toward the first ball entry portion.
When the control mode in the acceptance control means is the first mode, it is more advantageous for the player to perform the firing operation in the first firing mode than to perform the firing operation in the second firing mode. The second mode is described in feature A7, wherein performing the firing operation in the second firing mode is more advantageous to the player than performing the firing operation in the first firing mode. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature A8, when there is only one ball entry section, the game ball is guided by the guiding means to enter the ball entry section even when the control mode in the acceptance control means is the second mode. Need to be done. Therefore, a game ball that has not been guided by the guiding means cannot enter the ball entry portion. On the other hand, by providing a second ball entry section different from the first ball entry section provided with the guiding means, in the second mode, the game ball can be played without going through the guiding means. 2 It is possible to enter the ball into the ball entry section. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which the predetermined determination is executed in the second mode.

In addition, by changing the launch mode according to the situation, the configuration is advantageous for the player, so that the player's awareness of participation is raised and the interest of the game is improved as compared with the configuration in which the same launch mode is continued. Can be planned.

Feature A9. When the predetermined determination result is obtained in the predetermined determination when the control mode in the acceptance control means is the second mode, the privilege granting means performs the predetermined determination in the case of the first mode. Any of the features A6 to A8, wherein the starting ball enters the second predetermined state in a manner in which the gaming ball is more likely to enter the starting ball than when the predetermined determination result is obtained. The gaming machine described in 1 or 1.

According to the feature A9, when a predetermined situation occurs in the first mode, which is originally more disadvantageous to the player than the second mode, each time the game ball enters the entry portion, the predetermined determination result is obtained in the predetermined determination. Become. Therefore, in the case of the first mode and the predetermined situation, the starting ball entry portion may be in the second predetermined state more frequently than in the case of the second mode. On the other hand, when the predetermined determination result in the second mode results in the predetermined determination result, the starting ball entering portion is in the second predetermined state, and when the predetermined determination in the first mode results in the predetermined determination result. In this configuration, the game ball is more likely to enter the starting ball entry section than in the mode in which the starting ball entry section is in the second predetermined situation. As a result, the frequency with which the game ball enters the starting ball entry section in the second mode and the frequency with which the game ball enters the starting ball entry section in the first mode and in a predetermined situation are determined. You can balance it.

Feature A10. The guiding means
Guidance units (near the intake port 185, near the intake port 262, upper parts of the adjustment mechanisms 330 and 430, near the adjustment unit 546) that the game ball flowing down the game area can reach.
Means for guiding a game ball that has reached the guidance portion toward the entry portion at a guideable timing (timing in which the intake is permitted) in which the guidance means can guide the game ball toward the entry portion. (Rotating bodies 183, 230, 340, 440) and
Discharge means (peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191) for discharging the game ball that has reached the guidance portion at a timing different from the guideable timing to a region different from the ball entry portion.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, characterized in that

According to the feature A10, since the game ball that has reached the guide portion can be discharged at a timing different from the guideable timing, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has not been taken into the guide means from staying in the vicinity of the guide portion. As a result, it is possible to keep the vicinity of the guide portion in a state in which the game ball that has reached the guide portion at the guideable timing is easily guided toward the entry portion.

Feature A11. The discharging means includes means (circumferential surfaces 188a to 191a of the blades 188 to 191) for discharging the game ball that has reached the guiding portion to the outside of the guiding means at a timing different from the guideable timing. The gaming machine according to feature A10.

According to the feature A11, the game ball that has reached the guide portion at a timing different from the guideable timing is discharged to the outside of the guide means by the guide portion, thereby suppressing the game ball from staying in the vicinity of the guide portion. be able to. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the guidance of the game ball to be guided to the entry portion of the game ball to be guided is hindered by the game ball that is not the guidance target in the guidance unit.

Feature A12. The discharging means is
A space in which the game ball can flow down, and a flow-down space provided around the guiding means in the game area (spaces provided on the left and right of the adjustment mechanisms 180, 430, 530, 620, and an adjustment mechanism). The space provided on the left side of 220) and
It is provided in the game area with an interval between the guiding means and the gaming ball guided to the guiding portion at a timing different from the guiding timing so that the gaming ball can flow down into the flowing space. , A ball guiding means (nail 24b, left side guide nail 291 and right side guide nail 292, downstream guide nail 371, guide nail 472) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward the guide portion.
The gaming machine according to the feature A10 or A11.

According to the feature A12, the possibility that the game ball stays in the vicinity of the guide portion is reduced by configuring the game ball that is guided by the guide portion and not taken into the guidance means to flow down the flow-down space toward the downstream. can do. Further, since the game ball can be guided to the guiding portion by the ball guiding means, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the gaming ball to be guided by the guiding means toward the entering portion is insufficient.

Feature A13. Any of the features A10 to A12, wherein the discharging means is provided with an auxiliary passage (escape passage 172) through which a game ball arriving at the guiding portion can enter at a timing different from the guideable timing. The gaming machine described in 1 or 1.

According to the feature A13, the game ball that has reached the guide portion at a timing different from the guideable timing is moved to another place by the auxiliary passage, so that the game ball reaches the guide portion and moves to another place. It is possible to prevent the game ball that has reached the guide portion from staying around the guide portion while preventing the game ball in the middle of the game from colliding with another game ball flowing down the game area.

Feature A14. The boundary on the rear side of the game area is defined by a plate-shaped area defining means (game board 24, 610).
The gaming machine according to feature A13, wherein the auxiliary passage allows the gaming ball to pass behind the front surface of the area defining means.

According to the feature A14, the member that partitions the auxiliary passage is configured to discharge the game ball that has reached the guidance portion at a timing different from the guideable timing toward the rear of the front surface of the area defining means. Can avoid colliding with another game ball flowing down the game area and disturbing the course of the game ball.

Feature A15. Described in feature A14, the auxiliary passage includes a passage outlet (passage outlet 173) for discharging a game ball flowing down the auxiliary passage toward the game area in front of the area defining means. Gaming machine.

According to the feature A15, if the game ball that has entered the auxiliary passage does not return to the game area, there is a possibility that the game ball that flows down the downstream of the guiding means will be insufficient. On the other hand, by configuring the game balls that have flowed down the auxiliary passage back to the game area from the passage exit, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of game balls that flow down the downstream of the guiding means will decrease.

Feature A16. The game area is prevented from colliding with the game ball discharged from the passage outlet toward the game area by the game ball flowing down the game area from the upstream of the passage outlet. The gaming machine according to feature A15, characterized in that a collision prevention means (exit roof 174) is provided for the purpose.

According to the feature A16, the game ball trying to return to the game area from the passage exit collides with the game ball flowing down from the upstream of the passage exit in the game area, and is returned to the auxiliary passage again. Can be blocked.

Feature A17. The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A16, wherein the movement of the gaming ball passing through the auxiliary passage is visible from the outside.

According to the feature A17, by making the movement of the game ball in the auxiliary passage visible from the outside, it is possible to avoid that the movement of the game ball cannot be visually followed as soon as the game ball enters the auxiliary passage. In particular, in the configuration in which the game ball returns to the game area after passing through the auxiliary passage, the player can continuously grasp the movement of the game ball so that the ball enters the auxiliary passage and cannot be seen once. The configuration can be such that the game ball does not suddenly return to the game area and does not cause a sense of discomfort.

Feature A18. The guiding means
The approach blocking means (left standing wall 181c, 181h, right standing wall 181d, upper right standing wall 252, left standing wall 261) that prevent the game ball flowing down toward the guiding means from entering the inside of the guiding means. , Standing wall 352),
A rotating means (rotating body) provided with a rotating means (recessed portions 183b to 183e, stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, blade member 343) capable of capturing and holding the game ball in the guiding means. 183,230,340,440),
A rotation control means (a function of executing the process of step S206 in the main CPU 63, an adjustment drive unit 184) for conveying the game ball taken into the guidance means by rotating the rotation means.
Is equipped with
The approach blocking means includes a take-in opening (take-in port 185) as an opening capable of taking in the game ball that has reached the guide portion inside the guide means.
The discharging means discharges a gaming ball that is in contact with both the rotating means and the approach blocking means at the intake opening so that the gaming ball enters the auxiliary passage. By this means, it is provided with avoidance means (first front surface 188b, second front surface 189b, third front surface 190b, fourth front surface 191b, right side standing wall 181d) for avoiding the game ball being pinched. Characteristic The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A17.

According to the feature A18, the game ball that is in contact with the rotating means and the approach blocking means at the intake opening is discharged so that the game ball enters the auxiliary passage. It is possible to avoid the game ball being pinched and stopped. Further, by avoiding the pinching of the game ball, it is possible to reduce the burden of maintenance that the manager of the game hall must perform.

Feature A19. When the rotating means rotates with respect to the game ball that is in contact with both the rotating means and the approach blocking means at the intake opening, the avoiding means of the auxiliary passage. The gaming machine according to feature A18, which is characterized by applying a force toward the entrance.

According to the feature A19, the rotation of the rotating means eliminates the state in which the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the approach blocking means at the intake opening. Therefore, a dedicated configuration for avoiding pinching of the game ball is not required. As a result, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost by avoiding the complicated configuration, and it is possible to secure the degree of freedom in arranging the guiding means by avoiding the increase in size of the guiding means.

Feature A20. The avoidance means is a means (front surface 188b) for applying a force containing a downward component to the game ball when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the approach blocking means. 191b) The gaming machine according to feature A18 or A19.

According to the feature A20, a force having a downward component is applied to the game ball in contact with both the rotating means and the approach blocking means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball in contact with both the rotating means and the approach blocking means is ejected upward and the flow of the upstream game ball is disturbed.

Feature A21. The discharging means includes a passage entrance (passage entrance 171) as an opening that allows the game ball to enter the auxiliary passage.
The taking-in means includes means (inclination of the inner wall of the recessed portions 183b to 183e) for preventing the gaming ball taken into the guiding means by the taking-in means from moving toward the entrance for the passage. The gaming machine according to any one of features A18 to A20.

According to the feature A21, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball taken in by the taking-in means is guided and enters the auxiliary passage from the passage entrance before reaching the ball entry portion. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls guided to the entry portion by the guiding means.

Feature A22. The guiding means
An intake opening (intake port 262) that allows a game ball that has flowed down toward the guiding means to enter the inside of the guiding means.
The opening partitioning means (upper right standing wall 252, left standing wall 261) that partitions the intake opening, and
Rotating means (rotating bodies 230, 340) that are rotatable and include transporting means (stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, blade member 343) that transport the game ball taken into the guiding means inside the guiding means. )When,
A rotation control means (a function of executing the process of step S206 in the main CPU 63, an adjustment drive unit 184) for conveying the game ball taken into the guidance means by rotating the rotation means.
The game ball is provided around the intake opening, and when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening partitioning means at the intake opening, the game ball is deformed and the game ball is in contact with the opening partitioning means. Deformation means (upper right standing wall 252, blade member 343, rotation shaft 254, 344) that makes it possible to release the force that tries to pinch the
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A21.

According to the feature A22, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball is sandwiched between the rotating means and the opening partitioning means and stops due to the deformation of the taking-in permission means around the taking-in opening.

Feature A23. The deforming means includes means (upper right standing wall 252, rotating shaft 254) that can release the force applied to the opening partitioning means by temporarily displaceing the opening partitioning means to a predetermined position. The gaming machine according to feature A22, which is characterized in that it is

According to the feature A23, when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening partitioning means and the game ball is pushed toward the opening partitioning means as the rotating means rotates, the opening is opened. By temporarily shifting the partitioning means to a predetermined position, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball is pinched and stopped.

Feature A24. The deforming means includes means (blade member 343, rotating shaft 344) that can release the force applied to the rotating means by temporarily displace a part of the rotating means to a specific position. The gaming machine according to the feature A22 or A23.

According to the feature A24, when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening partitioning means, and a force is applied to the rotating means and the opening partitioning means as the rotating means rotates. In addition, a part of the rotating means is temporarily displaced to a specific position to release the force for pinching the game ball, so that the situation where the game ball is pinched and stopped can be avoided.

Feature A25. The guiding means
A rotating means (rotating body) provided with a rotating means (recessed portions 183b to 183e, stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, blade member 343) capable of capturing and holding the game ball in the guiding means. 183,230,340,440),
A rotation control means (a function of executing the process of step S206 in the main CPU 63, an adjustment drive unit 184) for conveying the game ball taken into the guidance means by rotating the rotation means.
Release for releasing the game ball conveyed by the capture means toward the entry portion at a timing prior to the timing at which the vertical movement direction of the capture means switches from the downward direction to the upward direction. Means (exhaust ports 256,621) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A24.

According to the feature A25, in the case of the configuration in which the game ball conveyed by the capture means is discharged at the timing when the vertical movement direction of the capture means is switched from the lower direction to the upper direction, the game ball in the release means is released. If the release timing of the ball is delayed, the game ball conveyed by the capturing means may start to rise in the guiding means. On the other hand, by providing a configuration in which the game ball conveyed by the capture means is released at a timing prior to the timing at which the vertical movement direction of the capture means switches from the lower direction to the upward direction, the game is played. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball rises in the guiding means when the release timing of the ball is delayed.

Feature A26. The guiding means prevents the game ball taken into the guiding means and conveyed by the taking-in means from falling downward and being thrown out of the guiding means by the rotation of the rotating means. It is equipped with fall prevention means (left standing wall 181h, right standing wall 181d).
The release means is provided with a release opening (discharge port) provided in the fall prevention means so that the gaming ball conveyed in contact with the fall prevention means is released toward the outside of the guidance means. The gaming machine according to feature A25, which comprises 621).

According to the feature A26, the game ball is conveyed in contact with the fall prevention means, and when it reaches the discharge opening, it is discharged toward the outside of the guiding means. Since the position of the release opening in the fall prevention means is fixed, the position where the game ball is discharged from the guiding means can be the same every time. Further, since the timing at which the rotating means guides the game ball to the release opening is determined according to the rotation mode of the rotating means, the timing at which the game ball is released from the guiding means can be set as the timing set at the design stage.

Feature A27. The gaming machine according to feature A26, wherein the discharge opening has a discharge direction of a game ball discharged from the discharge opening toward the entry portion at the edge of the discharge opening.

According to the feature A27, when the game ball is discharged from the discharge opening, the game ball is discharged toward the ball entry portion by coming into contact with the edge of the discharge opening. By fixing the position where the game ball is released from the guiding means and the direction in which the game ball is released, the probability that the game ball released from the guiding means reaches the entry portion can be increased.

Feature A28. At the release position in which the game ball is released, the release means changes the moving direction of the game ball that has reached the release position to the moving direction for release (discharge protrusion 181e, The gaming machine according to any one of features A25 to A27, characterized in that it includes a discharge end 263a).

According to the feature A28, since the direction changing means changes the moving direction of the game ball at the releasing position to the moving direction for releasing the game ball, the releasing position is changed without releasing the game ball from the releasing means. You can prevent it from passing by. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball that was not released at the release position from ascending in the guiding means.

Feature A29. The direction changing means projects to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the game area in such a manner that it can come into contact with the game ball guided by the rotating means.
The gaming machine according to feature A28, wherein the rotating means includes contact avoiding means (collision avoiding groove 192) for avoiding contact with the protruding direction changing means.

According to the feature A29, the movement direction of the game ball is changed at the release position by coming into contact with the game ball guided by the rotation means without hindering the rotation of the rotation means, and the release of the game ball is promoted. be able to.

Feature A30. The feature A28 or the feature A28 characterized in that the direction changing means is provided with means (181 g on the right side surface for ejection) for guiding the game ball in contact with the direction changing means at the discharge position toward the ball entry portion. The gaming machine described in A29.

According to the feature A30, since the release direction of the game ball is directed to the entry portion at the release position, the probability that the game ball released from the guiding means reaches the entry portion at the release position can be increased. ..

Feature A31. The guiding means
Direction-determining means (guidance passage 545) that defines the discharge direction of the game ball toward the ball entry portion, and
In the direction-determining means, the game ball is located upstream in the flow direction of the game ball in the direction-determining means, and when the game ball is opened, the game ball can enter the direction-determining means and is closed. An opening / closing means (adjustment unit 546) that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the ball.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A30.

According to the feature A31, by simplifying the configuration of the guiding means, the volume of the guiding means occupying the game area can be suppressed. As a result, the choice of the place where the guiding means is arranged in the game area can be increased, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

Feature A32. The guiding means discharges a game ball toward the ball entry portion.
At a position where the game ball released from the guiding means is heading toward the ball entry portion, there are cases where the game ball is allowed to flow down toward the ball entry portion and cases where the game ball is not allowed to flow down toward the ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A31, characterized in that (electric nail 560) is provided.

According to the feature A32, a part of the game ball discharged from the guiding means toward the ball entry portion is separated from the ball entry portion. By making it an uncertain factor whether or not the game ball released from the guiding means enters the ball entry portion, the movement of the game ball after being released from the guiding means is one of the concerns of the player. , It is possible to raise the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball around the guiding means and improve the interest of the game.

Feature A33. The course adjusting means
A change execution means (electric nail 560) that changes the course of the game ball when it comes into contact with the game ball, and
The change executing means is moved so that the game ball released from the guiding means comes into contact with the change executing means, and the change is made so that the game ball released from the guiding means does not come into contact with the change executing means. A course adjustment drive means (nail drive unit 560a) capable of moving the execution means, and
The gaming machine according to the feature A32, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.

According to the feature A33, the volume occupied by the course adjusting means is provided by a simple configuration that creates a state in which the game ball can flow down toward the entry portion and a state in which the game ball cannot flow down by moving the change executing means. Can be suppressed and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

Feature A34. The guiding means
Means for releasing the game ball so that the released game ball comes into contact with the course adjusting means (first support surface 241, second support surface 242, third support surface 243), and
A means for releasing the game ball (fourth support surface 244) so that the released game ball does not come into contact with the course adjusting means, and
The gaming machine according to the feature A32 or A33, which comprises the above-mentioned feature A32 or A33.

According to the feature A34, by configuring the guiding means to release the game ball in a plurality of modes, a game ball released from the guiding means and entering the ball entry portion and a game ball not entering the ball are generated. be able to. Further, in the guiding means, the game balls released from the guiding means enter the ball by keeping the ratio of the released game balls in contact with the course adjusting means and the non-contacting release modes to be constant. It is possible to make the ratio of entering the ball and the ratio of not entering the portion close to the ratio set at the design stage.

Feature A35. The guiding means discharges a game ball toward the ball entry portion.
Any of the features A1 to A34, wherein the ball entry portion is provided in the game area at a position separated from the position where the release of the game ball is started by the guiding means by the diameter of the game ball or more. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature A35, the game ball can pass between the position where the release of the game ball is started by the guiding means and the ball entry portion. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball released from the guiding means does not enter the ball entry portion. By making it an uncertain factor whether or not the game ball released from the guiding means enters the ball entry portion, the movement of the game ball after being released from the guiding means is one of the concerns of the player. , It is possible to raise the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball around the guiding means and improve the interest of the game.

Feature A36. The guiding means causes the game ball to reach the entry portion by discharging the game ball from a predetermined release start position in a predetermined release direction.
The ball entry portion is characterized by having an opening having an inclination substantially orthogonal to the moving direction at the height position of the game ball discharged from the guiding means and flowing down to the height position of the ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A35.

According to the feature A36, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball released from the guiding means and reaching the ball entry portion enters the ball entry portion without contacting the edge of the ball entry portion. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball released from the guiding means collides with the edge of the ball entry portion and the ball entry timing is deviated or deviates from the ball entry portion.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features A1 to A36, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature A group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. It is known that these gaming machines perform a lottery using numerical information when a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and give a privilege to the player according to the result of the lottery.

For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in a game area, numerical information is acquired from an update means for updating numerical information for lottery, and the acquired numerical information is used. It is determined whether or not the winning information is supported. Further, there is also known a configuration in which numerical information is acquired based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition, and a specific effect or notification is performed based on the result of a lottery performed using the numerical information.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, a novel game content is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A game ball that has reached the guidance unit (near the intake port 185, the vicinity of the intake port 262, the upper part of the adjustment mechanisms 330 and 430, and the vicinity of the adjustment unit 546) at the inducible timing (timing in which the intake is permitted) is placed in a predetermined area (near the intake port 185). Guiding means (adjustment mechanism 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) capable of guiding toward the first through gate 35, the first operating port 33,581), and
Discharging means (peripheral surfaces 188a to 191a of the blade portions 188 to 191) for discharging the game ball that has reached the guiding portion at a timing different from the guideable timing to a region different from the predetermined region.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, by discharging the game ball that has reached the guide portion at a timing different from the guideable timing, it is possible to prevent the unguided game ball from staying in the vicinity of the guide portion. As a result, it is possible to keep the vicinity of the guiding portion in a state in which the game ball that has reached the guiding portion at the guideable timing is easily guided.

Feature B2. The discharging means includes means (circumferential surfaces 188a to 191a of the blades 188 to 191) for discharging the game ball that has reached the guiding portion to the outside of the guiding means at a timing different from the guideable timing. The gaming machine according to the feature B1.

According to the feature B2, the game ball that has reached the guide portion at a timing different from the guideable timing is discharged to the outside of the guide means by the guide portion, thereby suppressing the game ball from staying in the vicinity of the guide portion. be able to. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the guidance unit guides the game ball to be guided to a predetermined region by a game ball that is not the guidance target.

Feature B3. The discharging means is
It is a space in which the game ball can flow down, and is provided on the left and right of the flow-down space (adjustment mechanisms 180, 430, 530, 620) provided around the guiding means in the game area (game area PA). Space, the space provided on the left side of the adjustment mechanism 220),
It is provided in the game area with an interval between the guiding means and the gaming ball guided to the guiding portion at a timing different from the guiding timing so that the gaming ball can flow down into the flowing space. , A ball guiding means (nail 24b, left side guide nail 291 and right side guide nail 292, downstream guide nail 371, guide nail 472) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward the guide portion.
The gaming machine according to the feature B1 or B2, which comprises the above-mentioned feature B1 or B2.

According to the feature B3, the possibility that the game ball stays in the vicinity of the guide portion is reduced by configuring the game ball that is guided by the guide portion and not taken into the guidance means to flow down the flow-down space toward the downstream. can do. Further, since the game ball can be guided to the guiding portion by the ball guiding means, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the gaming ball to be guided by the guiding means toward the predetermined region is insufficient.

Feature B4. Any of the features B1 to B3, wherein the discharging means is provided with an auxiliary passage (escape passage 172) through which a game ball arriving at the guiding portion can enter at a timing different from the guideable timing. The gaming machine described in 1 or 1.

According to the feature B4, the game ball that has reached the guide portion at a timing different from the guideable timing is moved to another place by the auxiliary passage, so that the game ball reaches the guide portion and moves to another place. It is possible to prevent the game ball that has reached the guide portion from staying around the guide portion while preventing the game ball in the middle of the game from colliding with another game ball flowing down the game area.

Feature B5. The boundary on the rear side of the game area (game area PA) is defined by the plate-shaped area defining means (game board 24, 610).
The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the auxiliary passage allows the gaming ball to pass behind the front surface of the area defining means.

According to the feature B5, the member that partitions the auxiliary passage is configured to discharge the game ball that has reached the guidance portion at a timing different from the guideable timing toward the rear of the front surface of the area defining means. Can avoid colliding with another game ball flowing down the game area and disturbing the course of the game ball.

Feature B6. The auxiliary passage is described in feature B5, wherein the auxiliary passage is provided with a passage outlet (passage outlet 173) for discharging a game ball flowing down the auxiliary passage toward the game area in front of the area defining means. Gaming machine.

According to the feature B6, if the game ball that has entered the auxiliary passage does not return to the game area, there is a possibility that the game ball that flows down the downstream of the guiding means will be insufficient. On the other hand, by configuring the game balls that have flowed down the auxiliary passage back to the game area from the passage exit, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of game balls that flow down the downstream of the guiding means will decrease.

Feature B7. The game area is prevented from colliding with the game ball discharged from the passage outlet toward the game area by the game ball flowing down the game area from the upstream of the passage outlet. The gaming machine according to feature B6, characterized in that a collision prevention means (exit roof 174) for the purpose is provided.

According to the feature B7, the game ball trying to return to the game area from the passage exit collides with the game ball flowing down from the upstream of the passage exit in the game area, and is returned to the auxiliary passage again. Can be blocked.

Feature B8. The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B7, wherein the movement of the gaming ball passing through the auxiliary passage is visible from the outside.

According to the feature B8, by making the movement of the game ball in the auxiliary passage visible from the outside, it is possible to avoid that the movement of the game ball cannot be visually followed as soon as the game ball enters the auxiliary passage. In particular, in the configuration in which the game ball returns to the game area after passing through the auxiliary passage, the player can continuously grasp the movement of the game ball so that the ball enters the auxiliary passage and cannot be seen once. The configuration can be such that the game ball does not suddenly return to the game area and does not cause a sense of discomfort.

Feature B9. The guiding means
The approach blocking means (left standing wall 181c, 181h, right standing wall 181d, upper right standing wall 252, left standing wall 261) that prevent the game ball flowing down toward the guiding means from entering the inside of the guiding means. , Standing wall 352),
A rotating means (rotating body) provided with a rotating means (recessed portions 183b to 183e, stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, blade member 343) capable of capturing and holding the game ball in the guiding means. 183,230,340,440),
A rotation control means (a function of executing the process of step S206 in the main CPU 63, an adjustment drive unit 184) for conveying the game ball taken into the guidance means by rotating the rotation means.
Is equipped with
The approach blocking means includes a take-in opening (take-in port 185) as an opening capable of taking in the game ball that has reached the guide portion inside the guide means.
The discharging means discharges a game ball that is in contact with both the rotating means and the approach blocking means at the intake opening to a region different from the predetermined region. B1 characterized by being provided with avoidance means (first front surface 188b, second front surface 189b, third front surface 190b, fourth front surface 191b, right side standing wall 181d) for avoiding being pinched. The gaming machine according to any one of B8.

According to the feature B9, the game ball is sandwiched by discharging the game ball in contact with the rotating means and the approach blocking means to a region different from the predetermined region at the intake opening. It is possible to avoid stopping. Further, by avoiding the pinching of the game ball, it is possible to reduce the burden of maintenance that the manager of the game hall must perform.

Feature B10. When the rotating means rotates with respect to the gaming ball that is in contact with both the rotating means and the approach blocking means at the intake opening, the avoiding means and the predetermined area The gaming machine according to feature B9, which is characterized by applying a force toward a different region.

According to the feature B10, the rotation of the rotating means eliminates the state in which the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the approach blocking means at the intake opening. Therefore, a dedicated configuration for avoiding pinching of the game ball is not required. As a result, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost by avoiding the complicated configuration, and it is possible to secure the degree of freedom in arranging the guiding means by avoiding the increase in size of the guiding means.

Feature B11. The avoidance means is a means (front surface 188b) for applying a force containing a downward component to the game ball when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the approach blocking means. 191b) The gaming machine according to feature B9 or B10.

According to the feature B11, a force having a downward component is applied to the game ball in contact with both the rotating means and the approach blocking means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball in contact with both the rotating means and the approach blocking means is ejected upward and the flow of the upstream game ball is disturbed.

Feature B12. The discharging means is
An auxiliary passage (escape passage 172) through which a game ball that has reached the guidance portion can enter at a timing different from the guideable timing, and
A passage entrance (passage entrance 171), which is an opening that allows the game ball to enter the auxiliary passage,
Is equipped with
The taking-in means includes means (inclination of the inner wall of the recessed portions 183b to 183e) for preventing the gaming ball taken into the guiding means by the taking-in means from moving toward the entrance for the passage. The gaming machine according to any one of features B9 to B11.

According to the feature B12, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball taken in by the taking-in means is guided and enters the auxiliary passage from the passage entrance before reaching the predetermined area. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls guided to a predetermined region by the guiding means.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B12, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature B group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a game board that defines a game area in which a game ball flows down, and the game board includes nails, a windmill, etc. in order to appropriately disperse the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area. Various members are arranged. Further, the game board is provided with an opening for paying out the game ball, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. The game balls launched from the game ball launcher flow down the game area while contacting various members, and when the game balls enter the general winning opening, the special electric winning device, the operating opening, etc., a predetermined number of balls are used. The game ball is paid out to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to make the behavior of the gaming ball suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A guiding means (adjustment mechanism 180, 220, 330, 430, 620) capable of guiding the game ball toward a predetermined area (first through gate 35, first operating port 33, 581) is provided.
The guiding means
A rotating means (rotating body) provided with a rotating means (recessed portions 183b to 183e, stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, blade member 343) capable of capturing and holding the game ball in the guiding means. 183,230,340,440),
A rotation control means (a function of executing the process of step S206 in the main CPU 63, an adjustment drive unit 184) for conveying the game ball taken into the guidance means by rotating the rotation means.
Discharge means for discharging the game ball conveyed by the capture means toward the predetermined region at a timing prior to the timing at which the vertical movement direction of the capture means switches from the lower direction to the upward direction. (Discharge ports 256,621) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature C1, in the case of the configuration in which the game ball conveyed by the capture means is discharged at the timing when the vertical movement direction of the capture means is switched from the lower direction to the upper direction, the game ball in the release means is released. If the release timing of the ball is delayed, the game ball conveyed by the capturing means may start to rise in the guiding means. On the other hand, by providing a configuration in which the game ball conveyed by the capture means is released at a timing prior to the timing at which the vertical movement direction of the capture means switches from the lower direction to the upward direction, the game is played. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball rises in the guiding means when the release timing of the ball is delayed.

Feature C2. The guiding means prevents the game ball taken into the guiding means and conveyed by the taking-in means from falling downward and being thrown out of the guiding means by the rotation of the rotating means. It is equipped with fall prevention means (left standing wall 181h, right standing wall 181d).
The release means is provided with a release opening (discharge port) provided in the fall prevention means so that the gaming ball conveyed in contact with the fall prevention means is released toward the outside of the guidance means. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that it includes 621).

According to the feature C2, the game ball is conveyed in contact with the fall prevention means, and when it reaches the discharge opening, it is discharged toward the outside of the guiding means. Since the position of the release opening in the fall prevention means is fixed, the position where the game ball is discharged from the guiding means can be the same every time. Further, since the timing at which the rotating means guides the game ball to the release opening is determined according to the rotation mode of the rotating means, the timing at which the game ball is released from the guiding means can be set as the timing set at the design stage.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the release opening is a direction in which a game ball discharged from the release opening is directed toward the predetermined region at the edge of the release opening.

According to the feature C3, when the game ball is discharged from the discharge opening, the game ball is discharged toward a predetermined region by contacting the edge of the discharge opening. By fixing the position where the game ball is released from the guiding means and the direction in which the game ball is released, the probability that the game ball released from the guiding means reaches a predetermined region can be increased.

Feature C4. The predetermined area is provided with a ball entry portion (first through gate 35, first operation port 33, 581) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter.
A privilege giving means (a function of executing the processes of steps S705 and S706 in the main CPU 63) is provided so that the privilege is given on the condition that the game ball has entered the ball entry portion at least one condition.
The release direction is a direction that enables the game ball released from the release opening to enter the ball entry portion without colliding with the edge of the ball entry portion. Described gaming machine.

According to the feature C4, when the game ball released from the discharge opening collides with the edge of the ball entry portion, the timing at which the game ball enters the entry portion may be shifted, or the game ball may enter the entry portion. The possibility of coming off can be suppressed.

Feature C5. At the release position where the game ball is discharged by the guiding means, the release means changes the moving direction of the game ball that has reached the release position to the moving direction for discharge (discharge protrusion 181e, discharge). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, which comprises a protruding end 263a).

According to the feature C5, since the direction changing means changes the moving direction of the game ball at the releasing position to the moving direction for releasing the game ball, the releasing position is changed without releasing the game ball from the releasing means. You can prevent it from passing by. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball that was not released at the release position from ascending in the guiding means.

Feature C6. The direction changing means projects to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the game area (game area PA) in a manner capable of contacting the game ball guided by the rotation means.
The gaming machine according to feature C5, wherein the rotating means includes contact avoiding means (collision avoiding groove 192) for avoiding contact with the protruding direction changing means.

According to the feature C6, by contacting with the game ball guided by the rotating means without hindering the rotation of the rotating means, the moving direction of the game ball is changed at the release position to promote the release of the game ball. be able to.

Feature C7. The feature C5 or C6 is characterized in that the direction changing means includes means (181 g on the right side surface for discharging) for guiding the game ball in contact with the direction changing means at the discharge position toward the predetermined region. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature C7, since the release direction of the game ball is directed to the predetermined region at the release position, the probability that the game ball released from the guiding means reaches the entry portion at the release position can be increased.

Feature C8. There are cases where the game ball is allowed to flow down toward the predetermined area and cases where the game ball is not allowed to flow down toward the predetermined area at a position where the game ball released from the guiding means is heading toward the predetermined area (electrically). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, characterized in that a nail 560) is provided.

According to the feature C8, a part of the game ball discharged from the guiding means toward the predetermined region is deviated from the predetermined region. By setting whether or not the game ball released from the guiding means enters the predetermined region as an uncertain factor, the movement of the game ball after being released from the guiding means is regarded as one of the concerns of the player. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball around the guiding means and improve the interest of the game.

Feature C9. The course adjusting means
A change execution means (electric nail 560) that changes the course of the game ball when it comes into contact with the game ball, and
The change executing means is moved so that the game ball released from the guiding means comes into contact with the change executing means, and the change is made so that the game ball released from the guiding means does not come into contact with the change executing means. A course adjustment drive means (nail drive unit 560a) capable of moving the execution means, and
The gaming machine according to the feature C8, which is characterized by the above.

According to the feature C9, the volume occupied by the course adjusting means is increased by making the change execution means move to create a state in which the game ball can flow down toward a predetermined area and a state in which the game ball cannot flow down. It can be suppressed and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

Feature C10. The guiding means
Means for releasing the game ball so that the released game ball comes into contact with the course adjusting means (first support surface 241, second support surface 242, third support surface 243), and
A means for releasing the game ball (fourth support surface 244) so that the released game ball does not come into contact with the course adjusting means, and
The gaming machine according to the feature C8 or C9, which comprises the above-mentioned feature C8 or C9.

According to the feature C10, by configuring the guiding means to release the game ball in a plurality of modes, a game ball released from the guiding means and entering the predetermined region and a game ball not entering the predetermined region are generated. Can be done. Further, in the guiding means, the game balls released from the guiding means are in a predetermined region by keeping the ratio of the released game balls in contact with the course adjusting means and the non-contacting release modes to be constant. It is possible to make the ratio of entering the ball and the ratio of not entering the ball close to the ratio set at the design stage.

Feature C11. The guiding means discharges a game ball toward the predetermined region.
The predetermined region is provided in the gaming region (gaming region PA) at a position separated from the position at which the release of the gaming ball is started by the guiding means by the diameter of the gaming ball or more. The gaming machine according to any one of C10.

According to the feature C11, the game ball can pass between the position where the release of the game ball is started by the guiding means and the predetermined region. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball released from the guiding means does not enter the predetermined area. By setting whether or not the game ball released from the guiding means enters the predetermined region as an uncertain factor, the movement of the game ball after being released from the guiding means is regarded as one of the concerns of the player. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball around the guiding means and improve the interest of the game.

Feature C12. A game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter the predetermined area, and when the game ball enters the predetermined area, one of the conditions for granting the privilege is satisfied. (1st through gate 35, 1st operating port 33,581) is provided.
The guiding means causes the game ball to reach the entry portion by discharging the game ball from a predetermined release start position in a predetermined release direction.
The ball entry portion is characterized by having an opening having an inclination substantially orthogonal to the moving direction at the height position of the game ball discharged from the guiding means and flowing down to the height position of the ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C11.

According to the feature C12, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball released from the guiding means and reaching the ball entry portion enters the ball entry portion without contacting the edge of the ball entry portion. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball released from the guiding means collides with the edge of the ball entry portion and the ball entry timing is deviated or deviates from the ball entry portion.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C12, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature C group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a game board that defines a game area in which a game ball flows down, and the game board includes nails, a windmill, etc. in order to appropriately disperse the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area. Various members are arranged. Further, the game board is provided with an opening for paying out the game ball, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. The game balls launched from the game ball launcher flow down the game area while contacting various members, and when the game balls enter the general winning opening, the special electric winning device, the operating opening, etc., a predetermined number of balls are used. The game ball is paid out to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to make the behavior of the gaming ball suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A guiding means (adjustment mechanism 180, 220, 330, 430, 620) capable of guiding the game ball toward a predetermined area (first through gate 35, first operating port 33, 581) is provided.
The guiding means
An intake opening (intake port 262) that allows a game ball that has flowed down toward the guiding means to enter the inside of the guiding means.
The opening partitioning means (upper right standing wall 252, left standing wall 261) that partitions the intake opening, and
Rotating means (rotating bodies 230, 340) that are rotatable and include transporting means (stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, blade member 343) that transport the game ball taken into the guiding means inside the guiding means. )When,
A rotation control means (a function of executing the process of step S206 in the main CPU 63, an adjustment drive unit 184) for conveying the game ball taken into the guidance means by rotating the rotation means.
The game ball is provided around the intake opening, and when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening partitioning means at the intake opening, the game ball is deformed and the game ball is in contact with the opening partitioning means. Deformation means (upper right standing wall 252, blade member 343, rotation shaft 254, 344) that makes it possible to release the force that tries to pinch the
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature D1, by deforming the deforming means around the intake opening, the game ball can be guided to a predetermined region while avoiding the situation where the game ball is sandwiched between the rotating means and the opening partitioning means and stops. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being pinched and the game being interrupted, or the need to deal with a trouble of removing the pinched game ball.

Feature D2. The deforming means includes means (upper right standing wall 252, rotating shaft 254) that can release the force applied to the opening partitioning means by temporarily displaceing the opening partitioning means to a predetermined position. The gaming machine according to feature D1, which is characterized in that it is

According to the feature D2, when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening partitioning means, and the game ball is pushed toward the opening partitioning means as the rotating means rotates, the opening is opened. By temporarily shifting the partitioning means to a predetermined position, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ball is pinched and stopped.

Feature D3. The deforming means includes means (blade member 343, rotating shaft 344) that can release the force applied to the rotating means by temporarily displace a part of the rotating means to a specific position. The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2.

According to the feature D3, when the game ball is in contact with both the rotating means and the opening partitioning means, and a force is applied to the rotating means and the opening partitioning means as the rotating means rotates. In addition, a part of the rotating means is temporarily displaced to a specific position to release the force for pinching the game ball, so that the situation where the game ball is pinched and stopped can be avoided.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D3, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature D group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a game board that defines a game area in which a game ball flows down, and the game board includes nails, a windmill, etc. in order to appropriately disperse the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area. Various members are arranged. Further, the game board is provided with an opening for paying out the game ball, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. The game balls launched from the game ball launcher flow down the game area while contacting various members, and when the game balls enter the general winning opening, the special electric winning device, the operating opening, etc., a predetermined number of balls are used. The game ball is paid out to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to make the behavior of the gaming ball suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A ball entry section (first through gate 35) through which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter.
Guidance means (adjustment mechanism 180, 220, 330, 430, 530, 620) for guiding the game ball toward the ball entry portion, and
With
The guiding means includes a discharge means (discharge ports 256, 621) for discharging a game ball toward the ball entry portion.
A gaming machine characterized in that the ball entry portion is provided at a position separated from the discharging means by a diameter of a gaming ball or more.

According to the feature E1, the game ball released from the releasing means needs to flow down a distance longer than the diameter of the game ball before entering the ball entry portion. Therefore, depending on the release direction and release speed of the game ball released from the release means, both the case where the game ball enters the ball entry portion and the case where the game ball does not enter can occur. If all of the game balls released from the releasing means enter the entry portion, the player may lose interest in the whereabouts of the game balls after the release. On the other hand, by setting whether or not the game ball released from the release means enters the entry portion as an uncertain factor, the whereabouts of the game ball after the release attracts the player's attention and the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of.

Feature E2. The guiding means
A rotating means (rotating body) provided with a rotating means (recessed portions 183b to 183e, stepped surfaces 241a to 244a, blade member 343) capable of capturing and holding the game ball in the guiding means. 183,230,340,440),
A rotation control means (a function of executing the process of step S206 in the main CPU 63, an adjustment drive unit 184) for conveying the game ball taken into the guidance means by rotating the rotation means.
Fall prevention means (left side) that prevents the game ball taken into the guiding means and conveyed by the taking means from falling downward and being thrown out of the guiding means by the rotation of the rotating means. Standing wall 181h, right standing wall 181d) and
Is equipped with
The release means is provided with a release opening (discharge port) provided in the fall prevention means so that the gaming ball conveyed in contact with the fall prevention means is released toward the outside of the guidance means. 621. The gaming machine according to feature E1, which comprises 621).

According to the feature E2, the game ball is conveyed in contact with the fall prevention means, and when it reaches the discharge opening, it is discharged toward the outside of the guiding means. Since the position of the release opening in the fall prevention means is fixed, the position where the game ball is discharged from the guiding means can be the same every time. Further, since the timing at which the rotating means guides the game ball to the release opening is determined according to the rotation mode of the rotating means, the timing at which the game ball is released from the guiding means can be set as the timing set at the design stage.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the release opening is a direction in which the game ball discharged from the release opening is directed toward the ball entry portion at the edge of the release opening.

According to the feature E3, when the game ball is discharged from the discharge opening, it is discharged toward the ball entry portion by contacting the edge of the discharge opening. By fixing the position where the game ball is released from the guiding means and the direction in which the game ball is released, the probability that the game ball released from the guiding means reaches the entry portion can be increased.

Feature E4. At the release position in which the game ball is released, the release means changes the moving direction of the game ball that has reached the release position to the moving direction for release (discharge protrusion 181e, The gaming machine according to feature E2 or E3, which comprises a discharge end 263a).

According to the feature E4, since the direction changing means changes the moving direction of the game ball at the releasing position to the moving direction for releasing the game ball, the releasing position is changed without the game ball being released from the releasing means. You can prevent it from passing by.

Feature E5. The direction changing means projects to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the game area in such a manner that it can come into contact with the game ball guided by the rotating means.
The gaming machine according to feature E4, wherein the rotating means includes contact avoiding means (collision avoiding groove 192) for avoiding contact with the protruding direction changing means.

According to the feature E5, the movement direction of the game ball is changed at the release position by coming into contact with the game ball guided by the rotation means without hindering the rotation of the rotation means, and the release of the game ball is promoted. be able to.

Feature E6. The feature E4 or the feature E4 characterized in that the direction changing means is provided with means (181 g on the right side surface for ejection) for guiding the game ball in contact with the direction changing means at the discharge position toward the ball entry portion. The gaming machine described in E5.

According to the feature E6, since the release direction of the game ball is directed to the entry portion at the release position, the probability that the game ball released from the guiding means reaches the entry portion at the release position can be increased. ..

Feature E7. The release means includes a direction-determining means (guide passage 545) that defines the release direction of the game ball toward the ball entry portion.
The guiding means is located upstream of the flow direction of the game ball in the direction-determining means, and when the game ball is opened, the game ball can enter the direction-determining means and is closed. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, which comprises an opening / closing means (adjustment unit 546) that makes it impossible for the gaming ball to enter the ball.

According to the feature E7, the volume of the guiding means occupying the game area can be suppressed by using the simple guiding means composed of the direction defining means and the opening / closing means. As a result, the choice of the place where the guiding means is arranged in the game area can be increased, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

Feature E8. In the game area, there are cases where the game ball released from the release means is allowed to flow down toward the ball entry portion at a position on the way toward the ball entry portion, and cases where the game ball is not permitted to flow down toward the ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized in that a certain course adjusting means (electric nail 560) is provided.

According to the feature E8, a part of the game ball discharged from the releasing means toward the entering portion is removed from the entering portion. By providing a course adjusting means that causes both the case where the game ball released from the releasing means enters the ball entry portion and the case where the game ball does not enter the ball entry portion, the game ball released from the release means enters the ball entry portion. Whether or not to enter the ball can be an uncertain factor.

Feature E9. The course adjusting means
A change execution means (electric nail 560) that changes the course of the game ball when it comes into contact with the game ball, and
The change execution means is moved so that the game ball released from the release means comes into contact with the change execution means, and the change so that the game ball released from the release means does not come into contact with the change execution means. A course adjustment drive means (nail drive unit 560a) capable of moving the execution means, and
The gaming machine according to the feature E8, which is characterized by the above.

According to the feature E9, the volume occupied by the course adjusting means is provided by a simple configuration in which the game ball creates a state in which the game ball can flow down toward the entry portion and a state in which the game ball cannot flow down by moving the change executing means. Can be suppressed and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

Feature E10. The release means
Means for releasing the game ball so that the released game ball comes into contact with the course adjusting means (first support surface 241, second support surface 242, third support surface 243), and
A means for releasing the game ball (fourth support surface 244) so that the released game ball does not come into contact with the course adjusting means, and
The gaming machine according to the feature E8 or E9, which comprises the above-mentioned feature E8 or E9.

According to the feature E10, by configuring the releasing means to release the game ball in a plurality of modes, both the game ball released from the releasing means and entering the ball entry portion and the game ball not entering the ball can be released. Can be caused. Further, in the releasing means, the game balls released from the releasing means enter the ball by keeping the ratio of the released game balls in contact with the course adjusting means and the releasing mode in which the released game balls do not come into contact with each other constant. It is possible to make the ratio of entering the ball and the ratio of not entering the portion close to the ratio set at the design stage.

Feature E11. The release means causes the game ball to reach the entry portion by discharging the game ball from a predetermined release start position in a predetermined release direction.
The ball entry portion is characterized by having an opening having an inclination substantially orthogonal to the moving direction at the height position of the game ball discharged from the ejection means and flowing down to the height position of the ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E10.

According to the feature E11, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball released from the releasing means and reaching the ball entry portion enters the ball entry portion without contacting the edge of the ball entry portion. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball released from the discharging means collides with the edge of the ball entering portion and the ball entering timing is shifted or the ball enters the ball.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E11, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature E group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a game board that defines a game area in which a game ball flows down, and the game board includes nails, a windmill, etc. in order to appropriately disperse the falling direction of the game ball flowing down the game area. Various members are arranged. Further, the game board is provided with an opening for paying out the game ball, such as a general winning opening, a special electric winning device, and an operating opening. The game balls launched from the game ball launcher flow down the game area while contacting various members, and when the game balls enter the general winning opening, the special electric winning device, the operating opening, etc., a predetermined number of balls are used. The game ball is paid out to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to make the behavior of the gaming ball suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area.
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the specific storage execution means (main side CPU 63 executes the ball entry detection process) so that the corresponding information is stored in the specific storage means (main side RAM 65). Function) and
A privilege to execute a process for giving a privilege to a player based on the information corresponding to the fact that the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entry means is stored in the specific storage means. Granting means (a function of executing the process of step S219 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step S1008 in the payout side CPU 92), and
In a gaming machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage of the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to fifteenth, seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, the history memory 117 and the sixteenth embodiment. Then, it is executed in the main RAM 65), and the predetermined information (first) that enables the number or frequency of the game balls to be entered into the predetermined ball entry means to be specified by the game machine or a device outside the game machine. Predetermined storage executing means (first) so that historical information in the 14th and 18th embodiments and numerical information measured by a counter in the 15th to 17th embodiments are stored in the predetermined storage means. In the fifteenth, seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, and in the sixteenth embodiment, steps S2902, step S2905, step S2908, step S2912, step S2916, A gaming machine comprising a function of executing the processes of steps S2920 and S2923).

According to the feature F1, when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the specific storage means, and when the information is stored in the specific storage means, a privilege is given to the player. Will be done. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means. In this configuration, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number or frequency of the game balls entered into the predetermined ball entry means. The predetermined information that can be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or the device outside the gaming machine is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number of balls entering the predetermined ball entry means or the frequency of entry of the game balls into the predetermined ball entry means, and by using this managed information, the predetermined number of balls is predetermined. It is possible to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and retained by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the predetermined information does not trigger execution of a process for giving a privilege to the player.

According to the feature F2, the purpose is to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means because the predetermined information does not trigger the execution of the process for giving the player a privilege. Predetermined information can be stored and retained in the form of information.

Feature F3. A specific ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) is provided so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
The predetermined storage executing means causes the predetermined storage means to execute the storage of information corresponding to the case where the game ball enters the specific entry means, and the game ball enters the specific entry means. Specific information that enables the number of balls to be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine (history information in the first to fourth and eighteenth embodiments, and a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments). The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the measured numerical information) is stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to the feature F3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entry means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the entry mode of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means but also the entry mode of the game ball into the specific entry means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the ball entry frequency between the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means.

Feature F4. All the ball-entry means for discharging the entered game ball from the game area, including the predetermined ball-entry means, are to be stored in the predetermined storage means for the information corresponding to the occurrence of the ball-entry of the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, which is a means of entering a ball.

According to the feature F4, all the ball entry means for discharging the game ball from the game area are subject to management using the information stored in the predetermined storage means, so that the ball entry frequency for any ball entry means is obtained. Can be managed by using the information stored in the predetermined storage means. Further, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of balls entering the predetermined ball entry means to the number of game balls discharged from the game area by using the information stored in the predetermined storage means.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the predetermined information includes information corresponding to a timing at which the gaming ball enters the predetermined ball entering means.

According to the feature F5, since the predetermined information includes the information corresponding to the timing when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the predetermined information can be used to obtain the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means. It is possible to grasp the entry history in detail.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, wherein the predetermined information is counting information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means.

According to the feature F6, since the predetermined information is the counting information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means, the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means while suppressing the information capacity of the predetermined information. Can be managed.

Feature F7. The predetermined storage executing means is a means for causing information that makes it possible to specify whether or not a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entering means in a predetermined situation to be stored in the predetermined storage means (the first). The functions of executing the processes of steps S1404 and S1409 in the management side CPU 112 in the first to thirteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S2704 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourteenth embodiment, and the management in the fifteenth embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S2803 in the side CPU 112).

According to the feature F7, it is possible to manage the ball entry mode of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is predetermined.

Feature F8. Any of the features F1 to F7 characterized in that it is provided with an external output means (a function of executing an external output process in the management side CPU 112) that outputs information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in 1 or 1.

According to the feature F8, it is possible to read the information stored in the predetermined storage means from the gaming machine and analyze the entry mode of the game ball into the predetermined entry means by using the read information.

Feature F9. It is provided with a program output means (a function of executing the process of step S1503 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine by using the information output unit (reading terminal 102).
The gaming machine according to feature F8, wherein the external output means uses the information output unit to output information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature F9, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program. This makes it possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature F10. A means (mainly) for identifying which of the information stored in the predetermined storage means and the control program is the information to be output from the information output unit, and outputting the information corresponding to the specific result. The gaming machine according to feature F9, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S1502 in the side CPU 63).

According to the feature F10, in a configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage means is externally output by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program, the information to be externally output is the control program and the predetermined information. Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the game machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. As a result, it is possible to read only necessary information even if the information output unit is also used.

Features F11. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means, and
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F10.

According to the feature F11, the processing load of the first control means is extremely increased because the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the specific memory execution means has the predetermined memory execution means. It is possible to achieve the excellent effect as already explained while avoiding it.

Feature F12. The gaming machine according to feature F11, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to the feature F12, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means can be performed. It becomes possible to prevent it.

Feature F13. A specific ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) is provided so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
When a game ball enters the specific ball-entry means, the predetermined memory execution means stores information corresponding to the game ball into the specific ball-entry means so that the predetermined storage means executes the game. Specific information that enables the number or frequency of balls to be entered to be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine (history information in the first to fourth and eighteenth embodiments, fifteenth to thirteenth). In the 17th embodiment, the numerical information measured by the counter) is stored in the predetermined storage means.
The first control means
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the first transmission means (the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits the first information to the second control means using the first signal path. Function to output either) and
When a game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the second transmission means (the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits the second information to the second control means using the second signal path. Function to output either) and
The gaming machine according to the feature F11 or F12.

According to the feature F13, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entry means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the entry mode of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means but also the entry mode of the game ball into the specific entry means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the ball entry frequency between the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means.

Further, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the game ball enters the specific entry means. The second information is transmitted to the second control means using the second signal path. As a result, the types of information to be transmitted correspond to the signal path, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information by the second control means.

Feature F14. The first control means is a third transmission means that transmits identification information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not it is in a predetermined situation to the second control means using a third path. (In the first to seventh, ninth to fifteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the eighth embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode in the main CPU 63. The gaming machine according to feature F13, characterized in that it has a function of outputting one of a medium signal, a high frequency support mode signal, and a door open signal).

According to the feature F14, it is possible to manage the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means and the mode of entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is predetermined. Further, since the identification information that enables the identification of whether or not the situation is predetermined is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the second control means transmits the identification information to the first information and the first information. 2 It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as information.

Feature F15. The first control means provides the second control means with identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means. The gaming machine according to feature F13 or F14, which comprises a means for transmitting identification information to be transmitted (a function of executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature F15, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the correspondence of these information in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature F16. The gaming machine according to feature F15, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to the feature F16, when the supply of the operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means In a situation where a game ball can enter the ball, it is possible for the second control means to identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the entry means. Become.

Feature F17. The characteristic F15 or F16, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Game machine.

According to the feature F17, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with.

Feature F18. When the second control means receives the identification information, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means. One of the features F15 to F17, which is characterized by having a means (a function of executing a correspondence setting process in the management side CPU 112) for storing the correspondence information to be stored in the correspondence storage means (memory for correspondence 116). The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature F18, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means is stored in the second control means. As a result, information that enables the second control means to identify the ball entry means corresponding to the information to be transmitted is provided to the second control means each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. You don't have to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature F19. The first control means is a third transmission means that transmits the third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation to the second control means by using the third path. (In the first to seventh, ninth to fifteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the eighth embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode in the main CPU 63. It has a function to output either a medium signal, a high frequency support mode signal, or a door open signal).
The feature F15 is characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present, even if the identification information is not received. The gaming machine according to any one of F18.

According to the feature F19, it is possible to manage the mode of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means and the mode of entering the game ball into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is predetermined. Further, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not it is in a predetermined situation can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. .. This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature F20. The second control means receives more information than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means as a receiving unit capable of receiving information from the first control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F13 to F19, characterized in that a large number of receiving units (buffers 122a to 122p) are provided.

According to the feature F20, since the second control means is provided with a number of receiving units larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, the model of the gaming machine Even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases accordingly, it is possible to deal with it without changing the configuration related to the receiving unit. Therefore, it is possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature F21. A first external output means (management) that outputs information of a combination of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it recognizable corresponding to the predetermined ball entry means to a device outside the gaming machine. (Function to execute external output processing in the side CPU 112) and
A second external output means (management) that outputs information of a combination of the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it recognizable corresponding to the specific ball entry means to a device outside the gaming machine. (Function to execute external output processing in the side CPU 112) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features F13 to F20.

According to the feature F21, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is read from the gaming machine, and the read information is used to enter the game ball into the predetermined entry means and the game ball into the specific entry means. It is possible to specify the ball entry mode. Further, when the external output is performed, the information of the combination of the predetermined information and the information that makes it recognizable that the predetermined ball entry means is supported is output externally, and the specific information and the specific ball entry means are supported. Information in combination with information that makes it recognizable is output externally. This makes it possible to specify each ball entry mode by using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature F22. Information calculation means (1st to 7th, 8th, 12th, 14th, 14th, 1st to 7th, 8th, 12th, 14th, 4th In the fifteenth, sixteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1608, step S1613, and step S1617 in the management side CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, the processing of steps S2008, step S2013, and step S2017 in the management side CPU 112. The function of executing the process of step S2202 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2402 in the management side CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, and the management in the thirteenth embodiment. 1. The feature F1 to F21 is characterized in that the side CPU 112 includes a function of executing the process of step S2605, and in the seventeenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S3203 in the main CPU 63). Game machine.

According to the feature F22, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entering mode of the gaming ball, or it is possible to externally output the aspect information which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. ..

Feature F23. The predetermined storage executing means is a means (first) for causing information that enables the predetermined storage means to specify whether or not the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entering means in a predetermined situation. In the thirteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S1404 and S1409 in the management side CPU 112, in the fourteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2704 in the management side CPU 112, and in the fifteenth embodiment, the management side. A function of executing the process of step S2803 in the CPU 112) is provided.
The information calculation means is means for calculating the aspect information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means in the predetermined situation (first to seventh, In the eighth, twelfth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1608, step S1613, and step S1617 in the management side CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, in the management side CPU 112. The function of executing the processes of step S2008, step S2013 and step S2017, the function of executing the process of step S2202 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step S2402 in the management side CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment. The thirteenth embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S2605 in the management side CPU 112, and the seventeenth embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S3203 in the main CPU 63). Feature The gaming machine according to F22.

According to the feature F23, it is possible to calculate the mode information corresponding to the entering mode of the game ball by distinguishing whether or not the situation is predetermined.

Feature F24. When the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means (1st to 7th, 8th, 14th, 15th, 16th, 16th). The feature F22 or F23 is characterized in that the 18th embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S1619 in the management side CPU 112, and the 12th embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S2205 in the management side CPU 112). The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature F24, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, so that the event that the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means is unlikely to occur. It becomes possible to make it.

Feature F25. Even if the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is maintained in a state of being stored in the predetermined storage means. F22 Or the gaming machine described in F23.

According to the feature F25, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the aspect information is read out and the game ball is entered. When analyzing the aspect, it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to the predetermined information on which the calculation of the aspect information is based.

Feature F26. The information calculation means is when the supply of the operating power to the control means having the specific storage executing means is stopped, or when the supply of the operating power to the control means having the specific storage executing means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features F22 to F25, which comprises calculating the aspect information.

According to the feature F26, the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature F27. The information calculation means is characterized in that the aspect information is calculated when an operation trigger that can be repeatedly generated occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means having the specific storage execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of F26.

According to the feature F27, the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in a situation where the operating power is supplied to the control means, so that the mode information is managed in detail within one business day. Is possible.

Feature F28. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period.
The period measuring means stops the measurement of the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features F22 to F27.

According to the feature F28, since the mode information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, the calculation frequency of the mode information can be easily adjusted only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in the situation where the game is not executed, the measurement for the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in the situation in which the game is being executed.

Feature F29. Features F22 to F28 provided with external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) that outputs the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature F29, since the mode information is output to a device outside the gaming machine, it is possible to easily grasp the entering mode of the gaming ball.

Feature F30. The gaming machine according to feature F29, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the aspect information is output to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature F30, when not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine to read the mode information and analyze the entering mode of the game ball, not only the mode information but also the mode information thereof. It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature F31. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means,
With
The feature F29 or the external output means is characterized in that when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, the external output means outputs the aspect information to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in F30.

According to the feature F31, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to output the information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature F32. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs.
The result storage execution means (in the ninth embodiment, steps S2010, step S2014, and step S2018 in the management side CPU 112) sequentially store the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 631). The gaming machine according to any one of features F22 to F31, characterized in that the function of executing the process of the above, and the function of executing the process of step S2204 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment) are provided.

According to the feature F32, the mode information can be accumulated in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read a plurality of mode information when managing the entering mode of the game ball.

Feature F33. The result storage execution means is
Means for determining whether or not the aspect information is storage target information (a function of executing the process of step S2203 in the management side CPU 112) and
When the aspect information is the storage target information, a means for storing the aspect information in the calculation result storage means (a function of executing the process of step S2204 in the management side CPU 112) and
The gaming machine according to the feature F32, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.

According to the feature F33, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for the calculation result storage means.

Feature F34. The game according to feature F32 or F33, wherein the result storage executing means stores information that enables the time when the mode information is calculated to be attached to the mode information and stores the result storage means in the calculation result storage means. Machine.

According to the feature F34, the information that enables the time when the aspect information is calculated is attached to the aspect information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping the time when each aspect information is calculated.

Feature F35. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means, and
With
The information calculation means according to any one of features F22 to F34, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Game machine.

According to the feature F35, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to make the information calculated by the second control means.

Feature F36. A notification control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3205, S3207, and S3208 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (notifying light emitting unit 651) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features F22 to F35.

According to the feature F36, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the entry mode of the game ball without reading the mode information from the game machine.

Feature F37. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in the board box.
The gaming machine according to feature F36, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to the feature F37, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature F38. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means, and
With
The gaming machine according to feature F36 or F37, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to the feature F38, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result thereof. It is possible to consolidate the functions for executing the notification corresponding to the above in the first control means.

Feature F39. The notification control means controls the notification means so that the first notification is executed when the mode information is the information in the first range, and when the mode information is the information in the second range, the notification control means controls the notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F36 to F38, characterized in that the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to the feature F39, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature F40. Features F1 to feature F1 to include a means (a function of executing the process of step S220 in the main CPU 63) for externally outputting corresponding information when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of F39.

According to the feature F40, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means in the configuration in which the corresponding information corresponding to the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means is output to the outside. As a result, by using the corresponding information, the number of game balls entered into the predetermined ball entry means and the frequency of entry of the game balls can be easily grasped, and the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means can be used for the predetermined entry. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the ball means and the frequency of entry.

Feature F41. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F40, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature F41, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F41, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and 17th to eighteenth embodiments, and the main side in the sixteenth embodiment. By making it executed in the RAM 65), predetermined information (history information in the first to fourth and eighteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) is determined. Predetermined storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (a function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112 in the first to fifteenth, seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and a main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment. (Functions for executing the processes of step S2902, step S2905, step S2908, step S2912, step S2916, step S2920, and step S2923).
Information calculation means (1st to 7th, 8th, 12th, 14th, 15th, 16th, 18th) using the predetermined information to calculate mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period. In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1608, step S1613 and step S1617 in the management side CPU 112, and the function of executing the processing of step S2008, step S2013 and step S2017 in the management side CPU 112, the tenth embodiment. In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2202 in the management side CPU 112, in the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2402 in the management side CPU 112, and in the thirteenth embodiment, the process of step S2605 in the management side CPU 112. (Function of executing the process of step S3203 in the main CPU 63 in the 17th embodiment) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G1, when a predetermined event occurs, the storage of the corresponding information is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event, and by using this managed information, it is appropriate to manage the mode of occurrence of the predetermined event. It becomes possible to do it. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and retained by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the gaming machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. As a result, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output mode information which is the result of calculation using the predetermined information. Become.

Feature G2. The predetermined storage execution means is means for causing the predetermined storage means to provide information that enables identification of whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to thirteenth embodiments). The function of executing the processes of steps S1204 and S1209 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing the process of step S2704 in the management side CPU 112 in the 14th embodiment, and the process of step S2803 in the management side CPU 112 in the 15th embodiment. Has a function to execute)
The information calculation means is means for calculating the aspect information (1st to 7th, 8th, 12th, 12th) by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation. In the 14, 15, 16 and 18 embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1608, step S1613 and step S1617 in the management side CPU 112, and in the twelfth embodiment, steps S2008, step S2013 and step in the management side CPU 112. A function of executing the process of S2017, a function of executing the process of step S2202 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2402 in the management side CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, and a thirteenth execution. The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that the mode includes a function of executing the process of step S2605 in the management side CPU 112, and a function of executing the process of step S3203 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment). ..

According to the feature G2, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation, and to calculate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period.

Feature G3. When the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means (1st to 7th, 8th, 14th, 15th, 16th, 16th). The feature G1 or G2 is characterized in that the 18th embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S1619 in the management side CPU 112, and the 12th embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S2205 in the management side CPU 112). The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature G3, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, so that the event that the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means is unlikely to occur. It becomes possible to make it.

Feature G4. Even if the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is maintained in a state of being stored in the predetermined storage means G1. Or the gaming machine described in G2.

According to the feature G4, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the aspect information can be read out and the game can be played in a predetermined period. When analyzing the result of the above, it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to the predetermined information which is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature G5. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information when the supply of the operating power to the control means (MPU62) is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of G4.

According to the feature G5, the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature G6. Any of the features G1 to G5, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation trigger that can be repeatedly generated occurs in a situation where the control means (MPU62) is supplied with operating power. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature G6, the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in a situation where the operating power is supplied to the control means, so that the mode information is managed in detail within one business day. Is possible.

Feature G7. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period.
The period measuring means stops the measurement of the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6.

According to the feature G7, since the mode information is calculated every time a predetermined period elapses, the calculation frequency of the mode information can be easily adjusted only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in the situation where the game is not executed, the measurement for the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in the situation in which the game is being executed.

Feature G8. Features G1 to G7 are provided with external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) that outputs the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature G8, since the mode information is output to a device outside the gaming machine, it is possible to easily grasp the entering mode of the gaming ball.

Feature G9. The gaming machine according to feature G8, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the aspect information is output to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature G9, when not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine to read the mode information and analyze the entering mode of the game ball, not only the mode information but also the mode information thereof. It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature G10. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means,
With
The external output means is characterized in that when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, the external output means outputs the aspect information to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in G9.

According to the feature G10, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to output the information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature G11. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs.
The result storage execution means (in the ninth embodiment, steps S2010, step S2014, and step S2018 in the management side CPU 112) sequentially store the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 631). The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G10, characterized in that the function of executing the process of the above, and the function of executing the process of step S2204 in the management side CPU 112 in the twelfth embodiment) are provided.

According to the feature G11, the mode information can be accumulated in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read out a plurality of mode information when managing the mode of the result of the game in a predetermined period.

Feature G12. The result storage execution means includes means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means (a function of executing the process of step S2204 in the management side CPU 112) when the mode information is the storage target information. The gaming machine according to the feature G11.

According to the feature G12, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for the calculation result storage means.

Feature G13. The game according to feature G11 or G12, wherein the result storage executing means stores information that enables the time when the mode information is calculated to be attached to the mode information and stores the result storage means in the calculation result storage means. Machine.

According to the feature G13, the information that enables the time when the aspect information is calculated is attached to the aspect information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping the time when each aspect information is calculated.

Feature G14. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means, and
With
The information calculation means according to any one of features G1 to G13, characterized in that the mode information is calculated when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Game machine.

According to the feature G14, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to make the information calculated by the second control means.

Feature G15. A notification control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3205, S3207, and S3208 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (notifying light emitting unit 651) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G14.

According to the feature G15, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game in a predetermined period without reading the mode information from the game machine.

Feature G16. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in the board box.
The gaming machine according to feature G15, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to the feature G16, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature G17. A first control means (main side CPU 63) having the information calculation means and the notification control means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means, and
The gaming machine according to the feature G15 or G16, which comprises the above-mentioned feature G15 or G16.

According to the feature G17, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result thereof. It is possible to consolidate the functions for executing the notification corresponding to the above in the first control means.

Feature G18. The notification control means controls the notification means so that the first notification is executed when the mode information is the information in the first range, and when the mode information is the information in the second range, the notification control means controls the notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G15 to G17, characterized in that the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to the feature G18, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature G19. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area.
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage of the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to fifteenth and 17th to eighteenth embodiments, the history memory 117 and the sixteenth embodiment. Then, by making it executed in the main RAM 65), predetermined information (history information in the first to fourth and eighteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments). Is stored in the predetermined storage means (a function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112 in the first to fifteenth, seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and in the sixteenth embodiment). (Functions for executing the processes of step S2902, step S2905, step S2908, step S2912, step S2916, step S2920, and step S2923) in the main CPU 63).
Information calculation means (1st to 7th, 8th, 12th, 14th, 14th, 1st to 7th, 8th, 12th, 14th, 4th In the fifteenth, sixteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1608, step S1613, and step S1617 in the management side CPU 112, and in the twelfth embodiment, the processing of steps S2008, step S2013, and step S2017 in the management side CPU 112. The function of executing the process of step S2202 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2402 in the management side CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, and the management in the thirteenth embodiment. A function of executing the process of step S2605 in the side CPU 112, a function of executing the process of step S3203 in the main CPU 63 in the 17th embodiment), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G19, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage process of the corresponding information is executed for the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number of balls entering the predetermined ball entry means or the frequency of entry of the game balls into the predetermined ball entry means, and by using this managed information, the predetermined number of balls is predetermined. It is possible to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and retained by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entering mode of the gaming ball, or it is possible to externally output the aspect information which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. ..

Feature G20. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G19, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature G20, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G20, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and 17th to eighteenth embodiments, and the main side in the sixteenth embodiment. By making it executed in the RAM 65), predetermined information (history information in the first to fourth and eighteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) is determined. Predetermined storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (a function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112 in the first to fifteenth, seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and a main CPU 63 in the sixteenth embodiment. (Functions for executing the processes of step S2902, step S2905, step S2908, step S2912, step S2916, step S2920, and step S2923).
Information calculation means (1st to 7th, 8th, 12th) for calculating mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period by using the predetermined information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs. , 14, 15, 16 and 18 are functions for executing the processes of step S1608, step S1613 and step S1617 in the management side CPU 112, and in the twelfth embodiment, step S2008 and step S2013 in the management side CPU 112. And the function of executing the process of step S2017, the function of executing the process of step S2202 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2402 in the management side CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, the thirteenth. In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2605 in the management side CPU 112, and in the seventeenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3203 in the main CPU 63).
The result storage execution means (in the ninth embodiment, steps S2010, step S2014, and step S2018 in the management side CPU 112) sequentially store the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 631). (Function to execute the process of step S2204 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature H1, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. .. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number of balls entering the predetermined ball entry means or the frequency of entry of the game balls into the predetermined ball entry means, and by using this managed information, the predetermined number of balls is predetermined. It is possible to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and retained by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the gaming machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. As a result, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output mode information which is the result of calculation using the predetermined information. Become.

In addition, the mode information can be accumulated in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read out a plurality of mode information when managing the mode of the result of the game in a predetermined period.

Feature H2. The result storage execution means includes means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means (a function of executing the process of step S2204 in the management side CPU 112) when the mode information is the storage target information. The gaming machine according to the feature H1.

According to the feature H2, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for the calculation result storage means.

Feature H3. The game according to feature H1 or H2, wherein the result storage executing means stores information that enables the time when the mode information is calculated to be attached to the mode information and stores the result storage means in the calculation result storage means. Machine.

According to the feature H3, the information that enables the time when the aspect information is calculated is attached to the aspect information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping the time when each aspect information is calculated.

Feature H4. The predetermined storage execution means is means for causing the predetermined storage means to provide information that enables identification of whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to thirteenth embodiments). The function of executing the processes of steps S1204 and S1209 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing the process of step S2704 in the management side CPU 112 in the 14th embodiment, and the process of step S2803 in the management side CPU 112 in the 15th embodiment. Has a function to execute)
The information calculation means is means for calculating the aspect information (1st to 7th, 8th, 10th, 10th) by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation. In the 14, 15, 16 and 18 embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1608, step S1613 and step S1617 in the management side CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, steps S2008, step S2013 and step in the management side CPU 112. A function of executing the process of S2017, a function of executing the process of step S2202 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2402 in the management side CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment, and a thirteenth execution. One of the features H1 to H3, characterized in that the mode includes a function of executing the process of step S2605 in the management side CPU 112, and a function of executing the process of step S3203 in the main CPU 63 in the seventeenth embodiment). The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature H4, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation, and to calculate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period.

Feature H5. When the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means (1st to 7th, 8th, 14th, 15th, 16th, 16th). Eighteenth embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S1619 in the management side CPU 112, and a twelfth embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S2205 in the management side CPU 112). The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature H5, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, so that the event that the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means is unlikely to occur. It becomes possible to make it.

Feature H6. Even if the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is maintained in a state of being stored in the predetermined storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of H5.

According to the feature H6, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the aspect information can be read out and the game can be played in a predetermined period. When analyzing the result of, it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to the predetermined information which is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature H7. The information calculation means is characterized in that the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means (MPU62) is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of H6.

According to the feature H7, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the mode information is calculated in units of each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature H8. The information calculation means is any one of the features H1 to H7, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation trigger that can be repeatedly generated occurs in a situation where the control means (MPU62) is supplied with operating power. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature H8, since the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in a situation where the operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information is managed in detail within one business day. Is possible.

Feature H9. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period.
The period measuring means stops the measurement of the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8.

According to the feature H9, since the mode information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, the calculation frequency of the mode information can be easily adjusted only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in the situation where the game is not executed, the measurement for the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in the situation in which the game is being executed.

Feature H10. Features H1 to H9 characterized by having an external output means (a function of executing an external output process in the management side CPU 112) that outputs the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature H10, since the aspect information is output to a device outside the gaming machine, it is possible to easily grasp the entering aspect of the gaming ball.

Features H11. The gaming machine according to feature H10, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the aspect information is output to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature H11, when not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine to read the mode information and analyze the entering mode of the game ball, not only the mode information but also the mode information thereof. It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis of the calculation of the aspect information.

Feature H12. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means,
With
The feature H10 or the external output means is characterized in that when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, the external output means outputs the aspect information to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to H11.

According to the feature H12, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to output the information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature H13. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means, and
With
Described in any one of features H1 to H12, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Game machine.

According to the feature H13, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the embodiment is based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible to make the information calculated by the second control means.

Feature H14. A notification control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3205, S3207, and S3208 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (notifying light emitting unit 651) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H13, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature H14, the content corresponding to the aspect information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game in a predetermined period without reading the mode information from the game machine.

Feature H15. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in the board box.
The gaming machine according to feature H14, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to the feature H15, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature H16. The first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means, and
A second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means, and
With
The gaming machine according to feature H14 or H15, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to the feature H16, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result thereof. It is possible to consolidate the functions for executing the notification corresponding to the above in the first control means.

Feature H17. The notification control means controls the notification means so that the first notification is executed when the mode information is the information in the first range, and when the mode information is the information in the second range, the notification control means controls the notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features H14 to H16, characterized in that the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to the feature H17, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature H18. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area.
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage of the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to fifteenth and 17th to eighteenth embodiments, the history memory 117 and the sixteenth embodiment. Then, by making it executed in the main RAM 65), predetermined information (history information in the first to fourth and eighteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments). Is stored in the predetermined storage means (a function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112 in the first to fifteenth, seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments, and in the sixteenth embodiment). (Functions for executing the processes of step S2902, step S2905, step S2908, step S2912, step S2916, step S2920, and step S2923) in the main CPU 63).
Information calculation means (first to first) for calculating mode information corresponding to the entry mode of a game ball in the game area in a predetermined period by using the predetermined information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs. In the seventh, eighth, twelfth, fourteenth, fifteenth, sixteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processes of step S1608, step S1613, and step S1617 in the management side CPU 112, and in the eleventh embodiment, the management side. The function of executing the processes of steps S2008, S2013 and S2017 in the CPU 112, the function of executing the process of step S2202 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth embodiment, and the process of step S2402 in the management side CPU 112 in the eleventh embodiment. In the thirteenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2605 in the management side CPU 112, and in the seventeenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3203 in the main CPU 63).
The result storage execution means (in the twelfth embodiment, steps S2010, step S2014, and step S2018 in the management side CPU 112) sequentially store the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 631). (Function to execute the process of step S2204 in the management side CPU 112 in the thirteenth embodiment) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature H18, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage process of the corresponding information is executed for the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number of balls entering the predetermined ball entry means or the frequency of entry of the game balls into the predetermined ball entry means, and by using this managed information, the predetermined number of balls is predetermined. It is possible to appropriately manage the mode of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and retained by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

In addition, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it is possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entering mode of the gaming ball, or it is possible to externally output the aspect information which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. ..

In addition, the mode information can be accumulated in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read out a plurality of mode information when managing the mode of the result of the game in a predetermined period.

Feature H19. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H18, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature H19, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features H1 to H19, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to fifteenth and 17th to eighteenth embodiments, and the main side in the sixteenth embodiment. By making it executed in the RAM 65), predetermined information (history information in the first to fourth and eighteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) is determined. First storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (a function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the first to fifteenth and 17th to eighteenth embodiments, and a main side in the sixteenth embodiment. A function of executing the processes of step S2902, step S2905, step S2908, step S2912, step S2916, step S2920, and step S2923 in the CPU 63).
When a specific event occurs as a result of the game, the storage of the corresponding information is executed in the predetermined storage means, so that the specific information (history information in the first to 14th and 18th embodiments, the first In the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments, the second storage execution means (the first to fifteenth and the seventeenth to eighteenth embodiments) so that the numerical information measured by the counter is stored in the predetermined storage means. A function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, in the 16th embodiment, a function of executing the processes of step S2902, step S2905, step S2908, step S2912, step S2916, step S2920 and step S2923 in the main side CPU 63) ,
A first external output means (management side CPU 112) that outputs the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine so that the predetermined information can be recognized as corresponding to the predetermined event. (Function to execute processing for external output) and
A second external output means (management side CPU 112) that outputs the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine so that the specific information can be recognized as corresponding to the specific event. (Function to execute processing for external output) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature I1, the information stored in the predetermined storage means can be read from the gaming machine, and the read information can be used to specify the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event. In addition, when the external output is performed, the predetermined information is output externally so that it can be recognized that the predetermined information corresponds to the predetermined event, and the specific information corresponds to the specific event. The specific information is output to the outside so that the information can be recognized. As a result, even if the information is not processed by the second control means, it is possible to specify the occurrence mode of each event by using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, characterized in that it includes means for externally outputting corresponding information when the predetermined event occurs (a function of executing the process of step S220 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature I2, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means in the configuration in which the corresponding information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event is output externally. As a result, the number of occurrences and frequency of occurrence of predetermined events can be easily grasped by using the correspondence information, and the number and frequency of occurrence of predetermined events can be accurately grasped by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible to grasp.

Feature I3. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein the predetermined information is information on the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is information on the number of times the specific event has occurred.

According to the feature I3, since the predetermined information is the counting information of the number of times the predetermined event has occurred and the specific information is the counting information of the number of times the specific event has occurred, the information capacity of the predetermined information and the specific information is suppressed. It is possible to manage the mode of occurrence of a predetermined event and the mode of occurrence of a specific event.

Feature I4. It is provided with a program output means (a function of executing the process of step S1503 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine by using the information output unit (reading terminal 102).
The first external output means and the second external output means use the information output unit to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of I3.

According to the feature I4, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program. This makes it possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature I5. A selection means for identifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the information stored in the predetermined storage means or the control program, and outputting the information corresponding to the specific result (the information output unit). The gaming machine according to feature I4, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S1502 in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature I5, in the configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage means is externally output by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program, the information to be externally output is the control program and the predetermined information. Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the game machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. As a result, it is possible to read only necessary information even if the information output unit is also used.

Feature I6. Based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit, the selection means stores the information to be output from the information output unit in the predetermined storage means and the control program. The gaming machine according to feature I5, which is characterized by specifying which of them is.

According to the feature I6, which information should be output from the information output unit is specified based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration regarding the selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature I7. A chip (MPU62) having a program storage means (main side ROM64) that stores the control program in advance is characterized by having the information output unit, the first external output means, and the second external output means. Features The gaming machine according to any one of I4 to I6.

According to the feature I7, the signal path for the information output unit can be integrated in the chip. As a result, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described above while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the information output unit.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features I1 to I7, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. A program output means (a function of executing the process of step S1503 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine by using the information output unit (reading terminal 102), and
An information output means (a function of executing an external output process in the management CPU 112) that outputs special information using the information output unit, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature J1, it is possible to output special information to the outside by using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output special information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature J2. A selection means (step S1502 in the main CPU 63) for identifying which of the special information and the control program the information to be output from the information output unit is, and outputting the information corresponding to the specific result. The gaming machine according to feature J1, which is characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of the above.

According to the feature J2, in the configuration in which the special information is output externally by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program, the information to be output externally is either the control program or the special information. The program is specified on the game machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. As a result, it is possible to read only necessary information even if the information output unit is also used.

Features J3. Based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit, the selection means determines which of the special information and the control program the information to be output from the information output unit is. The gaming machine according to feature J2, which is characterized by being specified.

According to the feature J3, which information should be output from the information output unit is specified based on the information received from the external device electrically connected to the information output unit. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration regarding the selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

Features J4. Any one of features J1 to J3, wherein the chip (MPU62) having the program storage means (main side ROM64) for storing the control program in advance has the information output unit and the information output means. The game machine described in.

According to the feature J4, the signal path for the information output unit can be integrated in the chip. As a result, it is possible to obtain an excellent effect as described above while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the information output unit.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features J1 to J4, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. A first control means (main side CPU 63) and a second control means (management side CPU 112) are provided.
The first control means
A privilege granting means (a function of executing the process of step S219 in the main CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step S1008 in the payout side CPU 92) for granting the privilege to the player when a predetermined event occurs, and
Information transmission means (a function of executing management output processing in the main CPU 63) for transmitting predetermined event information corresponding to the predetermined event when the predetermined event occurs, and
With
When the second control means receives the predetermined event information, the information corresponding to the predetermined event information is stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to fifteenth, 17th to eighteenth embodiments, the history memories 117 and 16th. In the embodiment, by causing the main RAM 65) to execute the predetermined information, the predetermined number of occurrences or the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event can be specified by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine (1st to 14th). , The predetermined storage executing means (1st to 15th) so that the history information in the 18th embodiment and the numerical information measured by the counter in the 15th to 17th embodiments are stored in the predetermined storage means. , 17th to 18th embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, and in the 16th embodiment, steps S2902, step S2905, step S2908, step S2912, step S2916, step S2920 and A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S2923).

According to the feature K1, a privilege is given to the player when a predetermined event occurs. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting that a predetermined event occurs. In this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be specified by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine. The predetermined information to be stored is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for the gaming machine to store information for managing the number or frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event, and by using this managed information, it is appropriate to manage the mode of occurrence of the predetermined event. It becomes possible to do it. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and retained by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, since the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the privilege granting means has the predetermined storage execution means, the processing load of the first control means does not increase extremely. However, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as already explained.

Feature K2. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to the feature K2, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means can be performed. It becomes possible to prevent it.

Feature K3. When a specific event occurs, the predetermined storage executing means executes a storage process of information corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event in the predetermined storage means, so that the number or frequency of occurrence of the specific event can be determined by the gaming machine or outside the gaming machine. Specific information that can be specified by the device (history information in the first to fourth and eighteenth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the fifteenth to seventeenth embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means. To be done
The first control means
A function of outputting any of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63 to transmit the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the predetermined event occurs. )When,
A function of outputting any of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63 to transmit the second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the specific event occurs. )When,
The gaming machine according to the feature K1 or K2, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.

According to the feature K3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined event but also the specific information corresponding to the specific event is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the occurrence mode of a predetermined event but also the occurrence mode of a specific event. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the frequency of occurrence between the predetermined event and the specific event.

Further, when a predetermined event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a specific event occurs, the second information is transmitted using the second signal path. It is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the types of information to be transmitted correspond to the signal path, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information by the second control means.

Features K4. The first control means is a third transmission means that transmits identification information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not it is in a predetermined situation to the second control means using a third path. (In the first to seventh, ninth to fifteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the sixth embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode in the main CPU 63. The gaming machine according to feature K3, which is characterized by having a function of outputting one of a medium signal, a high frequency support mode signal, and a door open signal).

According to the feature K4, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is the predetermined situation. Further, since the identification information that enables the identification of whether or not the situation is predetermined is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the second control means transmits the identification information to the first information and the first information. 2 It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as information.

Feature K5. The first control means transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event to the second control means. The gaming machine according to feature K3 or K4, which comprises a transmitting means (a function of executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63).

According to the feature K5, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to a predetermined event and the second information corresponds to a specific event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. It is not necessary to store the correspondence of these information in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature K6. The gaming machine according to feature K5, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to the feature K6, when the supply of the operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that a predetermined event and a specific event can occur. In the situation, it is possible to make it possible for the second control means to identify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means.

Feature K7. The feature K5 or K6, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Game machine.

According to the feature K7, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with.

Feature K8. When the second control means receives the identification information, the second control means can identify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event. The feature K5 to K7 is described in any one of features K5 to K7, which comprises means (a function of executing a correspondence relationship setting process in the management side CPU 112) for storing the information in the correspondence relationship storage means (correspondence relationship memory 116). Game machine.

According to the feature K8, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the type of event is stored in the second control means. As a result, information that enables the second control means to specify the type of event corresponding to the information to be transmitted is provided to the second control means each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. You don't have to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature K9. The first control means is a third transmission means that transmits the third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation to the second control means by using the third path. (In the first to seventh, ninth to fifteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the sixth embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode in the main CPU 63. It has a function to output either a medium signal, a high frequency support mode signal, or a door open signal).
The feature K5 is characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that can identify whether or not the predetermined situation is present, even if the identification information is not received. The gaming machine according to any one of K8.

According to the feature K9, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is the predetermined situation. Further, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not it is in a predetermined situation can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. .. This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature K10. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K9, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature K10, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features K1 to K10, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the feature E group, the feature F group, the feature G group, the feature H group, the feature I group, and the feature J group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration in which an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit are provided as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to manage the gaming machine preferably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. With the first control means (main CPU 63)
A second control means (management side CPU 112) that receives information transmitted from the first control means, and
With
The first control means
A function of outputting any of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63 to transmit the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the first event occurs. )When,
A function of outputting any of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63 to transmit the second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the second event occurs. )When,
Identification information transmitting means (main side) that transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event to the second control means. Function to execute recognition processing in CPU 63) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature L1, when the first event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the second event occurs, the second signal path is used. Then, the second information is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the types of information to be transmitted correspond to the signal path, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information by the second control means.

Further, since the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, these information It is not necessary to store the correspondence between the above in the second control means in advance. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to the feature L2, when the supply of the operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means In a situation where a game ball can enter the ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

Feature L3. The identification information transmitting means according to the feature L1 or L2, characterized in that the identification information is transmitted to the second control means by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Game machine.

According to the feature L3, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication as compared with.

Feature L4. When the second control means receives the identification information, the second control means can identify that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event. One of the features L1 to L3, which is characterized by having a means (a function of executing a correspondence relation setting process in the management side CPU 112) for storing the relation information in the correspondence relation storage means (correspondence relation memory 116). Described gaming machine.

According to the feature L4, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means is stored in the second control means. As a result, it is necessary to provide the second control means with information that enables the second control means to identify the event corresponding to the information to be transmitted each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. Is gone. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature L5. The first control means is a third transmission means that transmits the third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not the situation is predetermined to the second control means using the third path. (In the first to seventh, ninth to fifteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the tenth embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode in the main CPU 63. It has a function to output either a medium signal, a high frequency support mode signal, or a door open signal).
The feature L1 is characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that can identify whether or not the predetermined situation is present, even if the identification information is not received. The gaming machine according to any one of L4.

According to the feature L5, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the first event and the occurrence mode of the second event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is predetermined. Further, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not it is in a predetermined situation can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. .. This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature L6. As a signal path capable of transmitting information from the first control means to the second control means, a number larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, characterized in that a signal path is provided.

According to the feature L6, since the number of signal paths provided is larger than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, the information can be obtained according to the model of the gaming machine. Even if the number of types increases or decreases, it is possible to deal with it without changing the configuration related to the signal path. Therefore, it is possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature L7. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L6, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature L7, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features L1 to L7, the features A1 to A36, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D3, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F41, the features G1 to G20, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H19, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L7 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the above-mentioned feature K group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration in which an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit are provided as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to make the configuration related to communication suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 24 ... Game board, 24a ... Out port, 24b ... Nail, 27 ... Game ball launch mechanism, 31 ... General winning port, 32 ... Special electric winning device, 33 ... 1st operating port, 34 ... 2nd operating Mouth, 34a ... General electric accessory, 35 ... 1st through gate, 39 ... 2nd through gate, 61 ... Main control board, 62 ... MPU, 63 ... Main side CPU, 65 ... Main side RAM, 92 ... Payout side CPU , 102 ... reading terminal, 112 ... management side CPU, 116 ... correspondence memory, 171 ... passage entrance, 172 ... escape passage, 173 ... passage exit, 174 ... exit roof, 180 ... adjustment mechanism, 181c ... left standing wall , 181d ... right side upright wall, 181e ... discharge protrusion, 181g ... right side for discharge, 181h ... left side upright wall, 183 ... rotating body, 183b to 183e ... recessed part, 184 ... adjustment drive unit, 185 ... intake Mouth, 188 to 191 ... blades, 188a to 191a ... peripheral surface, 188b to 191b ... front surface, 192 ... collision avoidance groove, 220 ... adjustment mechanism, 230 ... rotating body, 241-244 ... support surface, 241a to 244a ... Step surface, 252 ... upper right standing wall, 254 ... rotating shaft, 256 ... discharge port, 261 ... left standing wall, 262 ... intake port, 263a ... discharge end, 291 ... left guide nail, 292 ... right guide nail , 330 ... Adjustment mechanism, 340 ... Rotating body, 343 ... Blade member, 344 ... Rotating shaft, 352 ... Standing wall, 371 ... Downstream guide nail, 430 ... Adjusting mechanism, 440 ... Rotating body, 472 ... Guide nail, 530 ... Adjustment mechanism, 545 ... Guide passage, 546 ... Adjustment unit, 560 ... Electric nail, 560a ... Nail drive unit, 581 ... First operating port, 610 ... Game board, 620 ... Adjustment mechanism, 621 ... Discharge port, 631 ... Calculation Result memory, 651 ... Light emitting unit for notification, PA ... Game area, C4 ... General electric accessory opening counter, C5 ... Initial value counter for opening, T1 ... Winning judgment value table for low frequency.

Claims (2)

The front body of the pachinko machine that can be opened and closed,
Launch operation means operated to launch the game ball,
A predetermined detection means for detecting a game ball and
A game value-adding means that is electrically connected to the predetermined detection means and executes a process for adding a game value to the game.
A processing execution means that is electrically connected to the game value-adding means and executes a predetermined process,
A payout control means that is electrically connected to the game value-adding means and drives and controls the payout means.
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game value-adding means is
A first reference information storage means that stores reference information that is information used in the process for imparting the game value and is information that is referred to for the detection of the predetermined detection means.
The reference stored in the first reference information storage means after the predetermined supply of power to the gaming machine is started and before the execution of the predetermined processing for advancing the game is started. A first transmission means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to the information to the processing execution means, and
A second transmission means that transmits a predetermined information signal based on the ball entry information, which is information acquired based on the detection by the predetermined detection means, to the processing execution means.
A third transmission means that transmits a predetermined state signal to the processing execution means when the front body of the gaming machine is opened and a predetermined state occurs.
Equipped with a,
The processing execution means is
A second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the game value-adding means, and a second reference information storage means.
An execution means that executes the predetermined process based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means.
A processing result information storage means for storing processing result information which is information on the processing result of the predetermined processing by the execution means, and a processing result information storage means.
A means for storing information corresponding to the predetermined state signal transmitted from the third transmission means when the predetermined state signal is received, and
With
The payout control means is configured so that the reference information signal corresponding to the reference information stored in the first reference information storage means is not transmitted, and the game value adding means is based on the result of the game. The payout control means executes drive control of the payout means based on the transmitted payout instruction signal.
The payout control means includes means for executing a process for externally outputting a specific signal to the outside of the gaming machine based on the execution of the drive control of the payout means.
The game value-adding means is a main control means for controlling the progress of the game.
The processing execution means is an effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect.
The predetermined process is a process corresponding to the state of the game machine and is different from the process of paying out the game ball . The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the machine is a pachinko machine.

Images